JP2022176331A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a performance high in amusement.SOLUTION: Performance control means can execute a winning notification performance for notifying that a special game is to be executed on the basis of a result of the determination on whether or not to execute a special game. The performance control means can also execute a change performance that can be gradually changed to any stage of a predetermined stage or lower, and a precursory performance that is a precursor of the change performance. The possibility of the winning notification performance being executed becomes higher as the change performance changes more. The precursory performance suggests the possibility of the change performance being changed to one stage of a predetermined stage or lower.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with effect control means for controlling effects.

For example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins in a starting hole, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player. The pattern is stopped and displayed. In this type of game machine, a step-up notice is executed that can progress step by step up to any number of steps equal to or less than the predetermined number of steps with a predetermined number of steps as the upper limit, and finally progresses to what number of steps. Alternatively, depending on the display mode of the effect image displayed in each step, there is something that suggests the reliability of the big win (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2020-80893 A

By the way, it cannot be said that the effects performed by the conventional game machines are sufficiently interesting, and there is a demand for further improvement of the interestingness.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems,
determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to execute a winning notification effect for notifying that the special game will be executed,
It is possible to execute a change performance that can be changed stepwise to any stage below a predetermined stage, and a sign performance that is a sign of the change performance,
The change effect is a effect in which the more the change effect changes, the higher the possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed,
The premonitory effect is characterized in that the change effect is an effect capable of suggesting the possibility that the change effect will change to one step below the predetermined step.

According to this game machine, the more the changing performance changes, the higher the possibility that the winning notification performance will be executed. It is suggested that there is a possibility that the Therefore, the player can recognize in advance the degree of possibility that the changing effect will change to the first stage based on the predictive effect, and the predictive effect that the changing effect will be executed. It is possible to effectively suggest the possibility that the change production will change to the first stage while making the expectation by.

According to this invention, it is possible to execute a highly entertaining presentation.

Front view of gaming machine 1 Front view of game board 2 Enlarged view of main display 40 in FIG. Explanatory diagram for explaining opening/closing control of the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 Block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device provided in the game machine 1 Explanatory diagram for explaining jackpot random numbers and pattern random numbers Explanatory diagram for explaining the game flow in the gaming machine 1 Explanatory diagram exemplifying the flow of various effects such as ready-to-win effects in the normal game state A screen diagram illustrating an effect in the normal game state (Part 1) Screen diagram exemplifying the effect in the normal game state (part 2) A screen diagram showing an example of an effect when a V prize is announced during a jackpot game Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of composite expectation production An explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of the character standby effect and special cut-in and the reliability of the jackpot. Screen diagram for explaining related production Explanatory diagram showing a specific example of related effects Flowchart for explaining the execution period of various related effects Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a series of subjugation reach Explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery performed according to the operation during subjugation reach Explanatory diagram for explaining pre-determination information Explanatory diagram for explaining provisional loss information and provisional winning information A diagram showing a specific example of an icon change effect using a hold icon Screen diagram showing a specific example of the special figure 2 reservation jackpot suggestion production Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of chance production and suggestion production Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability and features of chance production and suggestion production Screen diagram showing a specific example of the discomfort/loss notification effect A A screen diagram showing a specific example of the discomfort/failure notification effect B A screen diagram showing a specific example of the discomfort/failure notification effect C A screen diagram for explaining the flow of the first change effect and the stage-related effect Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability and features of the first change effect and the stage-related effect Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the omen effect and the second change effect Explanatory diagram for explaining the second change effect and the omen effect jackpot reliability A screen diagram showing a specific example of the precursor effect when the second change effect is not executed. A screen diagram showing a specific example of the foreshadowing effect and the second change effect ending in the second stage. Screen diagram showing a specific example of the second change effect that ends at the third stage of the omen effect and the upper limit (part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of the second change effect that ends at the third stage of the omen effect and the upper limit (Part 2) Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of stage change effect and expected effect A screen diagram illustrating a series of effects in which the step-change effect ends in the first stage and develops into an expected effect. A screen diagram exemplifying a series of effects in which the stage change effect ends at the upper limit of the third stage and develops into an expected effect (No. 1) A screen diagram exemplifying a series of effects in which the stage change effect ends at the upper limit of the third stage and develops into an expected effect (Part 2) Explanatory diagram for explaining storage areas of the main RAM 83 and information stored in each storage area. Flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80 Detailed flowchart of sensor detection processing in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of Special 2 preliminary determination processing in step S210 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of Special 1 preliminary determination processing in step S218 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of big hit determination processing in step S308 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of variation pattern selection processing in step S309 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of special figure stop time processing in step S317 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 41 (Part 1) Detailed flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 41 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 41 (part 3) Flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the sub-control board 90 Detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of pending command reception processing in step S13 of FIG. Flowchart exemplifying jackpot suggestion effect processing in special figure 2 reservation Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the notice effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of special cut-in effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of character standby effect pattern setting processing in step S166 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of subjugation effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the chance effect pattern setting process in step S168 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of suggestive effect pattern setting process in step S169 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of effect pattern setting process for first change effect/related effect in step S173 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of effect pattern setting process for second change effect/prediction effect in step S174 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of stage change effect/expectation effect pattern setting process in step S176 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of related effect pattern setting process in step S172 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of operation reception processing in step S30 of FIG. 52 (part 1) Detailed flowchart of operation acceptance processing in step S30 of FIG. 52 (part 2) Detailed flowchart of operation reception processing in step S30 of FIG. 52 (Part 3) 4 is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 100; Detailed flowchart of image display control processing in step S71 of FIG.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings.

[Configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a configuration example of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 30 and a gaming board 2 mounted inside the gaming machine frame 30 . The game machine frame 30 includes a front frame 31 having a decorative surface, a main body frame for mounting the game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame for fixing the game machine 1 to island facilities of the hall. there is The front frame 31 supports a glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 3 in which game balls can flow down. ing.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 includes a shooting handle 32 for shooting game balls, an upper tray 33 for storing game balls to be supplied to a shooting device (not shown), and an upper tray. A lower tray 34 for storing game balls which cannot be stored in 33 is provided. When the player grips the shooting handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper tray 33 are guided to the shooting device and shot with the shooting intensity according to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 32.例文帳に追加The shot game ball moves along the rail member 4 located on the left side of the game area 3, is guided to the upper position of the game area 3, and comes into contact with the game nails, windmills, etc. provided in the game area 3. As a result, it flows down the game area 3 along the game board 2 while changing its moving direction.

A ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4, and the ball return prevention piece 6 prevents the game ball that has once entered the game area 3 from returning to the launching device side. A stop button is provided at a position close to the shooting handle 32, and the player can temporarily shoot the game ball by operating this stop button without returning the shooting handle 32 to its initial posture. It is possible to stop.

When the player makes a "left shot" by rotating the shooting handle 32 by a small rotation angle, the game ball is shot with a relatively weak shooting strength, and the game ball flows down the left game area 3L. On the other hand, when the player hits to the right by rotating the shooting handle 32 by a large rotation angle, the game ball is shot with a relatively strong shooting intensity, and the game ball is positioned on the upper right side of the center decoration 10. After moving along the rail member 4, it flows down the right game area 3R.

A first starting port 21, a second starting port 22, an opening/closing member 23, and three general winning ports 24 are provided in the passage path of the game ball in the left game area 3L ( See Figure 2). In addition, on the passage path of the game ball in the right game area 3R, there are the second starting port 22, the opening and closing member 23, one general winning port 24, the gate 25, and the first big winning port as accessories related to winning and judgment. 26, an opening/closing member 27, a second prize winning opening 28, and an opening/closing member 29 are provided (see FIG. 2).

In the process of flowing down the game area 3 along the game board 2, the game ball shot from the shooting device passes through the first starting hole 21, the second starting hole 22, the general winning hole 24, the first big winning hole 26, and the There is a case where one of the second big prize openings 28 is won. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34 according to the place where the prize was won. For example, every time one game ball wins in the first start port 21, four prize balls are paid out, and each time one game ball wins in the second start port 22, one prize ball is paid out. Five prize balls are paid out each time one game ball wins in the general prize winning port 24.例文帳に追加Also, ten prize balls are paid out each time one game ball wins in the first big prize winning port 26, and ten prizes every time one game ball wins in the second big prize winning port 28. A ball is paid out. Game balls that do not win any prizes are ejected from the game area 3 through an ejection port formed at the lower end of the game board 2 .

A center decoration 10 is provided in an opening formed in the center of the game board 2 . The center decorative body 10 includes a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll, and a warp portion 12 having a warp entrance and a warp exit at both ends. A game ball flowing down the left game area 3L may enter the warp portion 12 from the warp entrance, and this game ball is discharged from the warp exit and guided to the stage portion 11. - 特許庁A guide groove is formed at the center of the stage portion 11 in the left-right direction so that the game ball rolling on the stage portion 11 falls toward the first starting port 21 . Therefore, the game ball guided to the stage portion 11 via the warp portion 12 enters the first start port 21 more than the game ball flowing down the left game area 3L without passing through the warp portion 12. easy.

The first starting port 21 is a starting area that is always open. The second starting port 22 is a starting area that is closed when the opening/closing member 23 as a normal electric accessory is not operating, and is opened when the opening/closing member 23 is operated. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22), it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Then, on the first special symbol display device 41 (or the second special symbol display device 42), which will be described later, the symbols are variably displayed, and the symbols (jackpot symbols or losing symbols) indicating the result of the determination are stopped and displayed. Here, when the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed to open the first jackpot 26 and the second jackpot 28 .

In the following description, the judgment executed according to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21 is called "first special symbol judgment", and is executed according to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22. This determination is called "second special symbol determination", and these are collectively referred to as "special symbol determination".

The first big winning opening 26 is a special winning area opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. An opening/closing member 27 , which is a plate for opening and closing the first big winning hole 26 , is provided at the opening of the first big winning hole 26 . The first big winning hole 26 is normally closed by the opening/closing member 27 because the opening/closing member 27 maintains a closed posture forming the same plane as the game board 2 . On the other hand, when the first special symbol (or second special symbol) as a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 (or second special symbol display device 42), the opening/closing member 27 is operated. Then, a big winning game is executed to open the first big winning port 26.例文帳に追加During this jackpot game, a long opening round game is performed in which the opening/closing member 27 maintains the open posture (see FIG. 2) in which the first big prize winning port 26 is opened, and then returns to the closed posture in which the first big prize winning port 26 is closed. will be In the long open round game that opens the first big winning hole 26, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the first big winning hole 26, or the first big winning hole 26 is opened. It continues until a predetermined time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses (without a predetermined number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 26). In this way, a long opening round game in which the first big winning hole 26 is opened for a long time is performed during the jackpot game. Therefore, the player can get more prize balls than when the big winning game is not performed by hitting right during the long open round game in which the first big winning hole 26 is long opened. .

The second big winning opening 28 is a special winning area opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. An opening/closing member 29 , which is a blade member for opening and closing the second big winning hole 28 , is provided at the opening of the second big winning hole 28 . The second big winning opening 28 is normally closed by the opening/closing member 29 (see FIG. 4(A)). On the other hand, when the first special symbol (or second special symbol) as a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 (or second special symbol display device 42), the opening/closing member 29 is operated. Then, a big winning game is executed to open the second big winning port 28.例文帳に追加During the jackpot game, the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open position (see FIGS. 2, 4B and 4C) to open the second big winning hole 28, and then closes the second big winning hole 28. A round game of returning to the closed posture is performed.

As will be described in detail later, in the round game for opening and closing the second big winning opening 28, the second big winning opening is set so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can easily enter the second big winning opening 28. A long opening round game in which the mouth 28 is opened long and a short opening round game in which the second big winning opening 28 is short-opened so as to make it extremely difficult for the game balls to enter the second big winning opening 28 are prepared. there is In the long opening round game in which the second big winning hole 28 is long opened, 100 (=10×10 count) prize balls are paid out by the player hitting to the right. Therefore, the player hits to the right during the long opening round game in which the second big winning hole 28 is long opened, so that the player can obtain more prize balls than when the big winning game is not performed. .

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game, the operations of the opening/closing member 27 and the opening/closing member 29 are controlled so that the player can acquire game balls as game media. A jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regarding the short-open round game in which the second large winning opening 28 is briefly opened, the opening time, which is the time during which the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open position in which the second large winning opening 28 is opened, is 0.1. It is set to a very short time of seconds. Therefore, even if the player hits to the right during the short-open round game of the second big winning hole 28, the game ball basically does not enter the second big winning hole 28, and the prize balls are not awarded. No payment is made.

For convenience of explanation, FIG. 2 shows that the opening/closing members 27 and 29 are in an open posture to open the big prize openings 26 and 28 when the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 70 of the image display device 7. Although a state in which the opening and closing members 27 and 29 are open is shown in the figure, actually, the opening and closing members 27 and 29 are not in the open posture during the variable display of the performance symbols. In addition, in each round game in the jackpot game, either the first big winning hole 26 or the second big winning hole 28 is used, so actually, as shown in FIG. will never be released.

An opening/closing member 23 (see FIG. 2) is arranged close to the second starting port 22 . The opening/closing member 23 can change its posture between a closed posture in which the opening/closing member 23 closes the second starting port 22 and an open posture in which the second starting port 22 is opened (see FIG. 2).

The second starting port 22 is normally closed by an opening/closing member 23 . On the other hand, when the game ball hit right by the player passes through the gate 25, no prize ball is paid out, but it is determined whether or not to open the second start port 22.例文帳に追加Here, when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened, the opening/closing member 23 maintains the open posture for a predetermined time and then returns to the closed posture for a specified number of times. In this way, the second starting port 22 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the opening/closing member 23 is not operating, whereas it is in a state in which the game ball can easily pass by operating the opening/closing member 23. Become.

In addition, in the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 25 is referred to as "normal symbol determination".

The general winning opening 24 is always open like the first start opening 21, and is a winning opening from which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. However, unlike the first starting hole 21 and the like, even if a game ball wins the general winning hole 24, no determination is made.

[Configuration example of main display 40]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the main display 40 in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the main display device 40 includes a first special symbol display device 41, a second special symbol display device 42, a normal symbol display device 43, a first special symbol reservation display device 44, and a second special symbol. It is composed of a holding display 45, a normal drawing holding display 46, a round display 47, a game state display 48, a shooting direction display 49, and the like.

The first special symbol display device 41 is configured to have eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and when the first special symbol determination is performed, the symbol is variably displayed and then the first special symbol is displayed. The determination result of the first special symbol determination is notified by stop-displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, by sequentially lighting the eight LEDs, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and each LED is set for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5) in combination according to the determination result of the first special symbol determination. (seconds) to stop and display the pattern.

The second special symbol display device 42 is configured to have eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and when the second special symbol determination is performed, the symbol is variably displayed and then the second special symbol is displayed. The determination result of the second special symbol determination is notified by stop-displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, by sequentially lighting the eight LEDs, the symbols are displayed with variation, and each LED is set for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5) in combination according to the determination result of the second special symbol determination (seconds) to stop and display the pattern.

The first special symbol display device 41 (or the second special symbol display device 42) is a symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination), and notifies that it is a big hit. "symbol" or "losing pattern" for notifying that the game is a loss is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, a plurality of different jackpot patterns are prepared according to the type of jackpot. A big winning game is performed to open the second big winning hole 28 .

The normal symbol display device 43 is composed of two LEDs indicated by "s to t", and when the normal symbol determination is performed, the symbol is variably displayed and then the determination result of the normal symbol determination is displayed. The determination result of the normal symbol determination is reported by stop-displaying the symbol. Specifically, for example, the above two LEDs are alternately lit to perform a variable display of the pattern, and each LED is lit for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a lighting mode according to the determination result of the normal pattern determination. The pattern is stopped and displayed by lighting it. Here, when the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 22 is opened by operating the opening/closing member 23 in an opening pattern according to the current game state.

In the following description, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 are called "special symbols", and the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 43 are "normal symbols". shall be called Also, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is called "first special symbol", and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is called "second special symbol". may be distinguished.

The first special symbol reservation display 44 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "u to v", and displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination according to the lighting mode of these LEDs. The second special symbol reservation indicator 45 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "w~x", and displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination according to the lighting mode of these LEDs. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reservations is set to "4". The normal pattern holding display 46 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "q to r", and displays the number of normal pattern judgment holdings according to the lighting mode of these LEDs.

The round display device 47 is used in a jackpot game executed in accordance with the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot pattern, which is stopped when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device 41 or the second special pattern display device 42. Displays the number of rounds indicating how many rounds the game will be played. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot game including three round games is executed, when a jackpot game including five round games is executed, and when a jackpot game including ten round games is executed is executed, and Therefore, in this embodiment, the round indicator 47 includes a 3R LED, a 5R LED, and a 10R LED. be notified.

The game state display device 48 is composed of three LEDs indicated by “a1 to a3”, and displays the game state of the game machine 1 according to lighting modes of these LEDs. The shooting direction indicator 49 is composed of two LEDs indicated by "y to z", and displays the shooting direction of the game ball by lighting modes of these LEDs. That is, it displays whether the player should hit left or right.

[Configuration example of effect means provided in gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game board 2 and the front frame 31 are provided with a decorative member 13, a movable decorative member 14, a frame lamp 37, a speaker 38, a performance indicator 125, and various effects. A production 1st special figure suspension display 126, a production 2nd special figure suspension display 127 and the like are provided. An image display device 7 is provided behind the game board 2 .

The decorative member 13 incorporates a board surface lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) configured with a plurality of LEDs. By doing so, various productions are performed with light.

The movable decorative member 14 is arranged in front of the image display device 7 and behind the decorative member 13 . A plurality of LEDs are built in the movable decorative member 14, and the movable decorative member 14 performs a predetermined effect by movement of the movable decorative member 14 itself and/or light. In this embodiment, a predetermined space is provided between the game board 2 and the display screen 70 of the image display device 7 so that the movable decorative member 14 can move. It is constructed so that it can move up and down. The movable decorative member 14 is usually placed in an initial position (see FIG. 2) where most of it is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the lower end of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. On the other hand, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern and the display screen 70 when a notice effect with a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed using the image display device 7 or the speaker 38. Drops into operating position covering most of it.

The frame lamp 37 includes a plurality of LEDs built in various parts of the front frame 31, and the pattern of lighting and blinking of each LED can be changed, and the emission color of each LED can be changed. Various effects are performed with light.

The image display device 7 is a liquid crystal display device that displays an effect image on its display screen 70 , and the player can view the display screen 70 through an opening formed in the center of the game board 2 . On this display screen 70, the same number of reserved images (holding (icon), and a variation suggestive image (the icon) that suggests that the special symbol is being variably displayed. The image display device 7 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display an effect image, and may be another image display device such as an EL display device.

The speaker 38 outputs sound effects such as music, voice, and sound effects in synchronization with or asynchronously with the display effects performed on the display screen 70 to perform sound effects.

The performance display device 125 is configured with two LEDs, and variably displays the symbols according to the variable display of the special symbols and the performance symbols, and determines the special symbols according to the stop display of the special symbols and the performance symbols. The symbol that informs the determination result of is stopped and displayed. This performance display 125 notifies the determination result of the special symbol determination by the combination of lighting/lighting out of each LED and the lighting color.

The production first special figure suspension display 126 is configured with two LEDs, and the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED is the same as that displayed on the first special figure suspension display 44. 1 Display the pending number of special symbol determination. The effect second special figure suspension display 127 is configured with two LEDs, and the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED is the same as that displayed on the second special figure suspension display 45. 2 Display the pending number of special symbol determination.

[Configuration Example of Input Means Provided in Gaming Machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 is provided with a first effect button 35 and a second effect button 36 as input means for inputting by the player. The first effect button 35 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The second effect button 36 is a push button for inputting operation information when the player grips the grip portion of the second effect button 36 and presses the second effect button 36 . In the gaming machine 1, an effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 may be performed.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 1 , an operation lever 98 is provided on the front frame 31 in addition to the first effect button 35 and the second effect button 36 . This operating lever 98 is configured to have a grip portion and a lever button. The grip can be tilted in any of a number of directions, including front, back, left, and right, while being held by a player. The lever button is provided at the upper end of the grip portion, and operation information indicating that any direction has been selected by pressing the lever button with the thumb while the grip portion is tilted in any direction. (direction selection information) can be input. Further, by pressing the lever button without tilting the grip portion in any direction from the initial posture, it is possible to input operation information (direction non-selection information) indicating that no direction has been selected.

Note that the configuration of the input means is not limited to that illustrated in this embodiment, and other configurations may be used. That is, for example, in the present embodiment, the game machine 1 has three input means, but the number of input means may be one, two, or four or more. Further, the input means is not limited to push buttons and operation levers, and other input means such as a touch panel capable of detecting the player's touch operation, or an optical sensor capable of detecting the player's hand held over the display screen 70, for example. may be

[Internal Configuration Example of Second Grand Prize Opening 28]
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening/closing control of the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287. As shown in FIG. An opening/closing member 29 that opens and closes the second big winning hole 28 is provided at the opening of the second big winning hole 28 (see FIGS. 1 and 4A). In addition, as illustrated in FIGS. 4A to 4C, inside the second big winning hole 28, there are a second big winning hole sensor 281, a V winning hole sensor 283, an outlet sensor 284, a slide member 285 etc. are provided.

The second big winning hole sensor 281 detects a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 28. In this embodiment, 10 balls are detected each time a game ball passes through the second big winning hole sensor 281. Prize balls are paid out. The V winning opening sensor 283 detects passage of a game ball to a V winning opening 287 (an example of a special winning area) defined by the V winning opening sensor 283 . The outlet sensor 284 detects passage of a game ball to the outlet defined by the outlet sensor 284 . The sliding member 285 guides the game ball that has passed through the second big winning slot sensor 281 to the V winning slot 287 or the discharge slot, and is slidable in the horizontal direction (the width direction of the gaming machine 1) in FIG. It is configured. 4(A) and (B) illustrate a state in which the slide member 285 is placed at the right position to block the V winning opening 287, and FIGS. 4(C) and (D) show the slide member 285 The state arranged at the left position where the V winning opening 287 is opened is illustrated.

When the jackpot game is not being played or during the execution of the long opening round game in which the first big winning hole 26 is long opened, the second big winning hole 28 is closed by the opening/closing member 29 and the V winning hole 287 is closed. It is closed by a slide member 285 (see FIG. 4A). On the other hand, in the round game that opens and closes the second big winning opening 28, the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 can be in the following states.

Specifically, in the round game for opening and closing the second big winning hole 28, as illustrated in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the opening and closing member 29 may be rotated to open the second big winning opening 28 . In this case, although the second big winning hole 28 is open, the V winning hole 287 is still blocked by the slide member 285, so even if the game ball enters the second big winning hole 28, the game ball It does not pass through the V winning opening 287 but passes through the outlet sensor 284 .

In addition, in the round game for opening and closing the second big winning opening 28, as illustrated in FIGS. There is a case where it moves from the position to the left position and becomes an open state in which the V winning opening 287 is opened. In this case, since both the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are open, the game ball entering the second large winning opening 28 passes through the V winning opening 287 (that is, the V winning opening detected by the sensor 283).

The V winning opening sensor 283 functions as a so-called probability variable switch, and as described above, when both the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are in the open state, the game ball has won a V prize. When (the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283), after the jackpot game with this V winning is completed, the game is controlled in the "probability variable game state" described later. On the other hand, when the game ball does not win the V prize when both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are in the open state, after the jackpot game ends, the "time saving game state" described later. will control the game.

In addition, in the round game for opening and closing the second large prize winning port 28, as illustrated in FIG. 4D, the opening and closing member 29 is not operated, so that the second large prize winning port 28 is closed. In addition, there is a case where the slide member 285 moves from the right position to the left position and the V winning opening 287 is opened. In this case, although the V winning hole 287 is open, the second big winning hole 28 is difficult to enter, so the game ball does not enter the second big winning hole 28 .

In addition, the transparent member provided at the position corresponding to the area containing the second big winning opening sensor 281, the V winning opening sensor 283, the discharge opening sensor 284, the slide member 285, etc. corresponds to the V winning opening sensor 283. The letter "V" is written at the position where the two are located (see Fig. 2). Therefore, the player can easily identify the position of the V winning opening sensor 283 (the position of the V winning opening 287) by looking at the letter "V".

[Configuration of control device provided in game machine 1]
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.
A control device for controlling the operation of the game machine 1 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 . As exemplified in FIG. 5, the control device of the gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 that controls the progress of a game using game balls, and a sub-control board that comprehensively controls effects based on information from the main control board 80. It is composed of a control board 90, an image sound control board 100 that controls effects by images and sounds, and a lamp control board 120 that controls effects by various lamps and movable members. In this embodiment, the main control board 80 functions as a game control section that controls the progress of the game, and the sub control board 90, the image sound control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 function as an effect control section that controls effects. . The configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the sub-control board 90, the image sound control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 may be configured by one board.

<Configuration Example of Main Control Board 80>
The main control board 80 has a main CPU 81 , a main ROM 82 and a main RAM 83 . The main CPU 81 performs various arithmetic processes related to determination and the number of awarded balls to be paid out, based on programs stored in the main ROM 82 . The main RAM 83 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 81 executes the above programs and as a work area for data processing.

The main control board 80 includes a first start sensor 211, a second start sensor 221, a gate sensor 251, a first big prize sensor 261, a second big prize sensor 281, a V prize sensor 283, and an exit sensor. 284, the general winning opening sensor 241, the second starting opening solenoid 222, the first big winning opening solenoid 262, the second big winning opening solenoid 282, and the V winning opening solenoid 286 are connected. Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes four general winning hole sensors 241 corresponding to the four general winning holes 24, but in FIG. 5, for convenience of explanation, only one general winning hole sensor 241 It is written.

The first starting hole sensor 211 detects that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 21 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80 . The second starting hole sensor 221 detects that a game ball has entered the second starting hole 22 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80 . The gate sensor 251 detects passage of a game ball through the gate 25 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80 . The first big winning hole sensor 261 detects that a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 26 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80 . The second big winning hole sensor 281 detects that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 28 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80 . The V winning opening sensor 283 detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 287 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80 . The outlet sensor 284 detects passage of a game ball through the outlet and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80 . The general winning hole sensor 241 detects that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 24 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80 .

The second starting solenoid 222 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 23 so as to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 23 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to perform the second starting. Opening and closing the mouth 22. The first big winning opening solenoid 262 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 27 so as to be able to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 27 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to The big prize opening 26 is opened and closed. The second prize winning opening solenoid 282 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 29 so as to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 29 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to The big prize opening 28 is opened and closed. The V winning opening solenoid 286 is an electric solenoid connected to the slide member 285 so as to be able to transmit driving force. to open and close the

Although not shown in the figure, the game machine 1 supplies game balls to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34 by controlling a drive motor that feeds out game balls from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2. It has a payout control board. When the main CPU 81 receives a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 211, the second starting opening sensor 221, the first big winning opening sensor 261, the second big winning opening sensor 281, or the general winning opening sensor 241, A payout control board is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on information from the payout control board.

Also, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquired information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start sensor 211 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Also, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquired information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start sensor 221 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Here, the various random numbers are specifically jackpot random numbers, pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers.

A jackpot random number is a random number for determining a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends, etc.) when it is determined to be a jackpot. The ready-to-reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform the ready-to-win effect or the non-reachable effect when it is determined that the game is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols when the special symbols are variably displayed.

The main CPU 81 acquires these random numbers at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22). It is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on whether or not it matches the numerical value (winning value). Here, when it is determined to execute a jackpot game based on the fact that the jackpot random number matches the winning value, the symbol random number obtained together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82 (compared with the symbol random number). ) Determine the type of jackpot based on which random value of the predetermined random values matches.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines not to execute the jackpot game based on the fact that the obtained jackpot random number does not match the winning value, the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82. Based on whether or not it matches with a predetermined random number (which is compared with a reach random number), it is determined whether to perform a reach presence effect or a reach non-reach effect. In addition, the main CPU 81 determines the variation pattern of the special symbols when the special symbols are variably displayed, based on the variation pattern random number obtained together with the jackpot random number, regardless of the result of determination based on the jackpot random number. Thereby, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined.

When the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game and determines the type of jackpot, the main CPU 81 opens and closes the first big prize gate 26 via the first big prize gate solenoid 262 (opening/closing member 27) according to the type of jackpot. ), controls the opening and closing (operation of the opening/closing member 29) of the second large winning opening 28 via the second large winning opening solenoid 282, and controls the opening and closing of the V winning opening 287 via the V winning opening solenoid 286. By controlling (the operation of the slide member 285), a jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed.

Also, the main CPU 81 acquires a random number (normal symbol random number) at the timing when the detection signal from the gate sensor 251 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired normal symbol random number. Then, when it is determined to open the second starting port 22 as a result of the normal design determination, by controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 22 (operation of the opening and closing member 23) via the second starting port solenoid 222, An auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 22 is executed.

In addition, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol reservation display 44, a second special symbol reservation display 45, a general A figure hold indicator 46, a round indicator 47, a game state indicator 48, and a shooting direction indicator 49 are connected. The main CPU 81 controls these displays 41 to 49 constituting the main display 40 to execute the display processing described above with reference to FIG.

<Configuration example of sub-control board 90>
The sub-control board 90 includes a sub-CPU 91 , sub-ROM 92 , sub-RAM 93 , and RTC (real time clock) 94 . The sub CPU 91 performs arithmetic processing when controlling effects based on programs stored in the sub ROM 92 . The sub-RAM 93 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub-CPU 91 executes the above programs and as a work area for data processing. The RTC 94 measures the current date and time (date and time).

A first effect button detection sensor 96 , a second effect button detection sensor 97 , and an operating lever 98 are connected to the sub-control board 90 . When the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the first effect button detection sensor 96 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that effect to the sub-control board 90 . The second effect button detection sensor 97 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that the second effect button 36 (see FIG. 1) is operated to the sub-control board 90 . The operating lever 98 includes a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the direction in which the grip portion is tilted, and the lever button. , the direction selection information and the direction non-selection information are output to the sub-control board 90 .

The sub CPU 91 sets the effect content (effect pattern) based on the game information (various commands) related to the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the jackpot game, etc. transmitted from the main control board 80 . At that time, the input of operation information from the first effect button 35 and the second effect button 36 may be received, and the effect content corresponding to the operation information may be set. The sub CPU 91 transmits to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 a command for instructing the execution of the set effect content.

<Configuration Example of Image Sound Control Board 100>
The image sound control board 100 controls the image display by the image display device 7 and the output of the effect sound by the speaker 38 . In this embodiment, the image sound control board 100 includes an image sound control CPU 101, a control ROM 102, a control RAM 103, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 104, a CGROM 105, a VRAM 106, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 107, an audio ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110 .

The control ROM 102 is composed of a mask ROM, and contains various tables such as a control program for the image sound control CPU 101, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and a display list generation table used for processing to generate a display list. is stored. Here, the display list consists of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing in units of frames. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The control RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the image sound control CPU 101 executes the control program and as a work area for data processing.

The image sound control CPU 101 transmits the image data stored in the CGROM 105 to the VDP 104 based on the control program, various tables such as the display list creation table, commands received from the sub-control board 90, and the like. to be displayed on the This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list. The image sound control CPU 101 also instructs the sound DSP 107 to output the sound data stored in the sound ROM 108 from the speaker 38 .

The CGROM 105 stores performance data necessary for executing a variable performance associated with variable display of special symbols, a performance associated with a big win game, and the like. The CGROM 105 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and includes sprite data (single image data) consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32×32 pixels), and a plurality of image data. Compressed movie data or the like consisting of a collection of . The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 105 stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other.

Note that only part of the image data stored in the CGROM 105 may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 106 is composed of an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and includes a display list storage area, a development storage area, a frame buffer, etc., although not shown in the drawing. ing.

The display list storage area temporarily stores the display list output from the image sound control CPU 101 . The development storage area stores image data that has been decompressed after being read from the CGROM 105 . The frame buffer is a frame buffer that is also used for drawing and displaying image data displayed on the display screen 70 .

The VDP 104 decompresses the image data stored in the compressed state in the CGROM 105 and stores the decompressed image data in the expansion storage area. Also, the VDP 104 performs drawing processing on the frame buffer using the image data stored in the development storage area based on the display list stored in the display list storage area. The VDP 104 also generates RGB signals as video signals indicating the colors of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signals to the image display device 7 .

Acoustic ROM 108 , SDRAM 109 , and amplifier 110 are connected to acoustic DSP 107 . The sound ROM 108 stores various sound data related to music, voice, sound effects, warning sounds, and the like. The SDRAM 109 is used as a working area for data processing by the audio DSP 107 and the like. The audio DSP 107 reads audio data corresponding to instructions from the image audio control CPU 101 from the audio ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109, executes data processing, and outputs the processed audio data to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110). The amplifier 110 adjusts the sound volume in accordance with the sound volume instruction obtained from the image sound control CPU 101 via the sound DSP 107 and causes the speaker 38 to output the sound data.

In this embodiment, a case where the VDP is in charge of drawing management and the audio DSP is in charge of sound management will be described. You may In this case, there is no need to provide an acoustic DSP separately.

<Configuration Example of Lamp Control Board 120>
The lamp control board 120 includes a lamp CPU 121, a lamp ROM 122, and a lamp RAM 123, and includes a frame lamp 37, a board lamp 5, a movable decorative member 14, an effect indicator 125, a first special figure reservation indicator 126, and a second effect. A special figure reservation indicator 127 is connected. The lamp ROM 122 stores programs executed by the lamp CPU 121, light emission pattern data, operation pattern data, and the like. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating the light emission pattern of each of the frame lamp 37, the board surface lamp 5, the LED built in the movable decorative member 14, and the like. The motion pattern data is data indicating the motion pattern of the movable decorative member 14 and the like.

The lamp CPU 121, based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 122, the frame lamp 37, the board surface lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the production indicator 125, the production 1st special figure reservation indicator 126, the production 2nd special figure reservation Arithmetic processing is performed when controlling the operation of the display device 127 and the like.

The lamp CPU 121 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from among the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 to the lamp RAM 123, and controls the frame lamp 37, the board surface lamp 5, and the movable decorative member. It controls light emission of the LED built in 14 . The lamp CPU 121 also reads the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from among the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 to the lamp RAM 123, and controls the motor for operating the movable decorative member 14. control the drive.

The lamp CPU 121 also controls the variable display and stop display of the symbols on the effect display 125 based on commands from the sub-control board 90 . In addition, based on the command from the sub-control board 90, the lamp CPU 121 displays the number of reservations related to the first special symbol determination by the production first special figure reservation display 126, and the production second special figure reservation display 127. 2 Control the display of the number of reservations related to special symbol determination.

[About game status]
Next, the game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is controlled in one of three gaming states of "normal gaming state", "probability variable gaming state", and "time saving gaming state".

In the "normal game state", special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute a jackpot game is relatively low, and a support function (so-called It is a game state in which a function called "electric sapo" etc.) is not given. In the normal game state, the probability of executing a jackpot game by special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/210) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by the normal design determination is set to a relatively low probability (eg 1/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal design is relatively long (eg 20 seconds). and the opening time of the second starting port 22 when it is determined to open the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds×1 time).

The "probability variation gaming state" is a gaming state in which the special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state with a relatively high probability of being determined to execute a jackpot game, and the above support function is provided. That is, in the variable probability gaming state, the probability of being determined to execute a big hit game by special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/60) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (eg 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively short (eg 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second starting port 22 when it is determined to open the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds×3 times).

"Time-saving game state" is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in the above-described low-probability state and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the time-saving gaming state, the probability of being determined to execute a big hit game by special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/210). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (eg 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively short (eg 1.5 second), and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

Comparing these game states with respect to the fluctuation time of special symbols, the fluctuation time of special symbols in "probability variable gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" is relative compared to the fluctuation time of special symbols in "normal gaming state" It is likely to be set to a relatively short time. In addition, the probability of being determined to execute a special game (jackpot probability), the probability of being determined to open the second start port 22 (winning probability of normal symbol determination), and the variation of normal symbols The time and the opening time of the second starting port 22 are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other probabilities and times may be used.

In the following description, the state in which the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 22 due to the provision of the support function will be referred to as a "high base state". A state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 22 is called a "low base state". In this embodiment, the "normal gaming state" corresponds to the low base state, and the "probability variable gaming state" and the "time saving gaming state" correspond to the high base state.

[Game flow]
A game ball hit right by the player does not enter the first starting hole 21, but enters the second starting hole 22. - 特許庁However, in the low base state, it is difficult to open the second starting port 22, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the low base state (corresponding to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment), the player will play the game by hitting the first starting port 21 to the left. Become.

When the game ball struck left in the normal game state wins the first starting hole 21, the main CPU 81 executes the first special symbol determination, and the first special symbol display device 41 displays the first special symbol variably. After that, the jackpot symbol or the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

Here, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big win game is not performed, and the game state does not change. On the other hand, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, a jackpot game is executed in which a predetermined number of round games are performed according to the jackpot pattern, and after the jackpot game is completed, a "probability variable game state" or a "time-saving game" is executed. The game is controlled by "state".

In addition, when the game state shifts to "probability variable game state" or "time saving game state" triggered by the end of the jackpot game, that is, when it shifts from the low base state to the high base state, the game ball to the second start port 22 With the above-mentioned support function for facilitating winning, the second starting port 22 makes it easier for the game ball to win than the first starting port 21.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the game is controlled in the high base state, the player plays the game by hitting the second starting hole 22 to the right. Also, when both the right of the first special symbol determination and the right of the second special symbol determination are reserved, the second special symbol determination is executed with priority over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state or the time reduction game state, basically, the second special symbol determination is performed.

As will be described in detail later, the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 42 in the probability variable game state or the time saving game state include a probability variable jackpot pattern and a normal jackpot pattern. A game is controlled in a state or a time-saving game state. The game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured as a so-called ST machine. Therefore, if the big hit cannot be drawn in the variable probability game state or the time saving game state, the game state is returned from the variable probability game state (or the time saving game state) to the normal game state.

[Regarding special symbol judgment using random numbers]
Next, referring to FIG. 6, the determination process using the jackpot random number and the symbol random number will be described. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot random number and the symbol random number. It should be noted that in the explanatory diagrams for each random number illustrated in FIG. 6 and subsequent figures, the possible range of the random numbers is set to be smaller than the actual range in order to facilitate the explanation. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the first starting port 21 (or the second starting port 22), the main CPU 81 acquires information such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

<Processing based on jackpot random numbers>
The jackpot random numbers exemplified in FIG. 6(A) are random numbers used in the jackpot determination process (step S308 in FIG. 45) to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the probability that the jackpot game will be executed is A relatively low low-probability state and a high-probability state with a relatively high probability of being determined to execute a jackpot game are individually set.

In this embodiment, as illustrated in the upper part of FIG. 6(A), the low probability state has four winning values of "0" to "3" and 836 losing values of "4" to "839". and are stored in the main ROM 82 . When the game is controlled in the low-probability state (in this embodiment, the "normal game state" and the "time-saving game state" correspond to this), the main CPU 81 starts the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22). ), it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed when the jackpot random number obtained in response to the passage of the game ball coincides with one of these four winning values. On the other hand, when the game is controlled in a low-probability state, if the acquired big win random number matches any one of the above 836 winning values, it is determined that the big win game is not executed.

In addition, with regard to the high-probability state (corresponding to this in the present embodiment, "probability variable gaming state"), as illustrated in the lower part of FIG. 826 losing values from "14" to "839" are stored in the main ROM 82. FIG. The main CPU 81 selects these 14 jackpot random numbers obtained in response to the game ball passing through the first starting port 21 (or the second starting port 22) while the game is being controlled in a high probability state. If it matches with any of the values, it is determined to execute a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the game is controlled in a high-probability state, if the obtained jackpot random number matches any one of the 826 winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number can take 840 values from "0" to "839" in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (see FIG. 6(A)). Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/210 (=4/840), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/60 (=14/840).

<Processing based on pattern random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game is to be executed, the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination matches which random number among the random numbers set in advance for each type of jackpot. to determine the type of jackpot. In the gaming machine 1, different jackpot symbols are stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 (or the second special symbol display device 42) depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, by selecting the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 (or the second special symbol display device 42) as the jackpot symbol, the type of the jackpot is determined. will be

(Types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6(B), in the present embodiment, the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern) that can be won in response to the game ball entering the first starting port 21 in the normal game state, Two types of "5R probability change" and "5R normal" are prepared.

"5R probability variation" (see FIG. 6(B)) is one long opening to long open the second big winning opening 28 in response to the stop display of the jackpot symbol X1 on the first special symbol display device 41 A total of 5 rounds including a round game (1st round round game) and 4 long open round games (2nd round to 5th round round games) that open the first big prize hole 26 for a long time This is a jackpot in which a jackpot game composed of open round games is executed.

When this "5R probability variation" is won, both the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are long opened in the first round of the round game. Therefore, the player can pass the game ball through the V winning opening 287 simply by hitting to the right, and even one game ball can pass through the V winning opening sensor 283 during the first round of the round game. When it is detected, the game is controlled in the "probability variable game state" after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game related to "5R probability variation", the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) and the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) are changed in the "probability variation gaming state" The number of times the display is executed (ST number of times in FIG. 6 (B)) is set to 100 times, and if it is not determined to be a big hit on the way, the probability variation game is performed until the special symbol determination of 100 times is performed. condition continues. Then, when all of the 100 special symbol determinations are lost, the game is controlled in the "normal game state" after that.

On the other hand, "5R normal" (see FIG. 6(B)) is a one-time operation of briefly opening the second big winning opening 28 in response to the stop display of the big winning symbol X2 on the first special symbol display device 41. A total of 5 times including a short open round game (round game of the 1st round) and a long open round game of 4 times (round game of the 2nd to 5th rounds) in which the first big prize opening 26 is opened for a long time. is a jackpot in which a jackpot game consisting of round games is executed. If the "5R normal" is won, basically no game balls enter the second big winning hole 28 in the first round game, so no prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when "5R normal" is won, the number of long open round games executed during the jackpot game is four times, and it can be said that the jackpot is substantially four rounds.

When this "5R normal" is won, as the first round game, a short opening round game in which the second big winning hole 28 is briefly opened is executed as described above. Therefore, the game ball does not win V during the jackpot game related to 5R normal, and after the jackpot game related to "5R normal" ends, the game is controlled in the "time-saving game state". In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of time reductions for "5R normal" is set to 100 times, and the first special symbol display 41 (informing that "5R normal" has been won) jackpot symbol X2. When the jackpot game is executed in response to the stop display, if the jackpot is not determined in the middle, the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is performed 100 times after the jackpot game ends. The game is controlled in the time saving game state until it is done.

By the way, even though it is possible to acquire the right to control the game in the "variable probability gaming state" after the jackpot game is completed by winning the "5R probability variation", for example, due to ball clogging in the game area 3, etc., 1 round It is conceivable that a game ball is not detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during the eye round game. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if such a situation occurs, in order to create a state in which the player can easily aim for a big win after the end of the big win game, When the game ball does not win V during the first round game, 100 times of second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is performed in the same way as after the end of the jackpot game related to "5R normal". The game is controlled in a time-saving game state until is executed.

In this embodiment, the main ROM 82 stores a random number value for determining the type of jackpot when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal game state is a jackpot. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 6B, 50 random numbers are stored for "5R probability variation", and 50 random numbers are stored for "5R normal". there is

In this embodiment, the possible range of symbol random numbers is set to 100 from "0" to "99". If it is determined to be a jackpot, as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, "5R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 50% (= 50/100 x 100), and "5R normal" is also 50% ( =50/100×100) (see FIG. 6B).

Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, the probability that the big hit symbol X1 indicating "5R probability variation" is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and "5R normal" are displayed. The probability that the jackpot symbol X2 is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is 50%.

In this way, when the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "3R probability variable A" or "3R normal", in both cases, after the jackpot game ends, the player will be in a high base state. , the gate 25 and the second starting port 22 are played.

(Types of jackpots related to second special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6 (C), as the types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination executed in response to the game ball winning the second starting port 22, "10R probability variation", "3R probability variation ", and "3R normal" are prepared.

Here, "10R probability variation" (see FIG. 6(C)) is the second big winning opening 28 (and V winning opening 287) in response to the big winning symbol Y1 being stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 42. ) long open round game (1st round round game) and 9 long open round games that long open the 1st big winning port 26 (2nd round to 10th round game ) and a total of 10 long opening round games are executed.

"3R probability variation" (see FIG. 6(C)) lengthens the second big winning opening 28 (and V winning opening 287) in response to the stop display of the big winning symbol Y2 on the second special symbol display device 42. One long opening round game (first round round game) to be opened, two long opening round games (second to third round round games) to long open the first big winning port 26, This is a big win in which a big win game consisting of a total of three long open round games including .

In this way, when "10R probability variable" or "3R probability variable" is won, both the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are long opened during the round game of the first round. Therefore, as long as the player hits right during the first round of the round game related to these big wins, the player can easily acquire the right to play the game in the ``variable probability game state'' after the big win game is over. be able to.

"3R normal" (see FIG. 6(C)) shortens the second big winning opening 28 (and V winning opening 287) in response to the stop display of the big winning symbol Y3 on the second special symbol display 42. One short open round game (first round round game) to be opened, two long open round games (second to third round round games) to long open the first big winning port 26, This is a big win in which a big win game consisting of a total of three long open round games including . If the "3R normal" is won, basically no game balls enter the second big winning hole 28 in the first round game, so no prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when "3R normal" is won, the number of times of the long opening round game executed during the jackpot game is two, and it can be said that the jackpot is actually two rounds.

In addition, when "3R normal" is won, as the first round game, a short opening round game in which the second big winning hole 28 is briefly opened is executed as described above. Therefore, the game ball does not win a V prize during the jackpot game related to 3R normal, and the game is controlled in the "time-saving game state" after the jackpot game related to "3R normal" is finished. This is the same as the case of winning the above "5R normal".

In this embodiment, the main ROM 82 stores a random number value for determining the type of the jackpot when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a jackpot. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 6C, 80 random numbers are stored for "10R probability variation", 10 random numbers are stored for "3R probability variation", and " 10 random values are stored for "3R normal".

In this embodiment, as described above, the possible range of symbol random numbers is set to 100 from "0" to "99". If it is determined to be a jackpot based on the jackpot random number, as the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, "10R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 80% (= 80/100 x 100), and "3R probability variation" is selected. It is selected at a rate of 10% (=10/100×100), and "3R normal" is selected at a rate of 10% (=10/100×100) (see FIG. 6(C)).

Therefore, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, the probability that the big hit symbol Y1 indicating "10R probability variation" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is 80%, and "3R The probability that the jackpot symbol Y2 indicating "probability variation" is stop-displayed on the second special symbol display device 42 is 10%, and the probability that the jackpot symbol Y3 indicating "3R normal" is stop-displayed on the second special symbol display device 42. is 10%.

<Processing based on reach random numbers>
When the jackpot random number acquired in response to the game ball passing through the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22) matches the rejection value (see FIG. 6A), the main CPU 81 If it is determined that the game will not be executed, the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used for that determination matches either the random value corresponding to the reach effect or the random value corresponding to the non reach effect. It is determined whether to carry out a ready-to-win performance or to carry out a non-reachable performance.

Although not shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the main ROM 82 stores 10 random numbers for the ready-to-win effect. If it coincides with any one of the above, it is determined that the effect with reach is performed. Further, 90 random numbers are stored for the no-reach effect, and the main CPU 81 performs the no-reach effect when the acquired random number matches one of these 90 random numbers. decide. In this embodiment, the range of possible reach random numbers is set to "0" to "99", and when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, the reach effect is performed at a rate of 10% (=10/ 100×100), and the ratio of no ready-to-win effect (percentage of non-reach effect to be performed) is 90% (=90/100×100).

A main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern in which a sub-control board 90 selects a variable performance pattern of a performance pattern accompanied by a ready-to-win performance as a variation pattern of a special symbol when it decides to perform a performance with ready-to-win performance. Conversely, when it is decided to carry out the non-reach performance, a variation pattern in which a variable performance pattern of performance symbols not accompanied by the reach performance is selected by a sub-control board 90 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbols.

[About the game flow]
Next, the game flow will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game flow in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. On the board structure of the game board 2, the game ball launched into the left game area 3L can enter the first start hole 21, while the game ball launched into the right game area 3R enters the first start hole 21. never. In addition, in the normal game state, the second starting port 22 is difficult to be opened, and even if it is opened, the opening time of the second starting port 22 is extremely short, and the game ball does not enter the second starting port 22. The odds of winning are extremely low. For this reason, there is no advantage for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state. As is clear from these facts, in the normal game state, it is easier to hit a big hit when the game ball is hit in the left game area 3L than when it is hit in the right game area 3R (special symbol determination is easier to execute). is. Therefore, the player hits to the left in the normal game state.

When the game ball struck left in the normal game state wins the first starting hole 21, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41. , the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing", the losing symbol is stop-displayed as the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", one of the big hit symbols X1 to X2 (see FIG. 6(B)) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, and the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol. A jackpot game corresponding to is executed. These jackpot games are as described above with reference to FIG. 6(B).

When the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "jackpot", when the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1: see FIG. 6 (B)) that informs the probability variable jackpot is stopped and displayed (FIG. 7 (A )), and when the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern X2: see FIG. 6(B)) for notifying the normal jackpot is stopped (see FIG. 7(D)).

Here, when the jackpot symbol X1 informing the variable probability jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game described above is executed based on FIG. 6(B). When this jackpot game is executed, on the condition that the game ball wins V during the long opening round game (during the first round round game) in which the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are long opened, After the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the variable probability game state (see FIG. 7(B)). As described above, this probability variable gaming state continues until 100 times of special symbol determination (and special symbol variable display) are performed, unless it is determined to be a big hit on the way. On the other hand, even though the jackpot game including the long open round game is executed, for example, if the game ball does not win the V prize due to ball clogging in the game area 3, etc., after the jackpot game ends , The game is controlled in a time-saving game state that can be continued until the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is executed 100 times (see FIG. 7(C)).

Here, in the probability variable gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 25 is set to a relatively high probability (11/11 in this embodiment), and the normal The opening time of the second starting port 22 when winning the symbol determination is set to a relatively long time (1.5 seconds×3 times in this embodiment). Therefore, the probability variable gaming state is a right side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit a big hit (special symbol determination is easier to execute) when a game ball is hit in the right game area 3R than when it is hit in the left game area 3L. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state, the player hits to the right. This is the same when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state which is the high base state as well as the variable probability game state.

When the game ball struck to the right wins the second starting port 22 while the game is controlled in the variable probability game state, the second special symbol determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 42.例文帳に追加is variably displayed, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "losing", the losing symbol is stop-displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", when one of the big hit symbols Y1 to Y2 (see FIG. 6 (C)) is stopped and displayed and becomes a probability variable big hit (FIG. 7 (F) (see FIG. 6(C)), and when the jackpot symbol Y3 (see FIG. 6(C)) is stop-displayed and becomes a normal jackpot (see FIG. 7(G)).

When the game ball wins V during the jackpot game related to the probability variable jackpot, the game is controlled again in the probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 7 (B)), and the game ball wins V during the jackpot game. If not, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state (see FIG. 7(C)). On the other hand, since the game ball does not win V during the jackpot game related to the normal jackpot, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 7(E)).

When the game ball hit to the right wins the second starting port 22 while the game is controlled in the time saving game state, the second special symbol determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 42.例文帳に追加is variably displayed, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "losing", the losing symbol is stop-displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", any one of the big hit symbols Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 6 (C)) is stopped and displayed, and the probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot becomes, and the probability variable game A jackpot game is executed in the same manner as when one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 is stopped and displayed in the state. Here, when any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y2 relating to the probability variable jackpot is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 7 (I)), on the condition that the game ball wins V during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends The game is controlled in the variable probability game state (see FIG. 7 (J)), and if the game ball does not win V during the jackpot game (see FIG. 7 (K)), it is again in the time saving game state after the jackpot game ends The game will be controlled.

On the other hand, when the jackpot pattern Y3 related to the normal jackpot is stopped and displayed in the time saving game state (see FIG. 7 (M)), the game ball does not win V during the jackpot game, so after the jackpot game ends, the time saving game state again The game is controlled by (see FIG. 7(E)).

In addition, if it is not determined to be a big hit in the time-saving game state that continues until 100 times of special symbol determination (and variable display of special symbols) is performed, the game state is returned from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. (See FIG. 7(L)).

[About variable production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed. A description will be given of the variation effect performed on the display screen 70 in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol.

In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball wins the first starting port 21 and the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 41, and then the first special symbol is displayed. A first special symbol indicating the determination result of the symbol determination is stopped and displayed. The display screen 70 is provided with a performance symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 2) in which a performance symbol for notifying the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed. Then, along with the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable effect including the variable display of the effect symbol is performed (see FIG. 2). Then, when the first special symbol is variably displayed for the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected when the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, The effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

A so-called ready-to-win effect may be performed during the variable display of such effect symbols. Specifically, in the performance symbol display area 73 of the display screen 70, for example, a part of the symbol row of the performance symbols in which the numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top is displayed in the horizontal direction. Three rows are displayed, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, these symbol rows are variably displayed (scroll display) so as to scroll from top to bottom. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win production is performed, first, for example, the left row production pattern (left pattern) and the right row production pattern (right pattern) before all the production patterns are stopped and displayed. sequentially, or simultaneously, pseudo-stop so as not to stop completely. FIG. 2 exemplifies a state in which three left symbols are pseudo-stopped, three right symbols are pseudo-stopped, and the middle row of symbols continues to be scrolled. In addition, the pseudo-stop is a production that causes the production pattern to sway on the spot without moving it, and in the following explanation, a real stop that completely stops the production pattern (sometimes simply referred to as "stop display") ), it may be called a pseudo-stop.

When the same performance pattern as the left pattern and the right pattern stops on the effective line in a simulated manner, the ready-to-win state is established, and a ready-to-win performance is performed to make the player expect three identical performance patterns to be aligned. In this ready-to-win effect, while the ready-to-win patterns (left and right patterns) are pseudo-stopped, the effect patterns (medium patterns) constituting the middle pattern row are scrolled at a low speed so that the player can identify them, and finally , a medium pattern common to the ready-to-win pattern, or a medium pattern different from the ready-to-win pattern is stopped on the effective line to notify the winning or losing.

Although detailed description is omitted, other display objects such as characters and items are used for such a ready-to-win effect in addition to the effect pattern. Further, in the following description, in the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is performed, the effect performed before the ready-to-win is established may be referred to as "pre-reach effect".

The type of reach effect will be described in detail later, but if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing", the three performance symbols indicating the reach losing eyes (for example, "323") are pseudo-stopped to notify the loss. Then, these three performance symbols are actually stopped as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect is not performed, the three effect symbols indicating a loose pattern (for example, "629") are stopped in a simulated manner in order to notify a loss, and the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Along with this, these three performance symbols are finally stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the big winning game is not to be executed, the three performance symbols are stopped in a simulated manner with the reach losing or the loose number indicating the losing, and then the real stop is made to notify the losing (that the big winning game is not executed). A loss notification effect is executed.

When this loss notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is not executed, and if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol and the performance symbol are set for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds). is stopped and displayed, the suspended first special symbol determination is performed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to this determination is started.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the ready-to-win effect is usually executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and doubles (for example, "333") are displayed to notify the big hit. These three performance symbols are actually stopped along with the pseudo-stop of the three performance symbols and the stop display of the jackpot symbol as the first special symbol. In this way, when it is determined that a big win game is to be executed, there is a winning notification effect in which the three performance symbols are stopped in a simulated manner in a manner indicating a big win, and then actually stopped to notify a big win (execution of the big win game). executed. When this winning notification effect is executed, a big winning game is executed.

Up to this point, the variation effect including the effect of variably displaying and then stopping displaying the decorative symbols in accordance with the variably displaying and then stopping display of the first special symbol has been described, but the second special symbol is variably displaying. When the display is stopped after being displayed, the variable effect is performed in the same manner.

[Screen Configuration of Display Screen 70]
FIG. 2 illustrates the screen configuration of the display screen 70 in the normal game state. When the game is controlled in the normal game state, a suspended icon display area 71, the icon display area 72, and the effect symbol display area 73 are formed on the display screen 70 as illustrated in FIG. As described above, the effect symbol display area 73 displays the left symbols constituting the left symbol row, the middle symbols constituting the middle symbol row, and the right symbols constituting the right symbol row. display area.

<Holding icon display area 71>
The pending icon display area 71 is a display area where a pending icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is pending is displayed. In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball wins the first start port 21 in a situation such as during the variable display of the special symbols or during the jackpot game, when the special symbol determination and the variable display of the special symbols cannot be started immediately, the first special The right to determine the symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment).

Thus, when the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the reserved icon display area 71 displays the same number of reserved icons as the number of reserved first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol reservation display 44. be done. FIG. 2 illustrates a state in which two pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 71 in order to suggest that the pending number of the first special symbol determination is "2".

If a pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71 when a highly reliable ready-to-win effect such as an SPSP reach to be described later is being performed, not only is the display area used for the ready-to-win effect limited, but also the pending icon is displayed. There is a possibility that the display of the icon will reduce the interest of the ready-to-win production. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, while displaying the display object (in this embodiment, the pedestal of the pending icon) and the pending icon constituting the pending icon display area 71 during normal reach and SP reach, normal reach and SP As the ready-to-win performance develops from ready-to-win to SPSP-ready, the display objects and reserved icons constituting the reserved icon display area 71 are erased from the display screen 70, and the reserved icon display area 71 is formed after the SPSP-ready to finish. A configuration is adopted in which the displayed object and the pending icon are displayed again.

Further, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, basically no game balls enter the second starting port 22.例文帳に追加Therefore, in the normal game state, basically, the right of the second special symbol determination is not reserved, and a pending icon relating to the second special symbol determination is displayed on the display screen 70, or this pending icon is displayed. A display area for displaying is not formed.

<Applicable icon display area 72>
The icon display area 72 is a display area for displaying the icon as a variation suggestive image suggesting that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and is erased from the icon display area 72 at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, for example. However, the erasing timing of the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be erased during the variable display of the first special symbol. The icon may be erased.

By the way, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 21 in a state where the special symbol is not variably displayed and the right to judge the special symbol is not reserved, the variable display of the 1st special symbol is started. Accordingly, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 . On the other hand, in a state where the pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, when the changing display of the pattern corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 ends, the suspended icon display area 71 displays The first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon (the pending icon displayed at the position closest to the icon display area 72) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in accordance with the execution of the first special symbol determination, the first pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, It will be displayed as a new icon. In this way, the suspended icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 72 is displayed larger than when displayed in the suspended icon display area 71 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 than to the suspended icon displayed in the suspended icon display area 71 .

In addition, when another pending icon different from the first pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, the pending icon display area 71 , the other pending icons shift toward the icon display area 72 . As is clear from the description so far, in the gaming machine 1, the icon corresponding to the suspended icon displayed in the suspended icon display area 71 may be displayed in the icon display area 72. Therefore, the following description will be given. In this case, when the pending icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to simply as "icon".

(About icon change effect)
By the way, the pending icon is usually displayed as a white pending icon (the default pending icon). On the other hand, when a suspended icon is displayed in the suspended icon display area 71, an icon change effect may be performed in which the color of the suspended icon changes. When this icon change effect is performed, the white pending icon changes to a pending icon in colors such as blue, green, and red that suggest the reliability of the big win. The colors suggesting the jackpot reliability illustrated here are arranged in order from low jackpot reliability to high jackpot reliability. Red indicates that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the red pending icon is "big hit", or that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively long time even though it is "losing". easy to be selected. Green is likely to be selected when a "big hit" or "losing" is set to a medium variation time of the special symbol. Blue color is likely to be selected when it is "losing" or when it is "losing" and the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively short time. In this embodiment, the white pending icon jackpot reliability is set to about 1%, the blue pending icon jackpot reliability is set to about 3%, and the green pending icon jackpot reliability is set to about 15%. , and the jackpot reliability of the red pending icon is set to about 45%.

Here, the case where the icon change effect in which the display color of the suspended icon is changed only once while the suspended icon is displayed in the suspended icon display area 71 is performed has been described as an example, but the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment Then, other icon change effects may be performed. That is, for example, when a white pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, it changes to a blue pending icon and then to a green pending icon. An icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of the pending icon changes multiple times. Also, when a white suspended icon shifted from the suspended icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 is displayed as the icon, an icon change effect may be performed in which the display color changes.

Further, the display color of the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 changes, and then, when the pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, the display color changes. In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the icon changes in both the reserved icon display area 71 and the icon display area 72 . In addition, an icon change effect may be performed in which the suspended icon is initially displayed in a display color other than white (for example, blue), or an icon change effect in which the display color of the suspended icon whose initial color is other than white is changed. .

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment displays on the display screen 70 the reservation information indicating that the right to determine the special symbol is reserved, and it is possible to change the display mode of the reservation information. . In the following description, pending icons or icons whose display color is a color other than white may be called "special icons" to distinguish them from normal pending icons or icons whose display color is white.

[Flow of production accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol]
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of various effects such as a ready-to-win effect in the normal game state. When the first special symbol determination is executed in the normal game state, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and then the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a manner indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, in the display screen 70, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the performance symbols (the scroll display of the three symbol rows) is started in the performance symbol display area 73 ( See FIG. 8(A)).

Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing", for example, different effect symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the activated line, and the middle symbol row in this non-reach mode. There is a case where a non-reach effect (see FIG. 8(B)) that scrolls and displays only is performed. When this reach-less production (variation production that does not include reach production) is performed, the three production patterns showing loose eyes are stopped pseudo-stopped at the end of the variable display of the first special pattern, and the losing pattern is the first special pattern. Along with the stop display, a failure notification effect (see FIG. 8(C)) for actually stopping these three effect symbols is performed.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", or if it is decided to perform a reach effect (variable effect including reach effect) although it is "losing", the first special symbol During the variable display, for example, a predetermined left pattern is pseudo-stopped on the effective line of the production pattern display area 73, and then the right pattern, which is the same production pattern as the left pattern, is shifted to the effective line. (See FIG. 8(D)) is performed. Then, when the same left symbol and right symbol stop on the activated line in a simulated manner, reach is established (see FIG. 8(E)). When ready-to-win is established in this way, a predetermined ready-to-win that makes the player expect that the medium pattern, which is the same effect pattern as the ready-to-win pattern (left and right patterns), stops on the effective line and the patterns are aligned. A performance is held.

In this embodiment, four kinds of ready-to-win effects of normal reach, character ready-to-win, SP ready-to-win, and SPSP ready-to-win are prepared as ready-to-win effects that can be executed with the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 8).

Normal reach (see FIG. 8(F)) is a reach effect with the lowest jackpot reliability among the above four types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). When reach is established, normal reach is first performed (see FIGS. 8(E) and (F)), and during normal reach, two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are scrolled at high speed. The scrolling speed of the pattern row gradually decreases.

Here, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing", for example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the ready-to-win symbol is By quasi-stopping different medium symbols on the effective line, the performance symbols of reach-losing eyes (for example, "434") are displayed, and a loss notification performance (see FIG. 8 (G)) is performed to permanently stop these performance symbols. .

On the other hand, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", for example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the same medium as the reach symbol By quasi-stopping the symbols on the effective line, the performance symbols of doubles (for example, "444") are displayed, and the hit notification performance (see FIG. 8(H)) of permanently stopping these performance symbols is performed.

In addition, when a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time of the first special symbol is selected, there is no hit notification effect or loss notification effect in normal reach, and another reach effect with higher reliability than normal reach. develop into. Developed reach from normal reach is character reach, SP reach or SPSP reach.

Character reach (see FIG. 8 (I)) is a reach effect with a low jackpot reliability next to normal reach among the above four types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 4%). As the game develops, the animation character performs a predetermined action to stop the medium symbol that is the same as the ready-to-win symbol.

In this embodiment, as exemplified in FIG. 8I, character A reaches character A in which character A performs the above action, character B reaches out in which character B performs the above action, and character C performs the above action. There are three types of character reach, that is, character C reach, which performs an action, and no matter which character reach develops, the reliability of the big win is about 4%. However, the reliability of the jackpot of these character reach does not necessarily have to be the same. You may employ|adopt the structure that a jackpot reliability changes with types.

When it develops into character reach, the reliability of the jackpot is relatively low at about 4%, so in most cases, character reach does not develop into other reach effects, and a loss notification effect is performed in character reach. (See FIGS. 8(I) and (C)). On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is "big hit", there is a case where a hit notification effect is performed in character reach (see FIGS. 8(I) and (H)). Also, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment this time is "big hit" or "losing", and a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, from the character reach The reach effect develops into SP reach (see FIG. 8(J)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 6(K)).

SP reach (see FIG. 8 (J)) is a reach production with a higher reliability of jackpot than character reach (for example, reliability of jackpot: about 15%). be notified. Regarding this SP reach, when developing from normal reach to SP reach via character reach (see FIG. 8 (F), (I), and (J)), SP reach from normal reach without going through character reach (FIGS. 8(F) and (I)).

In addition, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 8(J), three types of SP reach are prepared: the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the third SP reach. Here, the first SP reach is the SP reach in which the main character battles enemy character A, the second SP reach is the SP reach in which the main character battles enemy character B, and the third SP reach is the main character's enemy. It is an SP reach that battles with character C. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is about 15% even if it develops into any of these three types of SP reach, but for example, the jackpot reliability increases in the order of the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the third SP reach. In this way, a configuration may be adopted in which the reliability of the big win differs depending on the type of enemy character that battles with the main character.

In the present embodiment, when the game develops into one of these SP reach, the SP reach does not develop into another reach effect, and the win or loss is notified at the end of the SP reach. Specifically, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "jackpot", the victory that shows how the main character wins the battle with the enemy character at the end of the SP reach An effect is performed, and then a hit notification effect (see FIG. 8(H)) is performed. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "Loss", a defeat effect will be displayed to show the hero character losing the battle with the enemy character at the end of the SP reach. After that, a failure notification effect (see FIG. 8(C)) is performed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Conversely, it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time. Further, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing", it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. A relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the above-described characteristics regarding the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, so the direction when developing from the normal reach to the SP reach via the character reach However, it can be said that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when it develops directly from normal reach to SP reach without going through character reach.

On the other hand, SPSP reach (see FIG. 8 (K)) is a reach effect with the highest jackpot reliability among the above four types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 35%). Winning or losing is reported by the victory or defeat of the battle with.

In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 8(K), three types of SPSP reach are prepared: a first SPSP reach, a second SPSP reach, and a third SPSP reach. Here, the first SPSP reach is the SPSP reach in which the main character battles the enemy character D, the second SPSP reach is the SPSP reach in which the main character battles the enemy character E, and the third SPSP reach is the main character's enemy. It's an SPSP reach that battles with Chara F. In this embodiment, the reliability of the jackpot is about 35% regardless of which of these three types of SPSP reach, but for example, the reliability of the jackpot increases in the order of the first SPSP reach, the second SPSP reach, and the third SPSP reach. In this way, a configuration may be adopted in which the reliability of the big win differs depending on the type of enemy character that battles with the main character.

In the present embodiment, when one of these SPSP ready-to-win games develops, the SPSP ready-to-win game does not develop to another ready-to-win effect, and the win/loss is announced at the end of the SPSP ready-to-win game. Specifically, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "jackpot", the victory that shows how the main character wins the battle with the enemy character at the end of the SPSP reach An effect is performed, and then a hit notification effect (see FIG. 8(H)) is performed. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "Loss", a defeat effect will be displayed to show the hero character losing the battle with the enemy character at the end of the SP reach. After that, a failure notification effect (see FIG. 8(C)) is performed.

To this SPSP reach, when developing from normal reach to SPSP reach via character reach (see FIG. 8 (F), (I), and (K)), and from normal reach to SPSP reach without going through character reach (see FIGS. 8(F) and (K)), and the latter case is characterized by a higher jackpot reliability than the former case.

Although not shown in FIG. 8, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after reaching establishment (see FIG. 8 (E)), without going through normal reach (see FIG. 8 (F)), character reach ( A variable performance pattern that directly develops into any of the SP reach (see FIG. 8 (J)), and the SP reach (see FIG. 8 (K)) is also prepared.

The type of ready-to-win effect and the manner of development of the ready-to-win effect illustrated in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and other types of ready-to-win effect and the manner of developing the ready-to-win effect may be used. That is, for example, in the present embodiment, the type of each reach effect of character reach, SP reach, and SP reach is described as three types, but for example, five types of first SP reach to fifth SP reach The type of each ready-to-win effect may be other than the three types, such as the ready-to-win effect is prepared. Also, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the SP reach does not develop into the SP SP reach, but in other embodiments, a configuration in which the SP reach can develop into the SP SP reach may be employed.

[Regarding pre-judgment processing]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, whether or not to execute the jackpot game is determined prior to performing the first special symbol determination for the right. Pre-determination processing for determination may be performed. Specifically, the main CPU 81 acquires a jackpot random number in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 21, and based on the acquired jackpot random number, the first special symbol is displayed at the start of the variable display. Prior to the big hit determination process (see step S308 in FIG. 45) in the 1 special symbol determination, the same big hit determination process is performed, and whether or not it is determined as "big hit" when the first special symbol determination is performed determine in advance whether Also, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the same processing as the variation pattern selection process (see step S309 in FIG. 45) is performed, and when the first special symbol determination is performed, which variation pattern is selected. determine in advance whether it will be

In this way, when the main CPU 81 performs the pre-determination process in response to the reservation of the first special symbol determination right, the main CPU 81 sends a pending command including the pre-determination information indicating the result of the pre-determination to the sub-control board 90. Send. In response to this, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the above-described icon change effect based on the advance determination information included in the hold command. Then, when it is decided to execute the icon change effect, it decides in what kind of change pattern the display mode (in this embodiment, the color of the icon) of the icon (the pending icon or the icon in question) is to be changed, and the result of the decision The image sound control board 100 is made to execute the icon change effect based on.

The pre-determining process executed by the main CPU 81 to realize the look-ahead effect such as the icon change effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

[Specific example of production in normal game state]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10, specific examples of effects in the normal game state will be described. 9 and 10 are screen diagrams showing examples of effects in the normal game state, and here, as a variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal game state, a winning notification effect is performed in SPSP reach, which is directly developed from normal reach. A description will be given of the effect that is executed when the variation pattern that becomes is selected.

In FIG. 9A, in the display screen 70, one pending icon (for example, a green pending icon) is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is In order to notify that the determination result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is "losing", along with the stopping display of the losing symbol as the first special symbol, the production symbol showing the loose eyes of "526" is displayed. A stopped display state is exemplified. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 is displayed. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, green pending icon) is executed. Then, the determination result of this first special symbol determination is "jackpot", and as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a variation pattern is selected in which a variation performance pattern that directly develops from normal reach to SPSP reach is selected. Then, the following performance will be performed.

That is, as the first special symbol determination corresponding to the first reserved icon is executed, the first special symbol displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 is displayed in the first is shifted to the icon display area 72, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 9A and 9B). When a predetermined time elapses after the start of the scrolling display of the three pattern rows, for example, a dialogue forewarning effect image showing a manner in which a prescribed character utters a dialogue is displayed on the display screen 70, and the dialogue is output from the speaker 38. The dialogue notice to be output is executed. In this speech notice, the degree of reliability of the big win is suggested by the type of character that speaks the speech, the content of the speech, the color of the speech, and the like.

A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed following the above-mentioned dialogue notice. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is such that the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 73 is variably displayed a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) once. It is a performance to show off. As for the pseudo continuous effect, the following effect display is performed.

That is, the scrolling speed of the left symbol row slows down and the left symbols (for example, 6 symbols) are pseudo-stopped. different) the right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is simulated, after that, the scroll speed of the middle symbol row is reduced, and 7 symbols are simulated as the middle symbol (pseudo-continuous design) that informs the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Stop (see FIG. 9(D)).

In this way, after the left and right symbols, which are different from each other, are pseudo-stopped, and then seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row, the pseudo-second row variation performance following the pseudo-first row variation performance is started. . Specifically, after the characters “×2” suggesting the start of the pseudo second streak of variable effect are displayed in a large size in the central area of the display screen 70, the characters “×2” are displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. A smaller display is made in the one area, and along with this, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 9(D) and (E)). When the pseudo second streak variable effect is being performed, for example, a dialogue announcement may be executed (see FIG. 9(F)) in the same manner as during the pseudo first streak variable effect.

As described above, when the dialogue announcement is executed during the second pseudo-continuous variable effect, the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol this time (see FIG. 9 (G)) ). Specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 9G, the scroll speed of the left symbol row is reduced and the left symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, followed by the right symbol row. The scrolling speed is lowered and the right symbols (for example, 5 symbols) are pseudo-stopped. After that, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols is lowered and the 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as middle symbols.

When the second pseudo continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, the pseudo third variable effect following the second pseudo variable effect is started. Specifically, after the characters “×3” suggesting the start of the pseudo-three variable effects are displayed in a large size in the central area of the display screen 70, the characters “×3” are displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. The three symbol rows are displayed in smaller size in the one area, and along with this, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is resumed in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 9(G) and (H)).

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the pseudo third row of variable effects, the scrolling speed of the left symbol row is reduced and the left symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is pseudo-stopped. , the scrolling speed of the right symbol row decreases (same as the left symbol), and the right symbol (here, 3 symbols) stops in a pseudo manner, establishing a ready-to-win state (see FIG. 9(I)).

Here, the case where the "pseudo run before reach" that restarts the scrolling display of each symbol row before the establishment of reach is explained as an example, but the "pseudo run after reach" that restarts the scroll display of each symbol row after establishment of reach is explained as an example. In some cases, a continuation is executed. In some cases, both pre-reach pseudo-runs and post-reach pseudo-runs are executed.

As described above, when the same effect symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and reach is established, first normal reach (see FIG. 8(E)) is executed (see FIG. 10(A)). Specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 10A, the scroll speed of the middle pattern row gradually decreases after the ready-to-win is established, and the ready-to-win pattern (here, three patterns on the left and three patterns on the right) and The same middle pattern (here, the middle 3 patterns) is on the effective line defined by the ready-to-win pattern (a straight line extending in the horizontal direction connecting the vertical center of the left 3 patterns and the vertical direction center of the right 3 patterns). An effect display is performed to show the approaching state.

Here, since normal reach is developed into SPSP reach, the following effect display is performed. That is, when the scroll display of the middle pattern row is being performed, the middle symbols (three symbols in this case) which are the same as the ready-to-win symbols pass over the effective line, and along with this, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols is increased. rises to make it difficult to identify medium symbols, and a development effect is performed to suggest that the game will develop into SPSP reach (see FIG. 10(B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10B, the left three patterns are reduced and moved to the upper left region of the display screen 70, and in the process, the scroll direction is the axial direction, and the scroll direction is the axial direction. Then, it moves to the upper left area, and simultaneously moves to the upper right area of the display screen 70 while reducing the right three patterns. move to the other area. Thereafter, until the end of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, the left 3 symbols are pseudo-stop-displayed in the upper left area, and the right 3 symbols are pseudo-stop-displayed in the upper right area (FIG. 10(C) to (H)).

Next, when the development effect (see FIG. 10(B)) suggesting the development to the SPSP reach is performed as described above, a dark change effect is performed (see FIG. 10(C)). Specifically, various display objects ( For example, characters) are not displayed, and only the ready-to-win pattern (here, three patterns on the left and three patterns on the right) and the corresponding icon are superimposed on a solid black background image.

Following this darkening effect, for example, a group notice may be performed as a notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of a big win (see FIG. 10(D)). Specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 10(D), an effect display is performed in which a large number of characters move on the display screen 70 from right to left.

It should be noted that this group notice is not always executed when the darkening effect is performed, but when SPSP reach is started after the group notice is executed following the darkening effect, the group notice following the darkening effect is executed. SPSP ready-to-win may be started without waiting, and the former has higher reliability of big hit than the latter (hit notification effect is likely to be executed). The execution timing of this group notice is not limited to immediately after the dark effect, and there is a case where the group notice occurs immediately after establishment of the ready-to-win state.

When the dark effect and the group notice are executed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the dark effect is executed, an SPSP ready-to-win effect image, which is an effect image related to the SPSP ready-to-win, is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 10 ( E)). As a result, for example, an effect display showing how the main character and the enemy character are battling is performed. This is as described above with reference to FIG. 8(K). After that, when the end of the SPSP ready-to-win is approached, a first effect button operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 10(F)). Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period during which the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid are displayed.

In this first performance button operation promotion performance, a big win is possible at the timing when the first performance button 35 is operated during its valid period or at the timing when the valid period ends without the first performance button 35 being operated. For example, a cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed on the effect image (other than the ready-to-win pattern) displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 10(G) reference). This cut-in is a production that suggests how much the reliability of the jackpot is, and a green cut-in that superimposes a green cut-in image and a red cut-in that superimposes a red cut-in image. In some cases, a cut-in is performed, and in other cases, a gold cut-in that superimposes a gold cut-in image is performed. Red cut-in, gold cut-in order.

When the cut-in occurs in this way and the SPSP reach ends, a second effect button operation promotion effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the second effect button 36 (see FIG. 10(H)). Specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 10(H), during the effective period of the second effect button operation promoting effect, a second effect button image imitating the second effect button 36 and "Press!" and a valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed.

When the second performance button 36 is operated during the validity period of the second performance button operation promotion performance, as the operation corresponding performance corresponding to the operation, the three performance patterns showing doubles are stopped in a simulated manner, and then the real stop is performed. A winning notification effect is performed (see FIG. 10(I)).

In addition, here, since the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is "big hit", the case where the hit notification effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect is taken as an example. As explained above, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is "losing", as an operation corresponding performance, the three performance symbols indicating the reach losing eye are pseudo-stopped and then the real stop is performed. done.

[About the production performed during the jackpot game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the effect executed during the jackpot game performed when the variable probability jackpot is won will be described. Here, FIG. 11 is a screen diagram showing an example of an effect when a V prize is notified during a jackpot game.

As described above, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit", one of the big hit symbols X1 to X2 (see FIG. 6(B)) is the first special symbol display. A stop display is displayed on the device 41 . Along with this, on the display screen 70, for example, three performance symbols indicating a double number such as "222" are actually stopped. Here, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the double number of "777" and the double number of "333" deterministically notify that the game is controlled in the variable probability game state after the jackpot game is completed. It is a performance pattern, and when 5R probability variation is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination (when the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed), 3 performances that notify the probability variation jackpot. As a pattern, either one of these double eyes will actually stop on the display screen 70 .

In this way, when the three performance symbols showing the double numbers of "777" that deterministically inform the probability variable jackpot are stopped as the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed, during the opening period of the jackpot game, the probability variable An opening effect including the effect of displaying the characters "RUSH BONUS" on the display screen 70 to notify that a jackpot has been achieved is performed (see FIG. 11(A)). After the opening period has started, the characters "Right-handed" and a right-pointing arrow are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 to urge the player to play right-handed (see FIGS. 11A to 11E). .

When the opening period in which the above-described opening effect is performed ends, as described above, the long opening round game in which the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for a long time is started as the first round round game, Along with this, a launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 11B and 11C) is executed to prompt the player to launch a game ball aimed at the V winning hole 287 . In FIGS. 11B and 11C, characters "Aim for the V" and three arrows pointing to the V prize opening 287 (including the characters "Right shot") are displayed as a launch promotion effect. An example is shown. It should be noted that, at the start of such a launch promotion effect, a voice saying "Aim for the V" is output from the speaker 38. FIG.

When the game ball passes through the V prize opening 287 during the first round game in which such a launch promotion performance is performed, the launch promotion performance ends and the V winning notification performance notifies that the game ball has won a V prize. is executed (see FIG. 11(D)). FIG. 11(D) exemplifies an effect display showing two characters holding up a star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V" and being happy as the V winning notification effect. Triggered by the V winning of the ball, a predetermined V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38 .

In this way, when the V winning notification effect for notifying that the game ball has won a V prize is executed during the round game of the first round, a predetermined interval period is reached, and the subsequent round game of the second round (first big prize winning) is executed. During the long opening round game of the mouth 26), the star-shaped emblem is displayed in a small size in the lower left area of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 11(E)). In addition, although not shown in FIG. 11, in the round game from the third round onward, the same round effect as during the round game in the second round is performed. Then, when it comes to the ending period of the jackpot game following the round game of the final round (5th round), the production in the production mode named "Fighting RUSH" that definitely informs that it is in the "probability variable game state" starts. In order to notify that it will be done, the characters of "Fighting RUSH rush!"

[About compound expectations]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13, the composite expected effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the composite expected effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of the character standby effect and the special cut-in, and the reliability of the big win.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the first expected effect and the second expected effect are provided as the effect that makes the user expect that the above-described winning notification effect will be executed during the variable display of the first special symbols in the normal game state. Alternatively, either one can be executed, and execution of the composite expected effect is synonymous with execution of both the first expected effect and the second expected effect within the same variation. That is, the compound expected effect means that the first expected effect and the second expected effect are combined within the same variation.

(Character standby production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a character standby effect can be executed as the first expected effect (see FIGS. 12C to 12G). This character standby effect is a effect showing that a character (hereinafter abbreviated as "character") appears on the display screen 70 and stands by on the display screen 70 without being erased from the display screen 70. The characters on standby perform various actions, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the execution of the winning notification effect. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which a character that has appeared in a character standby effect waits until the end of normal reach (see FIG. 12(H)).

As the character standby effects, a character A standby effect, a character B standby effect, and a character C standby effect are prepared. The character A waiting effect (see FIG. 12C) is a effect in which character A appearing in the above-described character A reach (see FIG. 8I) is displayed on the display screen 70 and kept waiting. can easily recognize that there is a possibility that character A reach will be executed based on the character A waiting effect. In addition, as described above based on FIG. 8, although the reliability of the character A reach itself is not so high, there is a change from the character A reach to the high reliability reach (SP reach or SPSP reach in this embodiment). Reach production may develop. Therefore, by executing the character A standby effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed.

The character B standby effect (see FIG. 12(E)) is a effect in which the character B appearing in the above-described character B reach (see FIG. 8(I)) is displayed on the display screen 70 and is kept on standby. can easily recognize that there is a possibility that character B reach will be executed based on the character B waiting effect. It should be noted that character B reach, like character A reach, is not a reach production with a high degree of reliability for big hits, but reach production from character B reach to high reliability reach (in this embodiment, SP reach or SPSP reach). may develop. Therefore, by executing the character B standby effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed.

The character C waiting effect (see FIG. 12(G)) is a effect in which the character C appearing in the above-described character C reach (see FIG. 8(I)) is displayed on the display screen 70 and kept waiting. can easily recognize that there is a possibility that character C reach will be executed based on the character C standby effect. It should be noted that character C reach, like character A reach and character B reach, is not a reach effect with a high degree of jackpot reliability, but high reliability reach from character C reach (in this embodiment, SP reach or SPSP reach). Reach production may develop to. Therefore, by executing the character C standby effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed.

(special cut-in)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a special cut-in can be executed as the second expected effect (see FIG. 12(L)). In the present embodiment, this special cut-in is performed by superimposing a cut-in image representing the main character appearing in the above-described SPSP reach on the effect image (for example, background image or pending icon) being displayed on the display screen 70. At the same time, it is configured as an effect in which the main character's voice saying "It's intense heat!" is output from the speaker 38. In this way, the cut-in image used for the special cut-in represents the main character appearing in the SPSP reach, so it is suggested that the SPSP reach is executed by executing the special cut-in. Thus, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the execution of the winning notification effect.

The special cut-in has a relatively high jackpot reliability, and in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is set to about 55% (see FIG. 13(B)).

From now on, a series of presentations relating to the composite expected presentation including the character standby presentation and the special cut-in will be described. Note that the character standby effect and special cut-in described below are performed by the sub CPU 91 based on the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination transmitted from the main control board 80. The special cut-in effect illustrated in FIG. A pattern setting process (see FIG. 59) and a character standby effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 60) are executed, and the image sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) executes the effect based on the effect pattern information based on these setting processes. ).

First, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbols in the normal game state, the variable effect including the variable display of the effect symbols is started on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12A). The start of this variable effect is as described above with reference to FIG. 8(A). When the variable effect is started, the following effects may be performed until the normal reach (see FIG. 8(F)) ends.

First, a first operation promotion effect (first operation promotion effect) is performed to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 12(B)). Although not shown in the figure, this first operation promotion effect provides a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 and an effective button image representing the remaining time of the effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 35 is effective. A period gauge is displayed on the display screen 70 . When the player operates the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the first operation promotion effect, the character A standby effect may be executed (see FIGS. 12B and 12C).

Note that the character A standby effect is not necessarily executed by operating the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the first operation promotion effect, and even if the first effect button 35 is operated, the character A standby effect is not necessarily executed. may not be executed. That is, if it is determined in advance to execute the character A standby effect at the start of the current symbol change, the character A standby effect is executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the effective period related to the first operation promotion effect. The effect is executed, and conversely, if it is determined in advance at the start of the current pattern variation that the character A standby effect is not to be executed, the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the first operation promotion effect. Even if it is done, the character A standby effect will not be executed.

Further, in the case where execution of the character A standby effect is determined in advance at the start of this symbol change, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the effective period of the first operation promotion effect, At the timing when this effective period ends, the character A standby effect is automatically executed.

When a predetermined time has passed since the first operation promotion effect was performed, a second operation promotion effect (second operation promotion effect) is performed to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 35 (FIG. 12(D)). reference). This second operation promotion effect is performed in the same manner as the first operation promotion effect. When the player operates the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the second operation promotion effect, the character B standby effect may be executed (see FIGS. 12(D) and (E)).

Note that the character B standby effect is not necessarily executed by operating the first effect button 35 during the valid period of the second operation promotion effect, and even if the first effect button 35 is operated, the character B standby effect is not always executed. may not be executed. In other words, if execution of the character B standby effect is determined in advance at the start of this pattern change, the character B waits according to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period of the second operation promotion effect. The effect is executed, and conversely, if it is determined in advance at the start of the current symbol change that the character B standby effect is not to be executed, the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect. Even if it is done, the character B standby effect will not be executed.

Further, in the case where execution of the character B standby effect is determined in advance at the start of this symbol change, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the effective period of the second operation promoting effect, At the timing when this effective period ends, the character B standby performance is automatically executed.

When a predetermined time has passed since the second operation promotion effect was performed, a third operation promotion effect (third operation promotion effect) is performed to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 35 (FIG. 12(F)). reference). This third operation promotion effect is performed in the same manner as the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect. When the player operates the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the third operation promotion effect, the character C standby effect may be executed (see FIGS. 12(F) and (G)).

Note that the character C standby effect is not necessarily executed by operating the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the third operation promotion effect, and even if the first effect button 35 is operated, the character C standby effect is not necessarily executed. may not be executed. In other words, if execution of the character C standby effect is determined in advance at the start of the current pattern variation, the character C standby effect is activated in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period of the third operation promotion effect. The effect is executed, and conversely, if it is predetermined at the start of the current symbol change that the character C standby effect is not to be executed, the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect. Even if it is done, the character C standby effect will not be executed.

Further, when execution of the character C standby effect is determined in advance at the start of this symbol change, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the effective period of the third operation promoting effect, At the timing when this valid period ends, the character C standby performance is automatically executed.

In this way, when a predetermined time elapses after the third operation promotion effect as the third operation promotion effect is performed, the normal reach ends (see FIG. 12(H)). As is clear from the description so far, the character standby effect in the present embodiment includes the period during which the pre-reach effect (see FIG. 8(D)) is executed and the normal reach (see FIG. 8(F)). It is performed using a period and a . Also, the character A waiting effect, the character B waiting effect, and the character C waiting effect may or may not be executed. Therefore, within the same variation, there are cases where no character standby effect is executed, there are cases where only one character standby effect is executed, there are cases where two character standby effects are executed, and cases where character standby effects are executed. In some cases, all three waiting effects are executed.

A case where only one character waiting effect is executed within the same variation includes the following cases. That is, when the character B standby effect and the character C standby effect are not executed after the character A standby effect is executed, or when the character B standby effect is executed without executing the character A standby effect and then the character C standby effect is executed. When the effect is not executed, there is a case where the character C standby effect is executed without executing the character A standby effect and the character B standby effect.

Examples of the case where two character waiting effects are executed within the same variation include the following cases. That is, when the character C standby effect is not executed after the character A standby effect and the character B standby effect are executed, or when the character B standby effect and the character C standby effect are executed without executing the character A standby effect. , after the character A standby effect is executed, the character C standby effect is executed without executing the character B standby effect.

Further, as a case where all three character standby effects are executed within the same variation, there is a case where the character A standby effect is executed, then the character B standby effect is executed, and then the character C standby effect is executed. be done.

In this way, the number of times character standby effects are executed within the same variation is variable, and there are a plurality of combinations when two character standby effects are executed.

Note that when a plurality of (two or three in this embodiment) character standby effects are executed within the same variation, the effect contents of the character standby effects change. For example, when the character A waiting effect and the character waiting effect B are executed, the character A waiting effect is executed from the state in which the character A is waiting by the character A waiting effect (the one-body waiting state). and character B are in a standby state (2-body standby state).

Further, for example, when the character A waiting effect is not executed and the character waiting effect B and the character C waiting effect are executed, the state in which the character B is waiting by the character B waiting effect (the one-body waiting state) By executing the character C standby effect, the two characters, character B and character C, are changed to a standby state (two-body standby state).

Also, for example, when the character A standby effect, the character B standby effect, and the character C standby effect are all executed within the same variation, the state in which character A is on standby due to the character A standby effect (the one-body standby state) , the two characters, character A and character B, are in a standby state (two-body standby state) by executing the character B standby effect, and then, by executing the character C standby effect, character A , character B, and character C are waiting (3-body waiting state).

Note that when the character standby effect is executed for only one of the character A standby effect, the character B standby effect, and the character C standby effect, the effect content of the character standby effect does not change. Examples of cases where the effect content of the character standby effect does not change include the case where the character B standby effect and the character C standby effect are not executed after the character A standby effect is executed, or the character A case where the character C standby performance is not executed after the B standby performance is executed, and a case where the character C standby performance is executed (without the character A standby performance and the character B standby performance being executed) are mentioned.

In this way, the character standby effect is variable in its effect content, but has a feature that the reliability of the big win changes depending on the number of waiting characters waiting at the end of the normal reach (see FIG. 13(B)). . FIG. 13(B) exemplifies the character standby production jackpot reliability by the number of waiting characters finally waiting at the end of normal reach, and the final number of waiting characters is one. The reliability of the jackpot of the character standby effect is about 5%, and the reliability of the jackpot of the character standby effect when the final number of standby characters is 2 is about 17%, and the final number of standby characters is 3. The jackpot reliability of the character standby effect is about 31%.

In this embodiment, since the character standby effect and the special cut-in jackpot reliability are set to the values exemplified in FIG. By generating the effect, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the execution of the winning notification effect.

In addition, in the character standby effect, after the character standby effect ends, that is, after the normal reach ends, depending on whether the effect content changes There are the following features that change the flow of production.

When only one character standby effect out of the character A standby effect, the character B standby effect, and the character C standby effect is executed, the effect content of the character standby effect does not change, that is, the final standby character is displayed. When normal reach ends with only one body, the reliability of the character standby effect is about 5% (see FIG. 13 (B)), and there is a characteristic that normal reach develops into character reach (see FIG. 12 (H). and (I)). For example, if only the character A standby effect is executed within the same variation, normal reach develops to character A reach. Further, when only the character B standby effect is executed within the same variation, the normal reach is developed into the character B reach. Further, when only the character C standby effect is executed within the same variation, the normal reach is developed into the character C reach.

It should be noted that the fact that only one character standby effect is executed, that is, that the number of standby characters at the time when the character standby effect ends (in this embodiment, at the end of normal reach) is one, leading to high reliability reach. For example, there is a case where only the character A standby effect is executed, normal reach develops to character A reach, and then SP reach or SP SP reach develops.

On the other hand, if two character standby effects out of character A standby effect, character B standby effect, and character C standby effect are executed within the same variation, and normal reach ends with two characters waiting, character The reliability of the jackpot of the standby production is about 17% (see FIG. 13 (B)), and it has the feature that it develops directly from normal reach to SP reach without going through character reach (FIGS. 12 (H) and (K) reference). The SP reach is a reach performance with a higher degree of reliability for big hits than the character reach. Also, although it has developed into a character reach, it is often the case that a loss notification effect is executed without developing into a highly reliable reach. Therefore, the player can positively operate the first effect button 35 while expecting that the number of waiting characters in the character waiting effect will increase to two (become in a two-body waiting state).

In addition, when character A standby effect, character B standby effect, and character C standby effect are all executed within the same variation, and normal reach ends in the state of waiting for three characters, the character standby effect jackpot reliability is about 31% (see FIG. 13(B)), and in this case, the special cut-in will occur immediately after the end of the normal reach (see FIGS. 12(H) and (L)). As described above, this special cut-in is an effect in which a cut-in image representing the main character appearing in SPSP Reach is superimposed and displayed, and the main character's voice saying "It's intense heat!" is output from the speaker 38. When a special cut-in occurs, normal reach directly develops into SPSP reach without going through character reach (see FIGS. 12(H), (L), and (M)). Therefore, the player can positively operate the first effect button 35 while expecting that the number of waiting characters in the character waiting effect will increase to three (3-body waiting state).

FIG. 13A exemplifies the characteristics of the character standby effect, and as described above with reference to FIGS. In other words, when the number of characters on standby at the end is one, it develops beyond character reach. In this case, although there is a possibility that a special cut-in will occur after developing from normal reach to character reach, the probability of occurrence is low (for example, 3%).

Also, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12(H) and (K), when the character standby effect ends with two characters on standby, that is, when the final number of characters on standby is two, normal reach starts. Since it develops directly into SP reach without going through character reach, the reach performance of the development destination is more than SP reach. In this case, there is a possibility that a special cut-in will occur after normal reach develops into SP reach, and although the probability of this happening is higher than when there is only one final standby character, it is moderate. (eg, 10%).

On the other hand, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12(H), (L), and (M), when the character waiting effect ends with three characters waiting, that is, the final number of waiting characters is three. In the case, it develops directly from normal reach to SPSP reach without going through character reach. In this case, a special cut-in will occur before the SPSP reach, and in this embodiment, the probability of occurrence of a special cut-in is 100% when the number of final standby characters is three.

As is clear from the explanation so far, in the character standby effect, the higher the number of final standby characters, or in other words, the more the content of the character standby effect changes, the more the special cut-in occurrence probability (special cut-in probability) increases. Execution probability) is high.

For example, the first probability is the probability that a special cut-in will start when the character standby effect has not changed from waiting for one character to waiting for two characters. If the probability that the special cut-in starts after changing to standby (or 3-body standby) is the second probability, the second probability is higher than the first probability (see Figure 13(A)). ).

Also, for example, the probability that the special cut-in will start in a state where the effect content of the character standby effect has not changed from 2-body standby to 3-body standby (remains in a 2-body standby state) is set as the first probability, and character standby If the second probability is the probability that the special cut-in will start after the effect content changes from waiting for two bodies to waiting for three bodies, the second probability is higher than the first probability (Fig. 13(A)).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the occurrence probability of the special cut-in is higher when the effect content of the character standby effect changes than when the effect content of the character standby effect does not change. There is a feature that the occurrence probability is further increased by further changing the effect content of the character standby effect.

Therefore, for the first operation promotion effect (see FIG. 12(B)), the second operation promotion effect (see FIG. 12(D)), and the third operation promotion effect (see FIG. 12(F)), It is possible to give the player a strong motivation for operating the first effect button 35, and by changing the effect content of the character standby effect, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special cut-in can be increased. can be effectively improved.

(Modified example of composite expected effect)
With respect to the composite expected effect described based on FIGS. 12 and 13, other embodiments may employ the following configuration. That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the character standby effect is executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 for the operation promotion effect will be described as an example. A standby production may be executed.

Further, in another embodiment, the probability of occurrence of a special cut-in is higher when the effect content of the character standby effect does not change than when the effect content of the character standby effect changes. configuration may be adopted. In addition, the probability of special cut-in occurring is higher when the number of changes in the content of character standby effects is smaller than when the number of changes in the content of character standby effects is large, which is the opposite of the configuration of the present embodiment. may be adopted. By adopting both or either one of these configurations, it is possible to realize a highly entertaining effect that makes the player expect that the effect contents of the character standby effect will not change.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first expected effect is the character standby effect will be described as an example, but the first expected effect is not limited to the character standby effect. Other effects such as staged effects that change dynamically may be used. Also, in the present embodiment, a case where the second expected effect is a special cut-in will be described as an example, but the second expected effect is not limited to the special cut-in, and may be another effect such as a group notice. .

[About related production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16, related effects executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 14 is a screen diagram for explaining the related effect. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of related effects. FIG. 16 is a flowchart for explaining the execution period of various related effects.

In FIG. 14(A), in the normal game state, while the first special symbol corresponding to the icon being displayed in the icon display area 72 is displayed in a variable manner, the five symbols on the left are displayed in a simulated stop state, and the symbol on the right is displayed. The scrolling display of the symbol row of the row and the symbol row of the middle row is illustrated. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbols and the effect symbols in the normal game state, the related effect window 75 may be displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 70 (14 ( A)). The related effect window 75 is a display frame used for related effects related to various effects executed in the gaming machine 1, and the related effects are executed in the area inside the related effect window 75.例文帳に追加

As illustrated in FIG. 14B, the related effect window 75 is divided into a past window 76, a present window 77, and a future window 78. As shown in FIG. Here, the past window 76 is during the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol, and at the time when the related effect window 75 is displayed, the effect that has already been executed within the same variation (past is a display frame for executing a past-related effect related to a past effect executed at a certain timing), and in the upper left part of the past window 76, regardless of whether or not the past-related effect is being executed, Characters of "past effect" are displayed (see FIG. 14(B)). Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the past-related performance will be executed in the past window 76 by looking at the characters "past performance".

The current window 77 (see FIG. 14(B)) is during the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol, and at the time when the related effect window 75 is displayed, the effect being executed (current is a display frame for executing a currently related effect related to the current effect being executed at the timing of . The characters "current production" are displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the related effects are currently being executed within the current window 77 by looking at the characters "current effect".

The future window 78 (see FIG. 14(B)) is executed at a certain timing after the point in time when the first special symbol and the effect symbol are being displayed and the related effect window 75 is being displayed. It is a display frame for executing a future-related production related to a production (future production) that may occur. , the characters "Future production" are displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the future-related presentation will be executed in the future window 78 by looking at the characters "Future presentation".

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the past-related effect, the present-related effect, and the future-related effect are not automatically executed. ) can generate any one of past-related effects, present-related effects, and future-related effects.

Different lever operations are assigned to the past-related effect, the present-related effect, and the future-related effect, respectively, and the player operates the operation lever 78 (lever operation), it is possible to generate a desired related effect.

As exemplified in FIG. 14B, directly below the past window 76, there is a downward arrow indicating that the operating lever 98 is tilted backward (forward) and a lever button imitating the lever button of the operating lever 98. image and are displayed. While the related effect window 75 is being displayed, the downward arrow and the lever button image are always displayed. Then, during the executable period of the past-related effect, the past window 76 is highlighted while the downward arrow and the lever button image are displayed. Therefore, based on the downward arrow directly below the past window 76 and the lever button image, the player operates (presses) the lever button while tilting the operation lever 98 backward (towards the front) to activate the past-related effect. It can be easily recognized that it will occur, and when the user sees that the past window 76 is highlighted, it is during the effective period of the operation lever 98 regarding the past-related performance and during the execution possible period of the past-related performance. It is possible to easily recognize that

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 14B, the arrow indicating tilting of the operation lever 98 is not displayed directly below the current window 77, and only the lever button image is displayed. Note that this lever button image is always displayed while the related effect window 75 is being displayed. Then, the current window 77 is highlighted while the lever button image directly under the current window 77 is displayed during the period in which the current related effect can be executed. Therefore, based on the lever button image immediately below the current window 77, the player can operate (press) the lever button without tilting the operation lever 98 in any direction (while maintaining the initial posture), and the current related effect will be generated. It can be easily recognized that it will occur, and seeing that the window 77 is currently highlighted, it is during the effective period of the operation lever 98 for the related performance and during the currently executable period of the related performance. It is possible to easily recognize that

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 14B, immediately below the future window 78, an upward arrow indicating tilting the operating lever 98 forward (forward) and a lever button image are displayed. While the related effect window 75 is being displayed, these upward arrow and lever button images are always displayed. Then, during the executable period of the future-related presentation, the future window 78 is highlighted while the upward arrow and the lever button image are displayed. Therefore, if the player operates (presses) the lever button while tilting the operation lever 98 forward (forward) based on the upward arrow and the lever button image directly below the future window 78, a future-related effect is generated. In addition, when the future window 78 is highlighted, it is during the effective period of the operation lever 98 regarding the future-related performance and during the executable period of the future-related performance. It is possible to easily recognize that there is

FIG. 15(A) exemplifies how the past-related effect is executed after the group notice (see FIG. 10(D)) is executed as the past effect. Specifically, since the reliability of the group announcement is 50% or more, the player presses the lever button while tilting the operation lever 98 backward (towards the front) to obtain the "previous group announcement." is more than 50% reliable!” is generated in the past window 76 . In this way, the player can obtain information about the past performance by performing a predetermined operation of the operation lever 98 corresponding to the past performance.

In the example of FIG. 15(A), the reliability of the big win announcement of the group is specifically reported, so that the reliability of the big win announcement of the group can be known. In addition, since the characters ``The announcement of the group just before'' is displayed in the past window 76, even if the announcement of the group has been overlooked, the fact that the announcement of the group has occurred can be recognized later, and the game can be played. The player can enjoy the game while expecting that the winning notification performance will be executed based on the past-related performance.

FIG. 15(B) exemplifies how a related effect is currently being executed during execution of a character display effect for displaying a predetermined character as the current effect. In the character display effect here, a predetermined character displayed on the display screen 70 throws an item toward the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 (see FIG. 14A), and the item is thrown. It is configured as an effect in which an icon change effect is generated in response to collision with the pending icon. Therefore, when the player depresses the lever button without tilting the operating lever 98 in any direction, a current related effect is displayed in the current window 77 by displaying the characters "This character will change the hold!" occurs in In this way, the player can acquire information about the current effect by performing a predetermined operation of the operating lever 98 corresponding to the current effect.

When the above character display effect is performed, there is a possibility that it may not be known what effect will be performed by this character at the stage when a predetermined character is displayed. On the other hand, according to the presently related effect, what kind of effect will be performed by a predetermined character is notified before the icon change effect is performed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the current performance while understanding what the current performance being executed is based on the current related performance.

FIG. 15(C) illustrates how future-related effects are executed within the future window 78 when SPSP reach is executed as the future effect. The player can select a future-related effect by pressing the lever button with the operating lever 98 tilted forward (forward), and the future-related effect is "If reach is established here, SPSP reach develops." It's done!" is displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that there is a possibility that the SPSP reach will be executed later based on the future-related effect. In this way, the player can acquire information about the future effect by performing a predetermined operation of the operation lever 98 corresponding to the future effect.

Even if it finally develops into SPSP reach during this pattern change, it is not known whether it will really develop into SPSP reach at the stage before it develops into SPSP reach. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned future-related presentation, it is informed that as long as reach is established, it will later develop into SPSP reach. Therefore, the player can easily recognize, based on the future-related effect, what kind of effect should occur to develop the SPSP ready-to-win.

So far, based on FIG. 15A, the past production and the past-related production corresponding to this past production have been described, but the past production and the past-related production are not limited to the production illustrated here, and other It can be a performance. Further, based on FIG. 15(B), the current effect and the current related effect corresponding to this current effect have been described, but the current effect and the current related effect are not limited to the effect illustrated here, and may be other effects. can be Further, based on FIG. 15(C), the future production and the future-related production corresponding to this future production have been described, but the future production and the future-related production are not limited to the production illustrated here, and other productions. can be

FIG. 16(A) is a flow chart for explaining the executable period of the past-related effect. As illustrated in FIG. 16(A), during the variable display of the special symbols and the performance symbols, when the three performances of the performance A, the performance B, and the performance C are executed, it is related to the performance A as the past performance. The executable period of the past-related production A is a period from the end of the production A to the end of the production B. - 特許庁During this period, the player can cause the past-related effect A to occur by pressing the lever button while tilting the operation lever 98 backward (forward).

In addition, in FIG. 16A, after the performance B ends, the performance B becomes a new past performance instead of the performance A. Therefore, the executable period of the past related effect B related to the effect B as the past effect is the period from the end of the effect B to the end of the effect C. - 特許庁During this period, the past-related effect B can be generated by the player pressing the lever button while tilting the operation lever 98 backward (toward the player).

After the performance C ends, the performance C becomes a new past performance instead of the performance B. - 特許庁Therefore, the period during which the past-related effect C related to the effect C as the past effect can be executed is the period after the effect C ends. In addition, the past-related production is often a production that explains the past production, and is not a production that directly informs the reliability of the big win. Therefore, if the past-related production (here, past-related production C) is configured to be executable even at the end of the ready-to-win production, not only will the ready-to-win production become less interesting, but it may also hinder the ready-to-win production. Conceivable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end of the last executable period of the past-related effect during one symbol change (in the example shown in FIG. 16A, the executable period of the past-related effect C) is It is set a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) before the end of the pattern variation (see FIG. 16(A)).

FIG. 16(B) is a flow chart for explaining the executable period of the current related effect. The currently related effect is a effect that can be executed in parallel with the current effect in relation to the effect that is currently being executed (current effect). Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 16(B), during the variable display of the special symbols and the effect symbols, when the three effects of the effect A, the effect B, and the effect C are executed, the effect A as the current effect is the period from the start to the end of the performance A, and the executable period of the current related performance B related to the performance B as the current performance is the period when the performance B is It is a period from the start to the end, and the executable period of the current related performance C related to the performance C as the current performance is the period from the start to the end of the performance C. - 特許庁

Therefore, in the example of FIG. 16(B), if the lever button is pressed without tilting the operating lever 98 in any direction while the effect A is being executed, the related effect A is currently generated and the effect B is being executed. In addition, if the lever button is pressed without tilting the operating lever 98 in any direction, the current related effect B is generated, and during execution of the effect C, the lever button is pressed without tilting the operating lever 98 in any direction. If pressed, the current related effect C will be generated.

FIG. 16(C) is a flowchart for explaining the executable period of the future-related effect. As exemplified in FIG. 16(C), during the variable display of special symbols and performance symbols, when three performances of performance A, performance B, and performance C are executed, performance A is immediately after the start of symbol variation. Since it is executed, there is not enough time to perform the future-related effect A with the effect A as the future effect. Therefore, in such a case, the executable period of the future-related effect A is not set. In other words, the future-related production A is not executed.

As exemplified in FIG. 16(C), the effect executed after the effect A is the effect B. Therefore, the period from the end of the production A to the start of the production B is set as a period during which the future-related production B related to the production B can be executed. ), the future-related effect B can be generated by pressing the lever button. Further, after the performance B is started, since the performance B is no longer an unexecuted performance, the performance B is excluded from the targets of the future performance, and the performance C becomes the target of the future performance instead. Therefore, the period from the start of the effect B to the start of the effect C is set as a period during which the future-related effect C related to the effect C can be executed. ), the future-related effect C can be generated by pressing the lever button (see FIG. 16(C)).

So far, the past-related effects related to the past effects, the present-related effects related to the present effects, and the future-related effects related to the future effects have been described with reference to FIGS. Processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to realize the (past-related effect, present-related effect, and future-related effect) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

[About Subjugation Reach]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the subjugation reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "subjugation reach") executed in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a series of performances of subjugation reach. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery performed according to the operation during subjugation reach.

In the subjugation reach in this embodiment, the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed in the variable probability gaming state is "10R probability variation" in which the big hit symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed, and "3R probability" in which the big hit symbol Y2 is stopped and displayed. A special ready-to-win effect is executed when a variable pattern dedicated to subjugation ready-to-win is selected as the variable pattern of the second special symbol.

As exemplified in FIG. 17, subjugation reach is composed of two types of repeated button-hitting effects called "subjugation continuous-hit effect" and "follow-up continuous-hit effect", aiming for a big hit by continuous button-hitting. As a result of "10R probability change" or "loss" is reported, and as a result of the follow-up attack effect developed from the subjugation button repeated effect, "10R probability change", "3R probability change", or "loss" is reported. There are cases and cases.

During the variable display of the second special symbol in which this subjugation reach is performed, the following effects are performed. First, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and along with this, the variable display of the performance symbols (scroll display of three symbol rows) is started (see FIG. 17(A)). Next, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the start of this pattern change, an enemy army encounter effect is displayed on the display screen 70, in which an effect image showing how the player's army encounters and confronts the enemy army is displayed. (See FIG. 17B).

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the enemy encounter effect was started, a subjugation button repeated pressing effect (an example of the first operation promoting effect) is executed (see FIG. 17(C)). This subjugation button repeated-press promotion effect is configured as a production aimed at subjugating the enemy army by repeatedly hitting the first production button 35, and the first production button 35 is activated during the valid period (during the first period) related to the subjugation button repeated-press promotion effect. The effect is to prompt the player to hit 35 consecutively. During the effective period of the subjugation button mash promotion effect, although not shown in the figure, the first production button 35 and characters explaining the content of the production ``Suppress the enemy army by mashing the button repeatedly!'' are imitated. An animation showing how the first effect button image moves up and down, characters of "Continuous hit!" .

When the player repeatedly hits the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated-hit promotion effect, the subjugation image changing effect is executed (see FIG. 17(D)). This subjugation image changing effect is a effect of displaying an animation showing how the number of enemy soldiers is gradually reduced while the player's own army repeats offense and defense against the enemy army in response to repeated pressing of the first effect button 35. ing.

After such a subjugation image change effect is executed, a subjugation success effect (an example of a first success effect: Fig. 17(E)) or a subjugation failure effect (an example of the first failure effect: see FIG. 17(G)) is executed. The subjugation success production is a production that shows that your army has succeeded in subjugating the enemy army. It is a production that can be executed only when it is "definite change". For this reason, when the subjugation success effect is executed, the 10R probability variable jackpot notification that the three production patterns indicating the double eyes of ``777'' that informs that the ``10R probability variation'' has been won is displayed in a pseudo-stop and then the main stop An effect is executed (see FIG. 17(F)).

In addition, the effective period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect is the effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 35 is effective, and the effective period during which the operation of the second effect button 36 is effective. That is, during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect, the operation promotion effect to prompt the operation of the second effect button 36 is not performed, but even if the second effect button 36 is operated, the first effect button 35 is pressed. Similar to the case of repeated hits, there is a possibility that the subjugation success effect and the 10R probability variable jackpot notification effect will be executed. In FIG. 17, the characters "button repeated or lever operation" and the characters "10R probability change route" are the repeated hits of the first effect button 35 or the second effect button for the case where the "10R probability change route" is won. 36 indicates that the subjugation success effect and the 10R probability variable jackpot notification effect can be executed.

Also, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol (and effect symbol) is "10R probability variation", the subjugation success effect and 10R probability variation jackpot notification effect are always It is not executed, and even if it is "10R probability change", the production after the subjugation failure production described later may be executed.

If the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol (and effect symbol) this time is "3R probability change", if it is "losing", "10R probability change" In some cases, the defeat image change effect is followed by the defeat failure effect and the enemy fleeing effect (see FIGS. 17(G) and (H)). Here, the subjugation failure production is a production showing how the player's own army fails in subjugating the enemy army and is disappointed, and the enemy army escape production is a production showing how the remaining enemy forces flee. The characters "10R definite or 3R definite or losing route" in FIG. 17 show the flow of this effect.

When the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol (and the effect symbol) is "lost" after such a subjugation failure effect and the enemy fleeing effect are executed. With regard to a part of , a loss notification effect may be executed in which three performance symbols indicating a ready-to-win failure are displayed in a pseudo-stop manner and then the real stop is performed (see FIGS. 17(H) and (I)).

On the other hand, the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol (and effect symbol) of this time is "3R probability variation" and part of the case of "10R probability variation" , and some of the cases of “losing”, the following effects are executed. In other words, after the enemy fleeing production, the enemy army discovery production is executed to show that the player's own army pursues the enemy army and finds the escaped enemy army (see FIG. 17(J)).

Then, following the enemy force detection effect, a pursuit button repeated pressing effect (an example of a second operation promoting effect) is executed (see FIG. 17(K)). This chase button repeated hitting promotion effect is configured as a effect aiming at pursuing the enemy army by repeatedly hitting the first effect button 35, and the first effect button 35 is activated during the valid period (during the second period) related to the chase button repeated hitting promotion effect. The effect is to prompt the player to hit 35 consecutively. While not shown in the figure, during the effective period of the chase button mash promotion effect, characters explaining the contents of the effect ``Pursue the enemy army by mashing the button repeatedly!'' and the first effect button 35 are imitated. An animation showing how the first effect button image moves up and down, characters of "Continuous hit!" .

When the player repeatedly hits the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the follow-up attack button repeated-press promotion effect, the follow-up attack image change effect is executed (see FIG. 17(L)). This chase image change effect is a effect of displaying an animation showing how the number of enemy soldiers gradually decreases as a result of the own army pursuing the enemy army in response to repeated pressing of the first effect button 35 . .

After such a follow-up attack image change effect is executed, a first follow-up success effect (an example of a second success effect) is generated in response to repeated pressing of the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the follow-up button repeated-press promotion effect. : See FIG. 17 (M)), a second follow-up success effect (an example of the second success effect: see FIG. 17 (O)), or a follow-up failure effect (an example of the second failure effect: see FIG. 17 (Q)) is executed.

The first follow-up success effect (see FIG. 17 (M)) is a solo follow-up success effect showing how the general of his army succeeds in pursuing (annihilating) the enemy army alone. The effect is executable only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation of the symbol) is "3R probability variation". For this reason, when the first follow-up success effect is executed, the 3R probability change that makes a real stop after displaying the three production patterns showing the double eyes of "333" that informs that the "3R probability change" has been won A jackpot notification effect is executed (see FIG. 17(N)).

The second follow-up success production (see FIG. 17(O)) is a joint fight pursuit success production that shows the state of succeeding in pursuing (annihilating) the enemy army by fighting together with the comrades who have rushed to the rescue of the own army. It is an effect that can be executed only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (and the effect symbol) is "10R probability change". Therefore, when the second follow-up success effect is executed, the three production patterns indicating the double eyes of "777" that inform that the "10R probability variation" has been won are pseudo-stopped and then the 10R probability variation that makes this stop. A jackpot notification effect is executed (see FIG. 17(P)).

As is clear from the explanation so far, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol (and effect symbol) is "10R probability change", the subjugation success effect ( (See FIG. 17 (E)) and when the 10R probability variable jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 17 (F)) is executed, the second pursuit success effect (see FIG. 17 (O)) and the 10R probability variable jackpot notification effect (FIG. 17 (P)) is executed.

The pursuit failure production (see FIG. 17 (Q)) is a production that shows the enemy's pursuit (annihilation) failure. It is executed when the determination result of the special symbol determination is "losing". Therefore, when the follow-up failure effect is executed, the three effect patterns showing the reach-losing numbers for informing "losing" are displayed in a pseudo-stop manner, and then the loss reporting effect is executed to actually stop (Fig. 17(R)). reference).

As described above with reference to FIG. 17, when the subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)) is executed, the first follow-up success effect (see FIG. 17(M)) and the second follow-up success effect (See FIG. 17 (O)), the pursuit failure effect (see FIG. 17 (Q)) is not executed, and the subjugation failure effect (see FIG. 17 (G)) is executed. 2 A follow-up success effect or a follow-up failure effect is executed.

In this embodiment, a case where two success effects (second success effect) of the first follow-up success effect and the second follow-up success effect can be executed will be described as an example. A configuration in which one follow-up success effect is executed may be adopted as the effect. In this case, in both the case of winning the "10R probability variable" and the case of winning the "3R probability variable", a common follow-up success performance may be executed.

<Regarding the winning probability of each successful production lottery>
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the success effect lottery executed according to the button operation during each effective period of subjugation reach will be described. Here, FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery performed according to the operation during subjugation reach.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the determination result of the second special symbol determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable probability gaming state is "10R probability variable", "3R probability variable", or , "Loss", and when the variation pattern corresponding to the subjugation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 91 sets the sub CPU 91 to set the subjugation reach variation effect pattern.

For example, if you win the "10R probability change", a variable production pattern (hereinafter "variable production pattern A"), or a subjugation button repeated-hit promotion production (see FIG. 17(C)) to subjugation failure production (see FIG. 17(G)) and follow-up button repeated-hit promotion production (see FIG. 17(K)). A variable effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as "variable effect pattern B") is set in which the effect progresses to the second follow-up successful effect (see FIG. 17(O)) via .

Also, for example, if you win the "3R probability change", from the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion production (see FIG. 17 (C)) to the subjugation failure production (see FIG. 17 (G)) and pursuit button repeated hitting promotion production (see FIG. 17 (K) )) to the first follow-up success effect (see FIG. 17(M)).

Also, for example, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination at the start of the fluctuation is "losing", the subjugation button continuous hitting promotion effect (see FIG. 17 (C)) to the subjugation failure effect (see FIG. 17 (G)) Via the variable effect pattern in which the effect progresses to the failure notification effect (see FIG. 17 (I)), or the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect (see FIG. 17 (C)) to the subjugation failure effect (see FIG. 17 (G )) and a follow-up attack promotion effect (see FIG. 17(K)) to follow-up failure effect (see FIG. 17(Q)).

Then, the sub CPU 91 transmits to the image sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) a variable effect start command including information indicating the set subjugation reach variable effect pattern, so that the effect pattern set by the sub CPU 91 is transmitted. Subjugation reach will be executed.

Here, when the sub-CPU 91 sets the variable effect pattern A, that is, the effect progresses from the subjugation button repeated pressing promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)) to the subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)). When the variable production pattern is set, the following processing is executed. That is, the sub CPU 91 generates an operation random number in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 (or the second effect button 36) during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)). get. Then, a subjugation success effect lottery is executed to determine whether or not the acquired operation random number matches a preset winning value. reference).

Specifically, the sub CPU 91 controls the first effect button detection sensor 96 (or the second effect button detection sensor 96) during the effective period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect regarding the operation random number appropriately updated by the random number update process in the sub control board 90. A value at the time when the operation signal is output from the detection sensor 97) is obtained as an operation random number and stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93. FIG. Then, a subjugation success effect lottery is executed to determine whether or not the operation random number stored in the predetermined area matches any of the random number values stored in the sub ROM 92.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, the possible values of the operation random number are set to 100 from "0" to "99". 20 random numbers (winning values) are stored, and 10 random numbers (winning values) are stored for the second and subsequent operations of the first effect button 35 during the effective period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect. ing.

When the first effect button 35 is operated for the first time during the effective period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect, that is, the sub CPU 91 detects the first operation from the first effect button detection sensor 96 during the effective period. When the signal is output, it is determined whether or not to execute the subjugation success effect based on whether or not the operation random number stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 matches with any of the 20 random numbers. Here, when the obtained and stored operation random number matches any of the 20 random numbers, the subjugation success presentation is executed immediately after the subjugation image change presentation is executed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines not to execute the subjugation success effect with respect to the first operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect, that is, when the acquired and stored operation random number is the above 20 If it does not match with any of the random numbers, the process related to the subjugation success presentation lottery is terminated without executing the subjugation success presentation after executing the subjugation image change presentation.

Then, when the first effect button 35 is operated for the second time or later during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect, the sub CPU 91 changes the operation random number acquired in response to the operation to one of the above ten random numbers. Whether or not to execute the subjugation success effect is determined based on whether or not it matches with any of the numerical values (winning values). Here, when the obtained and stored operation random number matches one of the ten random numbers, the subjugation success presentation is executed immediately after the subjugation image change presentation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the operation random number can take the above 100 random numbers, whereas 20 random numbers are stored for the first operation of the first effect button 35. Ten random numbers are stored for the second and subsequent operations. Therefore, the probability that the subjugation success effect is executed in response to the first operation of the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect is 20% (=20/100×100). The probability that the subjugation success effect will be executed in response to the second and subsequent operations of the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the button repeated pressing effect is 10% (=10/100×100) (FIG. 18). (A)).

In this embodiment, every time the first effect button 35 is operated during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect, the subjugation success effect lottery is executed, and if the subjugation success effect lottery is lost, the subjugation image change effect is performed. Only is executed, and when winning the subjugation success production lottery after that, the subjugation image change production and the subjugation success production are executed. For this reason, even if the player operates the first effect button 35, only the subjugation image change effect is repeatedly executed when it is difficult to win the subjugation success effect lottery.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 operates when the second effect button 36 is operated during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect, that is, when the operation signal is output from the second effect button detection sensor 97 during the effective period. , the operation random number is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 in the same manner as when the first effect button 35 is operated. In this embodiment, even when the second effect button 36 is operated, the operation random number is configured to be one of the above 100 random values, similarly to when the first effect button 35 is operated. . The sub ROM 92 stores the same random number as the 100 possible random numbers for the operation of the second effect button 36 as a winning value. Therefore, the probability that the defeat success effect is executed when the second effect button 36 is operated is 100% (=100/100×100). If the button 36 is operated, the subjugation success presentation is always executed (see FIG. 18(A)).

For this reason, the player can operate the first effect button 35 several times during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect (see FIG. 17C) when the subjugation success effect is not executed. By operating the effect button 36, it is possible to easily generate a subjugation success effect. In addition, if the player wants to quickly know whether or not the subjugation success effect will be executed, the player can press the second effect button 36 without operating the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect. By operating , it is possible to quickly know whether or not the subjugation success effect will be executed.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 18(A), regarding the second and subsequent operations of the second effect button 36 during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect, the winning value related to the subjugation success effect lottery is not prepared. Therefore, the subjugation success effect will not be executed in response to the second and subsequent operations of the second effect button 36 during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect.

In this embodiment, during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect, regardless of whether the first effect button 35 is operated or not, the operation of the second effect button 36 is valid only once. will be described as an example, for example, on the condition that the number of operations of the first effect button 35 performed during the effective period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect reaches a predetermined number of times, the operation of the second effect button 36 A configuration in which it becomes effective may be adopted.

Here, while referring to FIG. 18 (A), the subjugation success production drawing and the The winning probability has been explained, but this subjugation success performance lottery is performed only when the variable performance pattern A is selected as the subjugation reach variation performance pattern. That is, even if the judgment result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol in which the subjugation reach is executed is "10R probability change", the subjugation reach is changed and the subjugation button is promoted as a variation production pattern. From the production (see FIG. 17 (C)) to the subjugation failure production (see FIG. 17 (G)) and the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion production (see FIG. 17 (K)) to the second pursuit success production (see FIG. 17 (O) ) is set, the subjugation success production lottery is not executed so that the subjugation success production is not executed. For this reason, when the variable performance pattern B is set as the variable performance pattern of the subjugation reach, the number of times the first performance button 35 and the second performance button 36 are operated during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion performance However, the subjugation success effect is not executed, and the subjugation image change effect is executed each time the operation is performed.

Next, the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol in which the subjugation reach is executed is "10R probability change", and the subjugation reach promotion pattern for the subjugation button repeated hits ( 17 (C)) to subjugation failure production (see FIG. 17 (G)) and follow-up button repeated hitting promotion production (see FIG. 17 (K)) via second pursuit success production (see FIG. 17 (O)) A description will be given of the second follow-up success effect lottery that is executed during the effective period of the follow-up attack button repeated hitting promotion effect when the variable effect pattern B in which the effect progresses to 2 is set.

In this embodiment, when "10R probability change" is won and the subjugation reach progresses to the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect, according to the operation of the first production button 35 during the valid period related to this pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect, The sub CPU 91 executes a 2 follow-up success effect lottery. When the first effect button 35 is operated during the effective period of the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect, the sub CPU 91 acquires an operation random number and stores a predetermined Store in the area.

On the other hand, the sub-ROM 92 stores 10 random numbers (winning values) for the second follow-up success effect lottery for the first operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect. are stored, and 15 winning values are stored for the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the effective period relating to the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion performance. Therefore, as exemplified in FIG. 18B, the probability that the second follow-up success effect is executed in response to the first operation of the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect is It is 10% (=10/100×100), and the probability that the second follow-up successful effect is executed in response to the second and subsequent operations of the first effect button 35 during the effective period related to the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect is 15. % (=15/100×100).

When the second chase success performance lottery is not won, the chase image change performance is executed, and when the second chase success performance lottery is won in accordance with the operation of the first performance button 35 after the next time, the chase image change. The effect and the second follow-up success effect are executed. That is, every time the first effect button 35 is operated, the follow-up attack image changing effect is repeatedly executed until the second follow-up success effect lottery is won.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 18B, regarding the operation of the second effect button 36 during the effective period related to the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect, the winning value for the second follow-up success effect lottery is prepared. do not have. That is, even if the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect, the second follow-up success effect lottery is not executed, and the second effect button 36 during the effective period related to the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect. The second follow-up success effect is not executed in response to the operation of .

On the other hand, when the "3R probability change" is won and the subjugation reach progresses to the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion production, the first pursuit success according to the operation of the first production button 35 during the valid period related to this pursuit button repeated hitting promotion production. An effect lottery is executed by the sub CPU 91. - 特許庁When the first effect button 35 is operated during the effective period of the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect, the sub CPU 91 acquires an operation random number and stores a predetermined Store in the area.

On the other hand, the sub-ROM 92 stores five random numbers (winning values) for the first follow-up success effect lottery for the first operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect. are stored, and 20 winning values are stored for the second and subsequent operations of the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 18(C), the probability that the first follow-up success effect is executed in response to the first operation of the first effect button 35 during the effective period of the follow-up button repeated-hit promotion effect is It is 5% (=5/100×100), and the probability that the first follow-up success effect is executed in response to the second and subsequent operations of the first effect button 35 during the effective period related to the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect is 20. % (=20/100×100).

When the first follow-up success performance lottery is not won, the follow-up attack image change performance is executed, and when the first follow-up success performance lottery is won in accordance with the operation of the first performance button 35 after the next time, the follow-up attack image change. The effect and the first follow-up success effect are executed. That is, every time the first effect button 35 is operated, the follow-up attack image changing effect is repeatedly executed until the first follow-up success effect lottery is won.

As is clear from the description in FIG. 18(C), regarding the operation of the second effect button 36 during the valid period related to the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect, the winning value for the first follow-up success effect lottery is prepared. do not have. That is, even if the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect, the first follow-up success effect lottery is not executed, and the second effect button 36 during the effective period related to the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect. The first follow-up success effect is not executed in response to the operation of .

In this way, when the second effect button 36 is operated during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect, the subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)) can be executed according to the operation. On the other hand, when the second effect button 36 is operated during the validity period of the pursuit button repeated hitting promotion effect, the first follow-up success effect or the second follow-up success effect is executed according to the operation. never.

Up to this point, the subjugation reach has been described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, but the processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to achieve this subjugation reach will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

[About the type of jackpot random number and pre-determination information]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the types of jackpot random numbers and the prior determination information will be described. Here, FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the prior determination information, FIG. 19 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type of the jackpot random number and the jackpot prior determination information, FIG. ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various kinds of pre-determination information included in the pending command transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. FIG.

A main CPU 81 acquires a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a ready-to-win random number, and a variation pattern random number when a game ball wins in a first start port 21 in a state in which the reserved number of the first special pattern determination does not reach the upper limit. Here, the jackpot random number is acquired information used to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the pattern random number determines the type of jackpot (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game, etc.) This is the type information for The ready-to-win random number is a random number for determining whether to perform a ready-to-win effect or a non-to-win effect when it is determined not to execute the jackpot game, and the variation pattern random number determines the variation pattern of the special symbol. is a random number for These jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are obtained in the same way when the game ball wins in the second starting port 22 in a state where the second special symbol determination pending number has not reached the upper limit. be done.

In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22) in a situation where the special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed, such as during the variable display of the special symbols or during the execution of the jackpot game, The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the ready-to-win random number, and the variation pattern random number acquired according to the winning are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 as information for withholding the right to determine the special symbol. A specific area of the main RAM 83 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In this way, when the right to determine the special symbol is reserved, the main CPU 81 executes prior determination processing as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game prior to executing the special symbol determination corresponding to the right. do. Specifically, when a jackpot random number or the like is acquired in response to the game ball winning the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22), the acquired jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82 in advance. It is determined in advance whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed based on whether or not it matches the value.

(Classification of jackpot random numbers obtained in low probability state)
Here, the jackpot random number obtained in response to the game ball winning the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22) in the low probability state (normal game state or time-saving game state in this embodiment) is, as illustrated in FIG. 19(A), a “definite winning random number” (an example of the first acquired information), a “temporary losing random number” (an example of the second acquired information), and a “definite losing random number”. ,are categorized.

As described above with reference to FIG. 6A, in this embodiment, four random numbers "0" to "3" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for the low-probability state. , 836 random numbers from "4" to "839" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "failure values". In addition, with respect to the high probability state (probability variable gaming state in this embodiment), 14 random numbers from "0" to "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values", and "14" to "839" are stored in the main ROM 82. ' are stored in the main ROM 82 as 'failed values'.

Here, among the total 840 random numbers from "0" to "839", the four random numbers from "0" to "3" are "winning" for both the low probability state and the high probability state. value” in the main ROM 82 (see FIG. 6A). This means that if the obtained jackpot random number is any of "0" to "3", the state when the special symbol determination is executed is either a low probability state or a high probability state. It means that it is judged as "big hit". Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "0" to "3" acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to determine the special symbol in the low-probability state correspond to the right, as shown in FIG. Whether the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state, it matches the "winning value" and is judged to be a "jackpot", so the "hit confirmed random number" can be classified into

On the other hand, of the total 840 random numbers from "0" to "839", ten random numbers from "4" to "13" are, as illustrated in FIG. is stored in the main ROM 82 as a "loss value", and the high probability state is stored in the main ROM 82 as a "winning value". This means that if the acquired jackpot random number is any one of ``4'' to ``13'' and the state when the special symbol determination is executed is a low probability state, it is determined as ``losing'', and the special symbol If the state when the determination is executed is a high probability state, it means that it is determined as a "jackpot". Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "4" to "13" acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to determine the special symbol in the low probability state correspond to the right, as shown in FIG. 19(A). If the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state (same as when the starting gate is won), it is determined to be "losing" in agreement with the "lost value", while the special symbol corresponding to the right If the state changes from the low-probability state to the high-probability state when the determination is executed, it is determined as a "big win" in agreement with the "winning value". For this reason, the jackpot random numbers "4" to "13" that are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to determine the special symbol in the low probability state, when the special symbol determination is executed in the low probability state When it is determined as "losing" and the special symbol determination is executed after shifting to the high probability state, it is determined as "big hit", so it can be classified as "temporary losing random number".

In addition, out of the total 840 random numbers from "0" to "839", the 826 random numbers from "14" to "839" are "rejection values" for both the low probability state and the high probability state. ” is stored in the main ROM 82 (see FIG. 6A). This means that when the obtained jackpot random number is any of "14" to "839", the state when the special symbol determination is executed is either a low probability state or a high probability state. It means that it will be judged as "losing". Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "14" to "839" acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to determine the special symbol in the low-probability state correspond to the right, as shown in FIG. Even if the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is either a low probability state or a high probability state, it will be determined as "losing" by matching the "rejection value", so "losing fixed random number" can be classified into

(Classification of jackpot random numbers obtained in high probability state)
The jackpot random number obtained in response to the game ball entering the first starting port 21 (or the second starting port 22) in the high probability state is, as illustrated in FIG. It is classified into "fixed random number", "provisional hit random number" (an example of the second acquisition information), and "loss fixed random number".

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the four random numbers "0" to "3" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for both the low-probability state and the high-probability state. stored (see FIG. 6A). Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "0" to "3" acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to determine the special symbol in the high probability state correspond to the right, as shown in FIG. 19(A). Whether the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state. In the same way as the jackpot random numbers "0" to "3" acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to determine the special symbol, it can be classified as a "hit confirmed random number".

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the ten random numbers from "4" to "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for the high-probability states, and "failed" for the low-probability states. value” in the main ROM 82. This means that if the jackpot random number obtained in the high probability state is any of "4" to "13", the state when the special symbol determination is executed (any of these jackpot random numbers (Same as when is acquired) If it is in a high probability state, it is determined to be a "jackpot", for example, by winning a normal jackpot, the state when the special symbol determination is executed changes from a high probability state to a low probability state. If it changes, it means that it is judged as "losing". For this reason, the jackpot random numbers "4" to "13" that are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to determine the special symbol in the high probability state, when the special symbol determination is executed in the high probability state If it is determined as a "big hit" and the special symbol determination is executed after shifting to a low probability state, it is determined as "losing", so it can be classified as a "temporary winning random number".

In addition, as described above, out of the total 840 random numbers from "0" to "839", the 826 random numbers from "14" to "839" can be either the low-probability state or the high-probability state. are also stored in the main ROM 82 as "failure values". Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "14" to "839" acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to determine the special symbol in the high probability state correspond to the right, as shown in FIG. Even if the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is either a low probability state or a high probability state, it will be judged as "losing" by matching the "rejection value", so when it is in a low probability state In the same way as the jackpot random numbers "14" to "839" acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to determine the special symbol, it can be classified as a "determined loss random number".

In a low-probability state, the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game is to be executed when the jackpot random number obtained at the start-up win is a "determined-hit random number", while the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot random number obtained at the start-up win is a "temporary losing random number." ” or “Loss definite random number”, it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed. On the other hand, in the high-probability state, if the jackpot random number obtained at the time of winning the starting gate is any of the "definite hit random number", the "temporary losing random number", or the "tentative random number", it is determined to execute the jackpot game, and If the big-hit random number obtained at the time of winning is a "loss fixed random number", it is determined that the big-hit game is not executed.

The main CPU 81 judges various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers for the first special symbol determination (or the second special When acquired and stored as information to reserve the right of symbol judgment), the sub-control board 90 sends a hold command including jackpot prior judgment information ("hit confirmation information", "temporary loss information", or "loss confirmation information") Send to

Here, the "determined hit information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number obtained as the information that reserves the right to determine the special symbol in the low probability state is the "determined hit random number". "Temporary loss information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as the information for reserving the right of special symbol determination in the low probability state is a "temporary loss random number". "Loss definite information" is information notifying that the jackpot random number acquired as the information to reserve the right of special symbol determination in the low probability definite state is "losing definite random number".

In this way, since the main control board 80 transmits a hold command including the jackpot advance determination information in the low probability state to the sub control board 90, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90 is included in the hold command. It is possible to easily specify what the judgment result will be when the reserved special symbol judgment is executed based on the big hit advance judgment information when the reservation command is received. .

For example, when receiving a hold command containing "hit confirmation information" as the jackpot prior determination information, based on this "hit confirmation information", when the special symbol determination corresponding to the hold command is executed, the state at that time It is possible to easily identify whether is determined to be a "jackpot" in either the low-probability state or the high-probability state. In addition, when receiving a hold command containing "provisional loss information" as the jackpot prior determination information, based on this "provisional loss information", when the special symbol determination corresponding to the hold command is executed, the state at that time It is possible to easily specify that if is in a low probability state, it is determined as "losing", and if the state at that time is in a high probability state, it is determined as a "big hit". Also, if you receive a pending command containing "losing confirmation information" as the jackpot prior determination information, based on this "losing confirmation information", when the special symbol determination corresponding to the pending command is executed, at that time Whether the state is a low-probability state or a high-probability state, it is possible to easily identify whether the state is determined to be “lost”.

The main CPU 81 judges various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers as the second special symbol judgment (or the first special pattern judgment) as information to reserve the right, the sub-control board 90 the sub control board 90 the reservation command including the jackpot prior judgment information Send to

Here, the "hit confirmed information" is information notifying that the jackpot random number obtained as the information that reserves the right of special symbol determination in the high probability state is the "hit confirmed random number". "Tentative winning information" is information for notifying that the jackpot random number obtained as the information to reserve the right of special symbol determination in the high probability state is "tentative random winning number". "Loss confirmation information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as the information that reserves the right of special symbol determination in the high probability state is "loss confirmation random number".

In this way, since the main control board 80 transmits a hold command including the jackpot prior determination information in the high probability state to the sub control board 90, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90 is included in the hold command. It is possible to easily specify what the judgment result will be when the reserved special symbol judgment is executed based on the big hit advance judgment information when the reservation command is received. .

For example, when receiving a hold command containing "provisional hit information" as jackpot prior determination information in a high probability state, based on this "provisional hit information", when the special symbol determination corresponding to the hold command is executed , If the state at that time remains a high probability state, it will be judged as a "big hit", and if the state at that time changes from a high probability state to a low probability state, it will be easily judged as a "losing". can be specified.

The sub CPU 91 is based on the jackpot advance determination information included in the hold command received from the main control board 80, the state (low probability state or high probability state) at the time of holding digestion, and when the special symbol judgment is executed. It is possible to accurately specify the relationship between the determination result and, based on this specification result, it is possible to appropriately execute and control the look-ahead effect based on the result of the preliminary determination process.

FIG. 19B shows various prejudgment information transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 in a form included in the hold command together with the jackpot prejudgment information described based on FIG. 19A. exemplified. The main CPU 81 executes a predetermined pre-determination process based on the jackpot random number or the like acquired in response to the start-up prize. A hold command including prior determination information, variation pattern information, and game state information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 .

Here, the winning start opening information is whether various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers are acquired when the game ball wins the first start opening 21, or when the game ball wins the second start opening 22. This is information indicating whether it was acquired as a result of

The jackpot prior determination information is as described above with reference to FIG. When the right is reserved, "hit confirmation information", "temporary loss information", or "loss confirmation information" is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 as the jackpot prior determination information (see FIG. 19 (B)) . In addition, when the right to determine the special symbol is reserved in response to the game ball winning the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22) in the high probability state, "hit confirmation information", "temporary hit information" or "losing determination information" is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 as the jackpot prior determination information (see FIG. 19(B)).

The jackpot type advance determination information is information indicating what the jackpot type is. As described above with reference to FIG. 6A, four random numbers "0" to "3" are stored in the main ROM 82 as winning values for the low-probability state. For this reason, in the case of a conventional pachinko game machine, since the jackpot random number obtained in the low-probability state coincides with one of the winning values of "0" to "3", the jackpot game is executed in advance. If it is determined, the type of jackpot (special game) is specified based on the pattern random number acquired together with this jackpot random number, and information indicating the result of prior determination as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the specified Information indicating the type of jackpot is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in a form included in the pending command.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot random number acquired in the low probability state is a "hit confirmed random number" (in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3": FIG. 19 (A) See), not limited to the case where the jackpot random number obtained in the low probability state is "temporary losing random number" (in this embodiment, one of "4" to "13": see FIG. 19 (A)) Regarding also, the type of jackpot (special game) is specified based on the pattern random number acquired together with this jackpot random number. And, prior determination information (big hit prior determination information) indicating the result of prior determination whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and information (special game information) indicating the type of the specified jackpot (jackpot game), hold command , and this pending command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 .

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as is apparent from FIG. 6A, random numbers "4" to "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "failure values" for low-probability states. Therefore, when the jackpot random number obtained in the low probability state is stored as information to reserve the right to judge the special symbol, that is, when the "temporary losing random number" is obtained and stored in the low probability state, it is reserved If the state when the special symbol determination corresponding to the right is performed is the same low probability state as when the right of this special symbol determination is reserved, it will be determined as "losing" by this special symbol determination. .

However, the random numbers "4" to "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for the high-probability state (see FIG. 6A). For this reason, after the "temporary losing random number" is acquired and stored in the low probability state, for example, the result of the previously reserved special symbol judgment becomes "probable variable jackpot", and from the low probability state to the high probability state , and if the special symbol determination based on the above-mentioned "provisional failure random number" is performed in a high probability state, the result of this special symbol determination becomes "big hit".

That is, the "provisional random number" obtained in the low probability state basically matches the "rejection value", but the state when the special symbol determination based on this "provisional random number" is executed is low. If it changes from the probability state to the high probability state, it can be said that it is a jackpot random number with an uncertain factor that it matches the "winning value" instead of the "loss value".

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the jackpot prior determination information in the low probability state is "hit confirmed information" (that is, if the jackpot random number acquired in the low probability state is "hit confirmed random number" ), not only when the jackpot prior determination information in the low probability state is "temporary loss information" (that is, when the jackpot random number obtained in the low probability state is "temporary loss random number"), the jackpot random number and The type of jackpot (jackpot game) is specified based on the symbol random numbers acquired together, and the jackpot type pre-determination information indicating this identification result is the jackpot pre-determination information (here, “hit confirmation information” or “temporary information”) is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

In FIG. 20 (A), when the game is controlled in the normal game state (low probability state), special figure 1 first A state in which three pending icons of pending, special figure 1 second pending, and special figure 1 third pending are displayed is illustrated. Here, with regard to the special figure 1 third reservation, "temporary losing random number" is acquired, and "temporary losing information" is acquired as the jackpot prior determination information, so it is clear from the notation of FIG. 19 (A) As such, if the hold corresponding to the special figure 1 third hold is digested while remaining in a low probability state, it will be determined as "losing".

However, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 20 (A), since the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 1 first reservation is "5R probability variation", it corresponds to the special figure 1 third reservation Before the reservation is digested, specifically, when the jackpot game corresponding to the special figure 1 first reservation ends, the low probability state will be changed to the high probability state, and as a result, the special figure 1 The determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the third reservation is "big hit".

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the "provisional loss random number" is acquired in the low probability state and the "provisional loss information" is acquired as the jackpot prior determination information, it is determined that this loss is Along with the "provisional loss information" indicated, jackpot type prior determination information indicating the type of jackpot (jackpot game) is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90.

Therefore, when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 1 third suspension is suspended, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90 has a high probability If it shifts to a state, it will become a "jackpot", and it is possible to specify what the type of the jackpot is based on the temporary loss information and the jackpot type prior determination information.

As a result, the sub CPU 91 can execute an icon change effect as exemplified in FIG. is. In FIG. 21, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the special figure 1 first reservation is "5R probability change", so the state where the red reservation icon is displayed as the special figure 1 first reservation is illustrated. It is Also, in FIG. 21, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 1 third reservation is performed in a high probability state, and the determination result is "big hit", so the special figure 1 third reservation is scaled. is displayed as an expansion/reduction suspension icon that repeats , and a message is displayed above the expansion/reduction suspension icon that says, "If you are in a probability change, you might win!?"

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the "temporary losing random number" is acquired in a low probability state, and the jackpot prior determination information becomes "temporary losing information", that is, basically it becomes "losing", It is possible to provide an opportunity for a look-ahead performance even in a case where a "jackpot" is achieved if the low-probability state transitions to the high-probability state before the reservation is consumed.

In addition, here, based on the "provisional loss information" and "jackpot type prior determination information", the case of executing the icon change effect using the pending icon was described as an example, but based on these information Other prefetching It is also possible to perform a production.

Returning to the description of the "jackpot type advance determination information" in FIG. The big hit type pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 together with the confirmation information or the temporary losing information. This is as described above.

On the other hand, the main CPU 81 acquires a "determined loss random number" in response to the start winning in a low-probability state, and transmits "determined loss information" indicating that the "determined loss random number" has been acquired to the sub-control board 90. When transmitting, the jackpot type prior determination information is not transmitted. This means that when a "loss confirmed random number" is acquired, the special symbol determination based on this "loss confirmed random number" is determined to be "loss" regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. This is because there is no need to notify the sub-control board 90 of the type of the jackpot.

Next, the treatment of the jackpot type prior determination information when the game ball has won the second starting port 22 (or the first starting port 21) in the high probability state will be described. When the main CPU 81 starts winning in such a high-probability state, the main CPU 81 transmits "big win type information" together with "win confirmed information" or "tentative win information" to the sub-control board 90, In the case of transmitting "determined information", control is performed such that "jackpot type information" is not transmitted (see FIG. 19(B)).

When the "win confirmed random number" is obtained by starting winning in a high probability state, the main CPU 81 sub-controls the "jackpot type advance determination information" together with the "win confirmed information" (see FIG. 19A). It is transmitted to the substrate 90 (see FIG. 19(B)). This means that if the "hit confirmed random number" is acquired, the state when the special symbol determination is executed based on this hit confirmed random number is either a high probability state or a low probability state. This is because it will be a big hit.

In addition, when the "provisional winning random number" is obtained by starting winning in a high probability state, the main CPU 81 transmits "preliminary judgment information of jackpot type" together with "provisional winning information" (see FIG. 19A). It is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 (see FIG. 19(B)). This means that when a "temporary winning random number" is obtained in a high probability state, if the state when the special symbol determination based on this "temporary winning random number" is executed remains in the high probability state, it becomes a "jackpot". This is because basically it is necessary to make it the target of the look-ahead effect.

The variation pattern information (see FIG. 19B) is information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbols. When the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved in response to the game ball winning the first starting port 21, the information indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. sent. On the other hand, when the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved in response to the game ball winning the second starting port 22, the information indicating the variation pattern of the second special symbol is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board. 90. The game state information is information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1 at the time when a jackpot random number or the like is acquired with the start winning as a trigger.

In FIG. 20 (B), when the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state (high probability state), as a reservation icon indicating that the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, special figure 2 first A state in which four pending icons of pending, special figure 2 second pending, special figure 2 third pending, and special figure 2 fourth pending are displayed is illustrated. Here, with regard to the special figure 2 fourth reservation, "temporary hit random number" is acquired, and "temporary hit information" is acquired as jackpot prior determination information, so it is clear from the notation of FIG. 19 (A) Thus, if the hold corresponding to the special figure 2 fourth hold is digested while remaining in a high probability state, it will be determined as a "jackpot".

However, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 20 (B), the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 2 second reservation is "3R normal", so it corresponds to the special figure 2 fourth reservation Before the hold is digested, specifically, the game state after the jackpot game corresponding to the special figure 2 second hold is completed and the game state becomes a time-saving game state (low probability state), and as a result, the special figure 2 second The determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to 4 suspension is "losing".

In such a case, with respect to the second special symbol determination right related to the special figure 2 fourth reservation, since the reservation command including "tentative winning information" is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90, the sub CPU 91 Is, this "temporary hit information", the state when the second special symbol determination related to special figure 2 fourth reservation is executed (low probability state in the example shown in FIG. 20 (B)), based on , It is also possible to perform effect control such as not to target the look-ahead effect with respect to the right of the second special symbol determination related to the special figure 2 fourth reservation.

<Suggestion of jackpot in special figure 2 hold>
FIG. 22 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the time when the third round game in the jackpot game is started, the reserved second special symbol determination right includes a "probability variable jackpot". In this case, during the third round game, the special figure 2 pending probability variable jackpot suggestion effect may be executed (see FIG. 22(A)). In FIG. 22(A), a background image displayed on the display screen 70 to suggest that the reserved second special symbol determination right includes a "probable variable jackpot". As, different from the background during the normal round, it is exemplified that the special figure 2 hold probability variable jackpot suggestion production that displays the hold probability variable jackpot suggestion background is being executed.

In addition, in FIG. 22(B), it is displayed on the display screen 70 to suggest that the reserved second special symbol determination right includes a "normal jackpot". As a background image, a state in which a special figure 2 on-hold normal jackpot suggesting effect that displays a on-hold normal jackpot suggesting background, which is different from the normal round background, is being executed is illustrated.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 19, the game ball enters the second starting port 22 in the high probability state, and the "definite winning random number" or the "temporary winning random number" is acquired. In other words, when "hit confirmed information" or "temporary hit information" is acquired as the jackpot advance judgment information, the jackpot type advance judgment information is the main control along with the "hit confirmed information" or "tentative hit information" It is transmitted from the board 80 to the sub-control board 90 . For this reason, after considering the state at the time of reservation digestion corresponding to the reserved second special symbol judgment right, it is possible to execute an accurate special figure 2 reservation jackpot suggestion production based on the jackpot type advance judgment information. It is possible.

So far, based on FIGS. 19 to 22, the types of jackpot random numbers and various pre-determination information, the icon change effect using the pending icon, and the special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestive effect were described, but in order to realize these effects The preliminary determination processing executed by the main CPU 81 will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. Processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to realize these effects will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

[Chance production and suggestive production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the chance effect and suggestive effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the chance effect and the suggestive effect. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability and features of chance effects and suggestive effects.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a chance effect (an example of an expected effect) and a suggestive effect may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbols in the normal game state. The chance effect is a effect that makes the player expect that the win notification effect will be executed. In the present embodiment, the reliability of the big win of the chance production is set to about 25%, and even if the chance production is performed alone, the expectation of the big win can be expected (see FIG. 24). In other words, even if the suggestion effect is not executed after the chance effect, a big hit can be expected. In this way, since the reliability of the big win of the chance production is set to a relatively high value, the player plays the game expecting that the winning notification production will be executed based on the occurrence of the chance production. can enjoy.

The chance effect may be any effect as long as the player can expect that the win notification effect will be executed. !” is displayed on the display screen 70 and the voice of “Chance!” is output from the speaker 38 . In the present embodiment, a case in which there is one type of chance production will be described as an example. Alternatively, one chance effect may be selected and executed.

The suggestive effect is a effect suggesting that the hit notification effect is to be executed, and in the present embodiment, two types of suggestive effects, a low suggestive effect and a high suggestive effect, are prepared (see FIG. 24). Here, the low suggestive effect is a effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed and that the possibility is relatively low. On the other hand, the highly suggestive effect is a effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed and that the possibility is relatively high. That is, when the low suggestive effect and the high suggestive effect are compared, the high suggestive effect has a higher jackpot reliability than the low suggestive effect.

In the present embodiment, as the low-suggestion performance, as illustrated in FIG. 24, a first low-suggestion performance, a second low-suggestion performance, and a third low-suggestion performance are classified into a low-suggestion performance group. Three types of low-suggestion performances are prepared, and when the low-suggestion performance is executed, any one of the three types of low-suggestion performances classified into a low-suggestion performance group is selected and executed. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the first low suggestive performance is set to about 3%, the jackpot reliability of the second low suggestive performance is set to about 5%, and the jackpot reliability of the third low suggestive performance is set to about 7%. there is

The first low-suggestion effect, the second low-suggestion effect, and the third low-suggestion effect in the present embodiment are all configured as a character display effect in which the characters "Expect!" are displayed on the display screen 70. The first low-suggestion effect, the second low-suggestion effect, and the third low-suggestion effect have different character colors. Specifically, the first low-suggestion effect is a character display effect in which the characters "Expect!" This is a display effect, and the third low-suggestive effect is a character display effect in which the characters "Expect!" are displayed in yellow.

It should be noted that the three types of low-suggestion effects illustrated here are merely examples, and the first low-suggestion effect, the second low-suggestion effect, and the third low-suggestion effect are relative in the possibility of execution of the hit notification. Needless to say, other effects other than character display effects may be used as long as they can suggest that the character display is relatively low. Also, the types of low-suggestion effects are not limited to three types, and may be one type, two types, or four types or more.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the highly suggestive effects include a first highly suggestive effect, a second highly suggestive effect, and a third highly suggestive effect, which are classified into a highly suggestive effect group as illustrated in FIG. Three types of highly suggestive performances are prepared, and when the highly suggestive performance is executed, any one of the three types of highly suggestive performances classified into a highly suggestive performance group is selected and executed. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the first highly suggestive performance is set to about 31%, the jackpot reliability of the second highly suggestive performance is set to about 36%, and the jackpot reliability of the third highly suggestive performance is set to about 42%. there is

The 1st high suggestive effect, the 2nd high suggestive effect, and the 3rd high suggestive effect in the present embodiment are all effect images in which a cut-in image showing the characters "great chance!" is being displayed on the display screen 70. These highly suggestive effects have different character colors. Specifically, the 1st high suggesting effect is a cut-in effect in which the letters "great chance!" are displayed in green, and the 2nd high suggestive effect is a cut-in effect in which the letters "great chance!" , and the 3rd high suggesting effect is a cut-in effect in which the characters "great chance!" are displayed in red.

It should be noted that the three types of highly suggestive effects illustrated here are merely examples, and the first highly suggestive effect, the second highly suggestive effect, and the third highly suggestive effect have a relative possibility of execution of the hit notification. Needless to say, other effects other than the cut-in effect may be used as long as they can suggest that the performance is relatively high. Also, the types of highly suggestive effects are not limited to three types, and may be one type, two types, or four types or more.

Regarding such a chance production and a suggestive production, the production progresses in the following flow. First, when the first special symbol determination is executed in the normal game state, the symbol variation for variably displaying the effect symbols is started along with the variably displaying the first special symbol (see FIG. 23(A)). Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the symbol variation is started, the above-described chance effect may be executed (see FIGS. 23A and 23B).

The above-described low-suggestion effect and high-suggestion effect have the following characteristics. That is, each low-suggestion effect classified into the low-suggestion effect group has a feature that there are times when it is combined with the chance effect and times when it is not combined with the chance effect (see FIG. 24). This means that there are times when the low-suggestion effect is executed after the chance effect is executed and when the low-suggestion effect is executed without executing the chance effect.

On the other hand, each highly suggestive effect classified into the highly suggestive effect group has a characteristic that it is not combined with the chance effect (see FIG. 24). That is, when a chance effect occurs during the variable display of a certain first special symbol, the highly suggestive effect is not executed within the same variation, and the highly suggestive effect is the variation of the first special symbol in which the chance effect does not occur. May be executed during display.

Thus, since the low suggestive effect and the highly suggestive effect have the characteristics illustrated in FIG. 24, once the chance effect (see FIG. 23(B)) is executed, the low suggestive effect is executed and then the hit/loss notification effect (hit notification effect or loss notification effect) is executed (see FIGS. 23(B), (C), and (E)), and the low-suggestion effect is not executed. There is a case where a notification effect is executed (see FIGS. 23(B) and (E)). Also, the low-suggestion effect may be executed without executing the chance effect (see FIGS. 23A and 23C).

When the chance effect (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed, the highly suggestive effect may be executed (see FIGS. 23(A) and (D)).

Such a series of performances is controlled by the sub CPU 91, and the sub CPU 91 performs suggestive performance control such that when the chance performance and the suggestive performance are executed, the low suggestive performance is executed without executing the high suggestive performance. is executable.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as is clear from the notation of FIG. There is a case where the production progresses with the second production pattern in which the low-suggestive production is executed without being executed, and the case where the production progresses with the first production pattern is better with the second production pattern. Compared with the case where the effect progresses, there is a feature that the possibility of executing the winning notification effect is high (see FIG. 24). That is, the jackpot reliability when the first low suggestive effect is executed alone is about 3%, the jackpot reliability when the second low suggestive effect is performed alone is about 5%, and the third The jackpot reliability is about 7% when the low-suggestion production is performed alone, and the jackpot reliability is about 7% when any one of these low-suggestion productions is performed after the chance production. 27%.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability of each low suggestive effect classified into the low suggestive effect group is set to a value lower than the jackpot reliability of each highly suggestive effect classified into the high suggestive effect group ( See Figure 24). Therefore, even if the high suggestive performance is executed alone, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the big win, but the low suggestive performance cannot be expected to have the same effect, and the low suggestive performance is executed. As a result, there is a concern that the player's sense of expectation for the performance of the winning notification effect may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the high-suggestion production is not combined with the chance production within the same variation, and the low-suggestion production may be combined after the chance production is executed. ing. In this embodiment, since the reliability of the big hit of the chance performance is set to about 25%, there is a feature that when the low-suggestion performance is executed after the chance performance, the winning notification performance is easily executed after that. For this reason, when the low-suggestion effect is executed alone, it cannot be expected that the hit notification effect will be executed, but if it is combined with the chance effect, it is expected that the win notification effect will be executed. It is possible to give a good impression to the player with regard to the low-suggestion effect.

Therefore, by combining the low suggestive effect with the chance effect instead of combining the high suggestive effect with the chance effect as in the present embodiment, the player can expect the execution of the hit notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the player's expectation for the big win is remarkably lowered by executing the low-suggestion effect.

In this embodiment, after the chance production is executed, the low-suggestion production is executed and the low-suggestion production is not executed. may be reversed, for example, when a low-suggestion production is executed during the variable display of a certain first special symbol, when the chance production is executed and when the chance production is not executed within the same fluctuation. It is also conceivable to adopt a configuration such that there is .

So far, the chance effects and suggestive effects that can be executed in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described. 62, 63 for further details.

[Regarding the production of a wrong notification]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, a description will be given of a feeling of incongruity loss notification effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. Here, FIG. 25 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the incompatibility/failure notification effect A. As shown in FIG. FIG. 26 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the incompatibility/failure notification effect B. As shown in FIG. FIG. 27 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the incompatibility/failure notification effect C. As shown in FIG.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variable performance including a performance of variably displaying the performance symbols accompanying the variable display of the special symbols, and a special symbol performed at the start of the variation of the special symbols accompanying the stop display of the special symbols. It is possible to execute a stop effect of stopping and displaying the effect symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. This stop effect includes a win notification effect (an example of a first stop effect) for notifying that a big win game is to be executed, and a loss notification effect (an example of a second stop effect) for notifying that the big win game is not to be executed. , there is.

By the way, when the game is controlled in the probability variable gaming state (or the time-saving gaming state), the reserved right of the second special symbol determination includes the execution of the "hit notification effect". If it is, it is conceivable to execute an icon change effect to display the reserved icon corresponding to the right of the second special symbol determination in a display mode different from usual.

However, when such an icon change effect is executed, the determination result will be "big hit", or the pending icon corresponding to the right of the second special symbol determination with a high possibility is compared to other pending icons As a result, the player is less likely to pay attention to the variable effects and stop effects corresponding to other pending icons, and as a result, there is concern that the interest in the variable effects and stop effects will decrease. be done.

In addition, when comparing the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state with the normal gaming state, in the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, since it is easy to win the game ball to the second start port 22, the normal game A special symbol variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the state. For this reason, in the variable probability game state and the time saving game state, the execution time of the variable performance tends to be shorter than in the normal game state, so there is a problem that the performance tends to become monotonous.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of these problems, at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, the three performance symbols indicating a failure are simulated to stop, and the second special symbol is displayed. Along with the stop display, the failure notification performance of stopping and displaying these performance symbols predicts that the ``win notification performance'' will be executed when any of the suspended second special symbol determinations is executed. I'm doing it.

The loss notification effect that foretells that the "hit notification effect" will be executed is different from the normal loss notification effect in terms of performance, and as a result, the player feels uncomfortable. Now, the loss notification effect that foretells that the “win notification effect” will be executed will be referred to as the “discomfort loss notification effect”. In this embodiment, three types of discomfort loss notification effect A (see FIG. 25), discomfort loss notification effect B (see FIG. 26), and discomfort loss notification effect C (see FIG. 27) are prepared. ing.

In addition, in the normal game state, in most cases, the production pattern is composed of numbers and characters, whereas in the variable probability game state and the time-saving game state, the production pattern does not have characters and only numbers. The following description will be given by taking as an example the case where it is composed of

(Discomfort loss notification production A)
FIG. 25 illustrates how the odd feeling loss notification effect A is executed when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state (or the time saving game state). When the strange feeling loss notification effect A is executed, the effect progresses in the following flow.

FIG. 25(A) illustrates a state in which three performance symbols representing "126" are actually stopped on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the second special symbol representing "losing". there is In this way, the second special symbol indicating "losing" is stopped and displayed, and a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is required after the three performance symbols indicating "126" are actually stopped. After the lapse of time, the suspended second special symbol determination is executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol is started (see FIG. 25(B)). FIG. 25(B) illustrates a state in which the left pattern row, the middle row of symbols, and the right row of symbols are all scrolled downward.

Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the symbol variation illustrated in FIG. The three performance symbols representing the "835" loose pattern are pseudo-stopped, and immediately after that, as the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, these performance symbols are permanently stopped (Fig. 25 ( C)). This is a normal losing notification effect that is performed in the probability variable gaming state or the time saving gaming state.

Here, at one point in time when the losing notification effect of FIG. 3 reserve, 3 rights are reserved, the judgment result of special figure 2 first reservation and special figure 2 second reservation is "losing", and the judgment result of special figure 2 third reservation is "definite variable jackpot" When the advance determination information indicating that it will be obtained, using the symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 first reservation and the symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 second reservation, the following flow At , the sense of incongruity loss notification effect A is executed.

That is, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the three performance symbols indicating the looseness of "835" are actually stopped along with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating "losing". , the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 2 first reservation is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbols accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (see FIG. 25(D)). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the variable display of the second special pattern corresponding to the special figure 2 first hold ends, for example, the left 4 patterns, the middle character pattern, and the right 9 patterns are simulated at the same time, and immediately after that, the second Along with the stop-display of the losing symbols as the 2 special symbols, the first sense of incongruity losing notification effect A is executed in which these three performance symbols are actually stopped as they are (see FIG. 25(E)). Here, the left four patterns are number patterns consisting of the number "4", the right nine patterns are number patterns consisting of the number "9", and only the middle character patterns are not numbers but specific numbers. It is a character pattern composed of characters.

In the normal loss notification performance, the three performance symbols of the left design, the middle design, and the right design are all numeric designs, whereas in the discomfort loss notification performance A, any one of the three performance designs. Character patterns, not number patterns, are displayed as two effect patterns (medium patterns in the example shown in FIG. 25(E)). In this way, by executing the discomfort loss notification performance A in which the three performance symbols including the character symbols are temporarily stopped and then permanently stopped, the player feels a sense of discomfort and has the effect of making the player pay attention to the variable performance and the stop performance. can be expected.

A losing design is stopped and displayed as a second special design corresponding to the special design 2 first reservation, and a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0 .5 seconds) has passed, the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 2 second suspension is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (Fig. 25 (F) reference). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the end of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 second hold, for example, the left character symbol, the middle 6 symbols, and the right 1 symbol are simulated at the same time, and immediately after that, the second Along with the stopped display of the lost symbols as the 2 special symbols, the second sense of incongruity lost notification effect A is executed in which the three performance symbols are actually stopped as they are (see FIG. 25(G)). Here, the middle 6 symbols are numerical symbols composed of the number "6", the right 1 symbol is a numerical symbol composed of the number "1", and only the left character symbol is not a number but a specific number. It is a character pattern composed of characters.

In this second discomfort loss notification effect A (see FIG. 25(G)), three production patterns including a character pattern are displayed in the same way as the first discomfort loss notification effect A (see FIG. 25(E)). Therefore, an effect similar to that of the first discomfort/loss notification effect A can be expected.

As the second special symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 second hold, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0 5 seconds), the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 2 third suspension is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (Fig. 25 (H) reference). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 25(B).

Here, since the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 2 third reservation is "probability variation jackpot", immediately before the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 third reservation ends Then, for example, three production patterns showing double eyes of "777" are simulated and stopped at the same time. A hit notification effect is executed in which the effect symbol is actually stopped as it is (see FIG. 25 (I)).

In the example shown in FIG. 25, the stop position of the character pattern is different between the first and the second discomfort and loss notification effects A, but for example, only the middle pattern is the character pattern. The display position of the character pattern may be fixed, such as being displayed as . Further, for example, three performance patterns including one character pattern are displayed in the first discomfort loss notification performance A, and three performance patterns including two character symbols are displayed in the second discomfort loss notification performance A. Thus, the number of character patterns may be increased each time the incongruity loss notification effect A is executed.

So far, with reference to FIG. 25, the case where the discomfort loss notification effect A is executed twice has been described as an example, but the number of times the discomfort loss notification effect A is executed is variable, and the winning notification effect is executed. It is also possible to execute one or three times of discomfort loss notification effect A by using the symbol variation performed before the symbol variation (here, variation corresponding to the special figure 2 third reservation). When executing the discomfort loss notification effect A only once, for example, in the scene where the effect in FIG. A configuration such as execution is conceivable.

In this way, one or a plurality of unfamiliarity loss notification performances A are executed to foretell that the reserved second special pattern determination right includes the one that will be determined as a "big hit". By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the big win by making the player pay attention to the variable effect and the stop effect while making the player feel uncomfortable.

(Discomfort loss notification production B)
FIG. 26 illustrates how the odd feeling loss notification effect B is executed when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state (or the time saving game state). When the strange feeling loss notification effect B is executed, the effect progresses in the following flow.

FIG. 26(A) exemplifies the state immediately after the start of the variable display of the performance symbols (the scroll display of the three symbol rows) accompanying the start of the variable display of the second special symbols. Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the symbol variation illustrated in FIG. The three performance patterns showing the ``152'' loose pattern are pseudo-stopped, and immediately after that, the loss pattern is stop-displayed as the second special pattern. An effect is executed (see FIG. 26(B)).

Here, at one point in time when the losing notification effect of FIG. It is reserved, the judgment result of the special figure 2 first reservation is "losing", and the judgment result of the special figure 2 second reservation is "normal jackpot" When the pre-determination information is obtained, Using the symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 first reservation, the discomfort loss notification effect B is executed in the following flow.

That is, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the three performance symbols indicating the loose pattern of "152" are actually stopped along with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating "losing". , the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 2 first reservation is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbols accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (see FIG. 26(C)). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the end of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 first reservation, for example, the left 9 symbols, the middle 7 symbols, and the right 6 symbols are simulated at the same time, and immediately after that, the second Along with the stop-display of the lost symbols as the 2 special symbols, a sense of incongruity loss notification performance B in which these three performance symbols are actually stopped is executed (see FIG. 26(D)). Here, the 9 patterns on the left are number patterns composed of the number "9", the middle 7 patterns are number patterns composed of the number "7", and the right 6 patterns are composed of the number "9". It is a numerical pattern. As described above, these three performance symbols are all numeric symbols, but the middle seven symbols are pseudo-continuous symbols for informing execution of pseudo-continuous performance, as described above with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 9(D) to (E) and FIGS. 9(G) to (H), when the middle seven symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop manner, a pseudo-continuous effect occurs and three symbol rows are scrolled. Since the display is restarted, basically, there is a feature that the middle 7 symbols are not actually stopped.

On the other hand, in the sense of incompatibility loss notification performance B, basically, three performance symbols including the middle 7 symbols, which are not actually stopped, are pseudo-stopped and then permanently stopped. It is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable that the 7 symbols are actually stopped while they should not be actually stopped, and to pay attention to the variable effect and the stop effect.

A losing design is stopped and displayed as a second special design corresponding to the special design 2 first reservation, and a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0 5 seconds), the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 2 second suspension is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (Fig. 26 (E) reference). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the end of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 second reservation, for example, for example, the three effect symbols showing double eyes of "444" are simulated and stopped at the same time Immediately after that, At the same time, as the jackpot symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, a winning notification effect is executed in which these three effect symbols are actually stopped as they are (see FIG. 26(F)).

In addition, here, the case of executing the strange feeling loss notification effect B only once and then executing the winning notification effect has been described as an example, but the strange feeling loss notification effect B is executed a plurality of times (for example, twice or three times). After that, it is also possible to execute the winning notification effect.

In this way, one or a plurality of times of uncomfortable feeling loss notification performance B is executed to announce that the reserved second special symbol determination right includes the one that will be determined as a "big hit". By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the big win by making the player pay attention to the variable effect and the stop effect while making the player feel uncomfortable.

(Discomfort loss notification production C)
FIG. 27 illustrates how the odd feeling loss notification effect C is executed when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state (or the time saving game state). When the unnatural feeling loss notification effect C is executed, the effect progresses in the following flow.

FIG. 27(A) illustrates a state in which three performance symbols representing "462" are actually stopped on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the second special symbol representing "losing". there is Here, at one point in time when the losing notification effect of FIG. Four rights are reserved, 3 reservations, special 2 4th reservations, and the judgment result of 3 reservations from special 2 1st reservation to special 2nd 3rd reservation is "losing", special 2nd reservation When the preliminary determination information indicating that the determination result of 4 suspension is "probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 first suspension and the symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 second suspension And, using the symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 third reservation, the discomfort loss notification effect C is executed in the following flow.

That is, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the three performance symbols indicating the looseness of "462" are actually stopped along with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating "losing". , the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 2 first reservation is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbols accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (see FIG. 27(B)). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 first reservation ends, for example, the left 1 symbol, the middle 3 symbols, and the right 9 symbols are simulated at the same time, and immediately after that, the second Along with the stopped display of the lost symbols as the 2 special symbols, the first sense of incongruity lost notification effect C is executed in which the three performance symbols are actually stopped as they are (see FIG. 27(C)).

Here, the 1 pattern on the left, the 3 patterns in the middle, and the 9 patterns on the right are all number patterns, but as is clear from the comparison of FIGS. While the three performance patterns are stopped and displayed so as to line up on the effective line, in the discomfort loss notification performance C, at least one of the three performance patterns is positioned at a different position from the effective line. (See FIG. 27(C)). In FIG. 27(C), only the right 9 symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line, and the left 1 symbol and the middle 3 symbols are displayed at positions different from the active line (here, positions below the active line). A stopped display state is illustrated.

Thus, in the sense of incongruity loss notification performance C, since at least one of the three performance symbols is stopped and displayed at a position different from the effective line, the player feels a sense of incongruity, and the variation performance is provided. And it is possible to focus on the stop effect.

A losing design is stopped and displayed as a second special design corresponding to the special design 2 first reservation, and a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0 5 seconds) has passed, the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 2 second suspension is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (Fig. 27 (D) reference).

Next, just before the end of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 second reservation, for example, the left 5 symbols, the middle 5 symbols, and the right 4 symbols are simulated at the same time, and immediately after that, the second Along with the stop-display of the losing symbols as the 2 special symbols, the second sense of incongruity losing notification performance C is executed in which these three performance symbols are actually stopped as they are (see FIG. 27(E)). In the second uncomfortable loss notification effect C, the stop display positions of the left and right symbols are displaced from the effective line in the same way as the first uncomfortable loss notification effect C, and it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable. is.

A losing design is stopped and displayed as a second special design corresponding to the special design 2 second reservation, and a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0 5 seconds), the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 2 third suspension is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (Fig. 27 (F) reference).

Next, just before the end of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 third reserve, for example, the left 6 symbols, the middle 6 symbols, and the right 6 symbols are simulated at the same time, and immediately after that, the second Along with the stopped display of the lost symbols as the 2 special symbols, the third sense of incongruity lost notification effect C is executed in which the three performance symbols are actually stopped as they are (see FIG. 27(G)). In the third discomfort loss notification effect C, the stop display positions of the left pattern and the right symbol are displaced from the effective line as in the first discomfort loss notification effect C and the second discomfort loss notification effect C, and the game is played. It can make people feel uncomfortable. In addition, in the third sense of incongruity loss notification effect C, the three performance patterns showing the same number ("6" in this case) are staggered (not lined up in a straight line) and displayed stopped, so that the player feels a sense of incongruity. can be increased.

As the second special symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 third reservation, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0 5 seconds), the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special symbol 2 fourth suspension is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (Fig. 27 (H) reference).

Here, since the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the special figure 2 fourth reservation is "probability variation jackpot", just before the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 fourth reservation ends Then, for example, three production patterns showing double eyes of "777" are simulated and stopped at the same time. A hit notification effect is executed in which the effect symbol is actually stopped as it is (see FIG. 27 (I)).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 27, in the three times of incongruity loss notification effect C, the direction of deviation of the performance symbols is the same, but the direction of deviation of the performance symbols may be made different from each other. As another way of shifting the performance patterns, for example, the left pattern and the middle pattern are stopped and displayed on the effective line, and only the right pattern is stopped and displayed at a position shifted from the effective line.

In addition, the first discomfort loss notification effect C (see FIG. 27 (C)), the second discomfort loss notification effect C (see FIG. 27 (E)), and the third discomfort loss notification effect C (see FIG. 27 ( G)) and , the combinations of numbers represented by the three effect symbols are different from each other, but these numbers may be combined in common.

In addition, FIG. 27(G) illustrates how three even symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot of "666" are stopped and displayed by the last third unfamiliarity loss notification effect C. As shown in FIG. 27 (I), when the three performance symbols indicating the double number of "777" for informing the probability variable jackpot are stopped and displayed, the double number of "777" is also displayed in the third discomfort loss notification production C. You may make it stop-display by shifting the three production|presentation patterns which show .

So far, with reference to FIG. 27, the case where the discomfort loss notification effect C is executed three times has been described as an example, but the number of times the discomfort loss notification effect C is executed is variable, and the winning notification effect is executed. It is also possible to execute the discomfort loss notification effect B once or twice by using the symbol variation performed before the symbol variation (here, variation corresponding to the special figure 2 fourth reservation).

In this way, one or a plurality of unfamiliarity loss notification performances C are executed to foretell that the reserved second special pattern determination right includes the one that will be determined as a "big hit". By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the big win by making the player pay attention to the variable effect and the stop effect while making the player feel uncomfortable.

[First change effect and stage-related effect]
Next, referring to FIGS. 28 and 29, the first change effect (an example of the change effect) and the step-related effect (an example of the related effect) executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 28 is a screen diagram for explaining the flow of the first change effect and the stage-related effect. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability and features of the first change effect and the stage-related effect. In addition, in FIG. 28, for convenience of explanation, the effect symbol that is variably displayed with the variably displayed first special symbol, the icon that suggests that the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and the first special symbol determination is omitted from the illustration of the pending icon suggesting that the rights of

(About three stage production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first change effect may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbols in the normal game state. This first change effect is a effect that can be changed stepwise to any one of a plurality of stages. In this embodiment, the upper limit stage of the first change effect is set to the third stage. There is a case where the first change effect ends in the third stage. Specifically, when the first change effect ends in the first stage, the first stage effect (see FIG. 28A) is executed first, and this first stage effect is replaced by the second stage effect (see FIG. 28). (C) reference), the first change effect ends. When the first change effect ends in the second stage, after changing from the first stage effect to the second stage effect, this second stage effect changes to the third stage effect (see FIG. 28(E)). Without this, the first change effect ends. When the first change performance ends at the third stage, which is the upper limit stage, the stage performance changes in order of the first stage performance, the second stage performance, and the third stage performance, and the first change performance ends. Become.

(About the two stage-related effects)
It should be noted that when the first change production is executed, in which one of a plurality of stages (three stages of the first stage to the third stage in this embodiment) is the final stage, the relationship related to the production of the final stage A performance is performed. Specifically, when the first change effect ends in the second stage, the second stage related effect (see FIG. 28(D)) is executed following the second stage effect. That is, when the first change effect ends in the second stage, as illustrated in FIGS. The production progresses in the order of production. Also, when the first change effect ends in the third stage, the third stage related effect (see FIG. 28(F)) is executed following the third stage effect. That is, when the first change effect ends in the third stage, as illustrated in FIGS. The production progresses in the order of the third stage production and the third stage related production. On the other hand, when the first change effect ends in the first stage, the stage-related effect is not executed following the first stage effect.

<First change effect that ends in the first stage>
In the present embodiment, the first stage effect (see FIG. 28A) is configured as a display effect in which a first stage effect image is displayed on the display screen 70, showing a single character wearing a blue aura. It is As illustrated in FIG. 29, the jackpot reliability of the first change effect is set to about 1% at the time when such a first stage effect is being executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, no step-related effect is prepared for the first stage of the first change effect. Since the effect does not change to the second stage effect, the reliability of the big win remains about 1%. For this reason, when the first change effect in which the first stage is the final stage is executed, after the first stage effect is executed, the ready-to-win effect is usually not executed, and the three effects showing the loose eyes are displayed. After the symbols are pseudo-stopped, a loss notification effect is executed (see FIGS. 28A and 28B).

However, when the first change effect ends with the first stage effect, the reach effect is not executed at all, and after the first change effect ends with the first stage effect, for example, normal reach is executed. Then, in normal reach, a winning notification effect (or a losing notification effect) may be executed. Also, although the possibility is low, the reach effect develops from the normal reach to another reach effect, and the hit notification effect (or the loss notification effect) may be executed in the developed reach effect.

In the first-stage effect, the character is displayed, but the lines uttered by the character are displayed on the display screen 70 or the voice representing the lines is displayed, as in the second-stage related effect image and the third-stage related effect image, which will be described later. is not output from the speaker 38. This is the same for the second stage effect and the third stage effect, which will be described later.

Here, the first stage effect executed when the first change effect ends in the first stage has been described. Not limited to this, the same process is performed when the first change effect ends in the second stage, or when the first change effect ends in the third stage, which is the upper limit stage.

<First change effect that ends in the second stage>
In the first change production that ends in the second stage, as illustrated in FIGS. 28A, 28C, and 28D, the first stage production changes to the second stage production, and then the second The second stage related performance is executed following the second stage performance without changing the stage performance to the third stage performance.

In the present embodiment, the second stage effect (see FIG. 28(C)) is configured as a display effect in which a second stage effect image is displayed on the display screen 70 showing two characters wearing a green aura. It is When changing from the first-stage performance to the second-stage performance, at the end of the first-stage performance, a rotation change performance is executed to change the first-stage performance image to the second-stage performance image while rotating the first-stage performance image clockwise. . This rotation change performance is a performance that functions as a next stage development performance for developing the first change performance from the first stage to the second stage, and although not shown in the figure, the rotation change performance is executed. , the number of characters represented by the first-stage effect image increases from one to two, and the color of the aura worn by the character changes from blue to green in the process of rotating the first-stage effect image 360 degrees clockwise. (See FIGS. 28A and 28C). By executing the rotation change effect, a second stage effect image larger than the first stage effect image is displayed.

Although not shown in the figure, if the first change effect does not progress from the first stage to the second stage, following the first stage effect, a failure effect in which the rotation change effect fails is executed. After that, the above-described loss notification effect is executed based on FIG. 28(B). The failure effect of the rotation change effect here is realized by reproducing the moving image for realizing the rotation change effect to the middle, and then reproducing the moving image in reverse.

Returning to the explanation when the rotation change effect is executed, as is clear from the descriptions in FIGS. 28A and 28C, when the first stage effect image changes to the second stage effect image, The number of characters represented increases from one to two, and the color of the aura that the characters wear changes from blue to green. Then, a second stage effect image is displayed on the display screen 70, at least a portion of which is different from the first stage effect image and which is larger than the first stage effect image. Therefore, when the player sees that the first stage effect image has changed to the second stage effect image, the player can easily recognize that the first change effect has developed from the first stage to the second stage. Also, it is possible to easily recognize that the reliability of the big win of the first change effect has increased due to the development from the first stage to the second stage.

In the present embodiment, the reliability of the big win of the first change effect is set to approximately 13% at the time when the second stage effect is being executed (see FIG. 29). After such a second-stage production is executed, following the second-stage production, a third-stage production (see FIG. 28(E)) or a second-stage related production (see FIG. 28(D)) is executed. be done.

When the first change effect does not progress to the third stage and the second stage becomes the final stage, the second stage related effect is executed following the second stage effect (FIGS. 28(C) and (D) reference). The second-stage related effect in the present embodiment is a second-stage effect image that shows the same two characters as those represented by the second-stage effect image uttering the line "Battle is near!" is configured as an effect in which a different second stage related effect image is displayed on the display screen 70 on the full screen, and along with this, a voice representing the line "Battle is near!" is output from the speaker 38. In this way, in the second-stage related production, characters that are common to the second-stage production (second-stage production), which is the final stage of the first change production, are represented. It is a production to do. Therefore, even if the second-stage performance changes to the second-stage related performance, the continuity of the performance is not impaired, and a high performance effect is obtained by the synergistic effect of the second-stage performance and the second-stage related performance. It is possible.

Here, when comparing the second stage effect image (see FIG. 28(C)) and the second stage related effect image (see FIG. 28(D)), there is the following relationship between them. . That is, these effect images are common in that the same two characters represented by the second stage effect images are displayed by the second stage related effect images. On the other hand, in the second stage related effect image, the two characters are displayed in a larger size than in the second stage effect image, and these effect images are different from each other. In addition, while the second stage effect image is displayed in a partial area (central area in this embodiment) of the display screen 70, the second stage related effect image is displayed in the entire display screen 70 ( The display areas of these effect images are different from each other. Further, these effect images are different from each other in that the dialogue of the character is displayed on the display screen 70 in the second stage related effect image, whereas the dialogue of the character is not displayed in the second stage effect image. ing. In addition, the auras of two characters are displayed in the second-stage effect image, whereas the auras of these two characters are not displayed in the second-stage related effect image. are different from each other.

In this way, the second-stage related effect image, which is common to the second-stage effect image in that two characters are displayed and has some differences in other respects, includes two characters in this embodiment. Various display modes are available. Therefore, when the second stage is the final stage of the first change effect, as illustrated in FIGS. There is a time when a two-stage related effect is executed and a time when a second-stage related effect is executed in which the characters "battle is near!" are displayed in red. In the present embodiment, the reliability of the second-stage related effect displaying blue characters is set to about 9%, and the reliability of the second-stage related effect displaying red characters is set to about 18%. .

Therefore, when the second step is the final step of the first change effect, the player executes the second step related effect of displaying red characters instead of the second step related effect of displaying blue characters. You can enjoy the game while looking forward to it.

Incidentally, the second stage related effect in the present embodiment has a function as an SP development suggesting effect (see FIG. 28(D)) that suggests development to SP reach (see FIG. 8(J)). The SP reach in the present embodiment is configured as a reach performance in which a win or loss is announced by winning or losing a battle between a main character and an enemy character (one of enemy characters A to C). On the other hand, in the second-stage related production, one of the two characters displayed by the second-stage related production is the main character appearing in the SP reach. The line "Battle is near!" is displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize, based on the second stage related effect, that the SP reach will develop after the second stage related effect ends.

So far, when the first change effect ends in the second step, the second step related effect executed subsequent to the second step effect has been described. , such a step-related effect is not executed, and even if the first change effect ends at the upper limit of the third stage, the step-related effect is executed, but this step-related effect (described later) The third-stage related effect: see FIG. 28(F)) is a different effect from the second-stage related effect. In this way, the second stage related effect is not executed when the first change effect ends in the first stage or the third stage, but is executed only when the first change effect ends in the second stage. Since it is a production, it can be said that it is a production specific to the second stage.

<First change effect that ends in the third stage>
In the first change production that ends in the third stage, as illustrated in FIGS. 28(A), (C), (E), and (F), the first stage production changes to the second stage production, The 2nd stage performance changes to the 3rd stage performance, and the 3rd stage related performance is executed following the 3rd stage performance.

Here, the first stage effect and the second stage effect are as described above. In the present embodiment, the third stage effect (see FIG. 28(E)) is configured as a display effect in which a third stage effect image is displayed on the display screen 70, showing three characters wearing red auras. It is The rotation change effect performed when the first stage effect changes to the second stage effect is as described above. The first-stage effect changes to the second-stage effect, and at the end of the second-stage effect, a rotation change effect is executed in which the second-stage effect image is rotated clockwise and changed to the third-stage effect image. be. This rotation change performance is a performance that functions as a next stage development performance for developing the first change performance from the second stage to the third stage, and although not shown in the figure, the rotation change performance is executed. , the number of characters represented by the second-stage effect image increases from two to three, and the color of the aura that the character wears changes from green to red in the process of rotating the second-stage effect image 360 degrees clockwise. (See FIGS. 28C and 28E). By executing the rotation change effect, the third stage effect image larger than the second stage effect image is displayed.

As is clear from the descriptions in FIGS. 28C and 28E, when the second stage effect image changes to the third stage effect image, the number of characters represented by the stage effect image increases from two to three. The color of the character's aura changes from green to red. Then, a third stage effect image is displayed on the display screen 70, at least a portion of which is different from that of the second stage effect image, and which is larger than the second stage effect image. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the first change performance has progressed from the second stage to the upper limit third stage by seeing that the second stage performance image has changed to the third stage performance image. , and it is possible to easily recognize that the reliability of the big win of the first change effect is further increased by developing from the second stage to the third stage.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the first change effect is set to approximately 27% at the time when the third stage effect is being executed (see FIG. 29). After such a third stage effect is executed, since the third stage is the upper limit stage, the rotation change effect is not performed, and following the third stage effect, the third stage related effect (Fig. (F)) is executed.

When the first change effect develops to the upper limit of the third stage, the third stage related effect is executed following the third stage effect (see FIGS. 28(E) and (F)). The third-stage related effect in the present embodiment is a third-stage effect image showing how the same three characters as those represented by the third-stage effect image utter the line "It's the final battle!" is configured as an effect in which a different third-stage related effect image is displayed on the display screen 70 on the full screen, and along with this, a voice representing the line "It's the final battle!" is output from the speaker 38. In this way, in the third-stage related production, characters that are common to the third-stage production (third-stage production), which is the final stage of the first change production, are represented. It is a production to do. Therefore, even if the third-stage performance changes to the third-stage related performance, the continuity of the performance is not impaired, and a high performance effect is obtained by the synergistic effect of the third-stage performance and the third-stage related performance. It is possible.

Here, when the third stage effect image (see FIG. 28(E)) and the third stage related effect image (see FIG. 28(F)) are compared, there is the following relationship between them. . That is, these effect images are common in that the same three characters represented by the third stage effect images are displayed by the third stage related effect images. On the other hand, the third stage related effect images are different from each other in that the three characters are displayed larger than the third stage effect images. Also, while the third stage effect image is displayed in a partial area of the display screen 70, the third stage related effect image is displayed over the entire display screen 70 (full screen display). Moreover, the display areas of these effect images are different from each other. Further, these effect images are different from each other in that the dialogue of the character is displayed on the display screen 70 in the third stage related effect image, whereas the dialogue of the character is not displayed in the third stage effect image. ing. In addition, the auras of the three characters are displayed in the third stage effect image, whereas the auras of these three characters are not displayed in the third stage related effect image. are different from each other.

In this way, the third-stage related effect image, which is common to the third-stage effect image in that three characters are displayed and has some differences in other respects, includes two characters in this embodiment. Various display modes are available. Therefore, when the third stage is the final stage of the first change effect, as illustrated in FIGS. There is a time when the three-stage related effect is executed and a time when the third-stage related effect is executed in which the characters "It's the final battle!!" are displayed in gold. In the present embodiment, the reliability of the third-stage related effect displaying red characters is set to about 26%, and the reliability of the third-stage related effect displaying gold characters is set to about 41%. .

Therefore, when the third stage is the final stage of the first change effect, the player executes the third stage related effect of displaying gold characters instead of the third stage related effect of displaying red characters. You can enjoy the game while looking forward to it.

Incidentally, the third stage related effect in the present embodiment has a function as an SPSP development suggesting effect (see FIG. 28(F)) that suggests development to SPSP reach (see FIG. 8(K)). The SPSP reach in the present embodiment is configured as a reach performance in which a win or loss is announced by winning or losing a battle between a main character and an enemy character (one of enemy characters D to F). On the other hand, in the third-stage related production, one of the three characters displayed by the third-stage related production is the main character appearing in the SPSP reach. The line "It's the final battle !!" is displayed. Therefore, based on the third stage related effect, the player can easily recognize that the SPSP reach will develop after the third stage related effect ends.

So far, when the first change effect ends at the upper limit of the third stage, the third stage related effect that is executed following the third stage effect has been described. As is clear from the comparison of D) and (F), the effect is different from the above-described second stage related effect. The third stage related performance is a performance that is not executed when the first change performance ends in the first stage or the second stage, but is executed only when the first change performance ends in the third stage. Therefore, it can be said that the performance is unique to the third stage.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first change effect in which one of the three stages is the final stage is executed, a stage-related effect unique to the final stage related to the final stage effect is executed. be. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the first change effect has ended at a certain stage based on the stage-related effect, and the synergistic effect of the final stage effect and the stage-related effect , it is possible to execute a highly entertaining production.

Also, in the stage-related effect, although a different effect image is displayed from the effect in the final stage, the same display object (character in this embodiment) as the display object (character in this embodiment) displayed in the final stage is displayed. Therefore, the continuity between the final-stage production and the stage-related production is improved, and it is possible to execute the final-stage production and the stage-related production without discomfort.

So far, the first change effect and the related effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described. I will elaborate.

(Modified example of first change effect and related effect)
The following configuration may be adopted for the first change effect and the related effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, a case where no related effect is prepared for the first stage effect will be described as an example. (Different from the 2nd stage related production and the 3rd stage related production) followed by the 1st stage related production. A configuration capable of executing three types of stage-related effects (first-stage related effects, second-stage related effects, and third-stage related effects) may be employed. When adopting such a configuration, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. It is conceivable to execute a first-stage related effect to display any of the appearing anime characters C, and to suggest development to one of the character reach by the first-stage related effect.

In this way, in the step-related effect suggesting the development to the ready-to-reach effect, the stage-related effect image representing the enemy character appearing in the suggested ready-to-reach effect is displayed instead of the main character appearing in the suggested ready-to-reach effect. good too.

Also, up to this point, when the development to character reach is suggested by the first stage related production, the development to SP reach is suggested by the second stage related production, and the development to SP reach is suggested by the second stage related production. , but the effects suggested by these stage-related effects are not limited to the ready-to-win effects, and needless to say, other effects such as group announcements, pseudo-continuous effects, and cut-ins may be used. In another embodiment, while suggesting the degree of reliability of the jackpot, a step-related effect may be performed that does not have the function of suggesting that another effect will be executed. .

Further, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 28A, 28C, and 28E, the display area of the staged effect image increases each time the stage of the first change effect progresses. However, in other embodiments, the display area of the stage effect image becomes smaller as the stage progresses, or the display area is reduced only by changing the display content of the stage effect image even if the stage progresses. A configuration in which the width does not change may be adopted.

Also, in this embodiment, the case where the number of characters indicated by the stage effect image increases as the stage progresses will be described as an example, but the number of characters may be fixed. For example, when the number of characters is fixed at one, the character α is displayed in the first stage presentation, the character β is displayed in the second stage presentation, and the character γ is displayed in the third stage presentation. It is conceivable to employ a configuration in which the number of characters displayed in each stage of production is the same, and the types of characters are changed. Also, for example, the character α is displayed in a first size in the first stage presentation, the character α is similarly displayed in a second size larger than the first size in the second stage presentation, and the third stage presentation is performed. Similarly, the character α is displayed in a third size that is larger than the second size. It is also conceivable to employ a configuration in which the number is fixed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the display object displayed in each stage of production is a character will be described as an example. However, the display object is not limited to the character. It can be an object.

In this embodiment, a case where both the stage effect image and the stage-related effect image are color images will be described as an example. A configuration such as being an image may be adopted. Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which a low-brightness image is used as the step effect image, and a high-brightness image is used as the step-related effect image. By adopting such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that the final stage effect of the first change effect has ended and the transition to the stage-related effect specific to the final stage has been made.

[Omen production and second change production]
Next, referring to FIGS. 30 to 35, the precursor effect and the second change effect (an example of the change effect) executed in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the precursor effect and the second change effect. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the big win reliability of the second change effect and the sign effect. FIG. 32 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the precursor effect when the second change effect is not executed. FIG. 33 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the precursor effect and the second change effect that ends in the second stage. 34 and 35 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the second change effect that ends in the third stage of the precursor effect and the upper limit.

In addition, in FIGS. 32 to 34, for convenience of explanation, the effect symbol that is variably displayed along with the variability display of the first special symbol, the icon that suggests that the variability display of the first special symbol is being performed, the first Illustration of a pending icon suggesting that the right of special symbol determination is reserved is omitted. Also, in FIG. 35, illustration of the icon suggesting that the first special symbol is being variably displayed and the reserved icon suggesting that the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved are omitted.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, as illustrated in FIG. 30, when the second change effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed, There are a case where the second change performance is not executed after the precursor performance is executed and a case where the second change performance is executed without the precursor performance being executed.

Here, the second change effect is a change effect that can be changed in stages up to any stage below a predetermined stage. In this embodiment, the predetermined stage is set to three stages, and when the second change effect is executed, the second change effect ends at the first stage without changing from the first stage to the second stage. When the second change effect changes from the first step to the second step and ends at the second step without changing to the third step, and when the second change effect changes from the first step to the second step. , change in order of the third stage, and end at the third stage.

The portent effect is a portent effect of the second change effect. Here, the "foreshadow" means that after the precursor effect is performed, the change effect is likely to be performed, and the precursor effect is a precursor of the change effect. This portent effect is a effect suggesting that the second change effect may be executed, and during the variable display of a certain first special symbol in the normal game state, the second change is performed after the portent effect is executed. There is a time when the performance is executed and a time when the second change performance is not executed after the premonition performance is executed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, the precursor effect and the second change effect are executed in the following flow. In the normal game state, when the first special symbol determination is executed by the main CPU 81 in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 21, the variation including information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. A start command is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90 executes and controls the precursor effect and the second change effect based on the received variation start command.

When the first special symbol determination is executed in the normal game state, the variation effect including the effect of variably displaying the effect symbol is started along with the start of the variation of the first special symbol (see FIG. 30(A)). Here, when the sub CPU 91 determines not to execute the predictive effect based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination by the main CPU 81 at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the predictive effect is executed. 30 (A) → (F) in FIG. 30). It should be noted that not only the precursor effect, but also the second change effect may not be executed.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the precursor effect will be executed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol this time, the effect progresses in the following flow. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 30, the indication effect in this embodiment includes a chance ticket acquisition effect (see FIG. 30B), a ticket increase/decrease effect (see FIG. 30C), and a ticket reversal effect (see FIG. 30 (D)) and a judgment effect (see FIG. 30 (E)).

Here, the chance ticket acquisition effect is a display effect of displaying on the display screen 70 how a chance ticket representing the word "chance" (hereinafter abbreviated as "ticket") is acquired (for example, FIG. 32 ( C) to (D)). In this chance ticket acquisition effect, it is possible to acquire up to 4 tickets, and when the chance ticket acquisition effect is executed, it represents the state of acquiring 1 ticket, and the state of acquiring 2 tickets. When the chance ticket acquisition effect is executed, when the chance ticket acquisition effect representing the acquisition of 3 tickets is executed, and when the chance ticket acquisition effect representing the acquisition of 4 tickets is executed. There are times.

FIGS. 32(C)-(D) exemplify how a chance ticket win effect showing how two tickets are won is executed, and FIGS. 33(A)-(B), which will be described in detail later. 34(A) and 34(B) exemplify how a chance ticket acquisition effect is executed to represent the acquisition of three tickets.

The ticket increase/decrease effect (see FIG. 30(C)) is an effect for increasing or decreasing the number of tickets acquired by the chance ticket acquisition effect. For example, FIGS. 32(D) to 32(F) illustrate how a ticket increase/decrease effect is executed in which two tickets acquired by the chance ticket acquisition effect are reduced to one. Also, FIGS. 33B to 33D illustrate how the ticket increase/decrease effect is executed in which the three tickets acquired by the chance ticket acquisition effect are reduced to two. Also, FIGS. 34B to 34D illustrate how the ticket increase/decrease effect is executed in which the three tickets obtained by the chance ticket acquisition effect are increased to four.

The minimum number of tickets before the ticket increase/decrease effect is executed is one and the maximum number is four. Also, the minimum number of tickets immediately after such a ticket increase/decrease effect is executed is one, and the maximum number is four. Also, although not shown in the figure, there are cases where the number of tickets does not increase or decrease as a result of the execution of the ticket increase/decrease effect.

The ticket reversal effect (see FIG. 30(D)) is a effect of reversing the front and back of the ticket displayed on the display screen 70 as a result of the ticket increase/decrease effect. The judge effect (see FIG. 30(E)) determines whether or not the second change effect is executed based on the result of the ticket reversal effect, and if the second change effect is executed, what the second change effect is. It is a production that informs you whether it will change to the stage.

The ticket displayed on the display screen 70 during the prognostic effect has the characters "Chance" written on its front surface (see, for example, FIGS. 32C to 32F), and "O" or "X" on its back surface. (See, for example, FIGS. 32(G) and 33(E)). In the sign effect in the present embodiment, when the second change effect is to be executed according to the total number of "O" displayed on the display screen 70 as a result of the ticket reversal effect, the second change effect is executed. It is notified to what stage the performance changes. For example, in the ticket reversal effect illustrated in FIG. 32(G), the total number of “O” displayed on the display screen 70 is zero, so the second change effect changes to the zero stage, that is, , it is notified that the second change effect is not executed. Further, for example, in the ticket reversal effect illustrated in FIG. is notified that the second change effect changes up to the second stage.

Then, in the judgment effect following such a ticket reversal effect, whether or not the second change effect is executed based on the result of the ticket reversal effect, and if the second change effect is executed, the second change effect is performed. It is notified to what stage the changes to. This judge effect includes a "success effect" for notifying that the second change effect is executed, and a "failure effect" for notifying that the second change effect is not executed. Here, when the success effect is executed, the second change effect that changes to the stage indicated by the final total number of 0 is executed, and conversely, when the failure effect is executed, the final Even if the total number of typical 0 is 1 or more, the second change effect is not executed. Such ticket reversal effect and judge effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 32-34.

Returning to the description of FIG. 30, when the second change effect is executed, first, the first stage effect (first stage effect) constituting the second change effect is executed (see FIG. 30 (F) ). Here, if the final stage of the second change effect this time is the first stage, following the first stage effect, the first stage end effect for notifying that the second change effect ends in the first stage is performed. is executed (see FIGS. 30(F) and (G)).

On the other hand, if the final stage of the second change production this time is the second stage or later, that is, if the final stage of the second change production this time is the second stage or the third stage, the first stage production Subsequently, a second stage effect (second stage effect) is executed (see FIGS. 30(F) and (H)). Here, if the final stage of the second change effect this time is the second stage, following the second stage effect, a second stage end effect for notifying that the second change effect ends in the second stage is performed. (See FIGS. 30(H) and (I)).

Further, when the final stage of the second change production this time is the third stage, the third stage production (third stage production) is executed following the second stage production (Fig. 30 (H) and (J)). In the present embodiment, the third stage effect is the upper limit stage effect, so following the third stage effect, the third stage end notifies that the second change effect ends at the third stage, which is the upper limit stage. An effect is executed (see FIGS. 30(J) and (K)).

Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, the second change effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed, or the precursor effect is executed. 2nd change production may be executed without doing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when both the precursor effect and the second change effect are executed, both of these effects are executed during one variation display of the first special symbol in the normal game state. An example will be explained. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol in which the second change effect is executed is the variation, during the variation display of the first special symbol performed before the variation , it may be configured to execute the above-described portent effect. For example, based on the result of the preliminary determination process related to the right to determine the first special symbol performed at the start of the variation display (the variation) of the first special symbol in which the second change effect is executed, the effect pattern of the precursor effect is changed. It is conceivable to perform effect control such as setting and executing an omen effect based on the setting.

(Jackpot reliability of the second change effect)
As illustrated in FIG. 31 (A), the second change production jackpot reliability in which the first stage is the final stage is set to about 3%, and the second change production jackpot in which the second stage is the final stage The reliability is set to about 9%, and the reliability of the big hit of the second change production whose final stage is the third upper limit stage is set to about 17%. Thus, the second change effect in the present embodiment is configured as an effect such that the more the second change effect changes, the higher the possibility of executing the hit notification effect.

(Jackpot reliability and features of omen production)
The sign effect described above based on FIG. 30 has a feature that the reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the final number of ○ (total number of ○) displayed by the ticket reversal effect (see FIG. 30 (D)). is doing. Specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 31 (B), the reliability of the jackpot effect when the final number of 〇 is “1” is set to about 2%, and the final number of 〇 is set to about 2%. The jackpot reliability of the sign effect of "2" is set to about 5%, and the jackpot reliability of the sign effect of which the final number of circles is "3" is set to about 11%.

In addition, the portent effect also has a feature that the total number of Os finally displayed by the ticket reversal effect increases the possibility that the second change effect will be executed after the portent effect is finished. Specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 31(B), in the case where the premonitory effect in which the final total number of ◯ is “1” is executed, there is a probability of about 15% that the 2-change effect is performed. When the premonition production is executed and the final total number of 〇 is "2", the second change production is executed with a probability of about 45%, and the final total number of 〇 is "3". , the second change effect is executed with a probability of 100%.

In addition, the more the number of tickets displayed by the chance ticket acquisition effect, and the more the number of tickets displayed as a result of the ticket increase/decrease effect, the more the sign effect will be finally displayed by the ticket reversal effect. is likely to increase, and the second change effect is also likely to be executed. Therefore, by executing a chance ticket acquisition effect in which a large number of tickets are displayed and a ticket increase/decrease effect in which the number of tickets is increased, not only the player's expectation for the execution of the winning notification effect but also the second It is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation for execution of the change performance.

Furthermore, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 31B, in the portent effect, when the second change effect is executed after the portent effect is executed, the ticket reversal effect that constitutes the portent effect is final. It also has a feature that the same number of step effects as the total number of ◯ displayed in the second change effect is executed. Specifically, when the ticket reversal effect is finally displayed, and the second change effect is executed after that, only the first stage effect of the first stage effect to the third stage effect is executed. In addition, when the ticket reversal effect is finally displayed with two circles and the second change effect is executed after that, the first stage effect and the second stage of the first stage effect to the third stage effect Two stages of production are executed. In addition, when the ticket reversal effect is finally displayed with three circles, and then the second change effect is executed, the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the second stage effect Three stage performances, a stage performance and a third stage performance, are executed.

On the other hand, even if the total number of Os finally displayed as a result of the ticket reversal effect is 1 or more, if the judge effect informs that the second change effect will not be executed (failure effect is executed ), there is also a feature that the second change effect is not executed.

<Specific example of precursor effect when second change effect is not executed>
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a specific example of the precursor effect when the second change effect is not executed will be described. Here, FIG. 32 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the precursor effect when the second change effect is not executed.

In FIG. 32A, in the display screen 70, one pending icon (for example, a white pending icon) is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is In order to notify that the determination result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is "losing", along with the stop display of the losing symbol as the first special symbol, the effect symbol showing the loose eyes of "582" is displayed. A stopped display state is illustrated. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 is displayed. A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon is executed.

Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the first reserved icon is "losing", and the variation pattern for no-reach production is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, The following effects may occur.

That is, as the first special symbol determination corresponding to the first reserved icon is executed, the first special symbol displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 is displayed in the first is shifted to the icon display area 72, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 32A and 32B). When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the scroll display of the three symbol rows, the above-described chance ticket win effect is executed based on FIG. 30(B) (see FIGS. 32(C) and (D)).

FIG. 32(C) exemplifies how a predetermined character is delighted to have won two chance tickets, and FIG. A state in which they are displayed side by side in the upper right area is illustrated. By displaying two tickets in this way, compared to the case of displaying one ticket, the expectation of the player for execution of the second change effect after the end of the sign effect can be effectively enhanced. can be improved to In addition, both of these two tickets have "O" written on their backs, and there is a possibility that a second change effect that changes up to the second stage will be executed. Therefore, the player can recognize the possibility that the second change effect will be executed based on the number of tickets displayed by the ticket acquisition effect, and based on the number of tickets, It is possible to recognize that the second change effect may change up to the second stage.

Following such a chance ticket acquisition effect, the above-described ticket increase/decrease effect is executed based on FIG. 30(C) (see FIGS. 32(E) and (F)). FIG. 32(E) illustrates how a predetermined character uses a ray gun to attack two tickets for the purpose of increasing the number of tickets. Further, FIG. 32(F) illustrates a state in which increasing the number of tickets has failed and, conversely, two tickets have been reduced to one.

When such a ticket increase/decrease effect is executed, the above-described ticket reversal effect is executed based on FIG. 30(D) (see FIG. 32(G)). In FIGS. 32(F) and (G), the ticket reduced to 1 by the ticket increase/decrease effect is moved to the central area of the display screen 70, and the ticket is turned upside down to reveal the "x". The situation is illustrated. Since this ticket reversal effect notifies that the final total number of 0 is "0", the player can understand that the final stage of the second change effect will be the zero stage based on the ticket reversal effect. That is, it is possible to easily recognize that the second change effect is not executed.

Following the ticket reversal effect, a judge effect is executed (see FIG. 32(H)). FIG. 32(H) illustrates a failure effect in which a crying character and the words "Unfortunate..." are displayed to notify that the second change effect will not be performed. there is The player can easily recognize that the second change effect will not be executed after the end of the current sign effect based on the judge effect (here, failure effect) illustrated in FIG. 32(H). .

Here, the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time is "losing", and the variation pattern for the reach-less production as the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, for example, the three performance symbols showing the loose pattern of "361" are stopped in a simulated manner, and the "losing symbol" is displayed as the first special symbol. Along with the stop display, a loss notification effect is executed in which the three effect symbols indicating the above-mentioned separated eyes are actually stopped as they are (see FIG. 32(I)).

<Specific example of the second change effect that ends in the omen effect and the second stage>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a specific example of the precursor effect and the second change effect ending in the second stage will be described. Here, FIG. 33 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the precursor effect and the second change effect that ends in the second stage.

FIGS. 33(A) and 33(B) exemplify how the chance ticket win effect is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state is started. FIG. 33(A) exemplifies how a predetermined character is delighted to have won three chance tickets, and FIG. A state in which they are displayed side by side in the upper right area is illustrated.

In the chance ticket acquisition effects illustrated in FIGS. 33A to 33B, three tickets, one more than the chance ticket acquisition effects described above based on FIGS. 32C to 32D, are displayed. there is Therefore, when the player sees that three tickets are displayed, the player can easily understand that the possibility of executing the second change effect is higher than when two tickets are displayed. It is possible to recognize In addition, these three tickets all have "O" written on the back, making it easy for the player to understand that the second change effect that changes up to the third stage, which is the upper limit stage, may be executed. It is possible to recognize

Following the chance ticket acquisition effect, the ticket increase/decrease effect is executed (see FIGS. 33(C) to (D)). FIG. 33(C) exemplifies a state in which a predetermined character attacks three tickets using a ray gun for the purpose of increasing the number of tickets. Further, FIG. 33(D) illustrates a state in which increasing the number of tickets has failed, and conversely, three tickets have been reduced to two.

When such a ticket increase/decrease effect is executed, a ticket reversal effect is executed (see FIG. 33(E)). In (D) to (E) of FIG. 33, the number of tickets reduced to two due to the ticket increase/decrease effect is moved to the central area of the display screen 70, and both of these tickets are turned upside down to form two "O"s. is shown as an example. Since this ticket reversal effect notifies that the final total number of ◯ is "2", the player can understand that the second change effect may be executed based on the ticket reversal effect. In addition, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a possibility of changing up to the second stage when the second change effect is executed.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 31, when the premonitory effect in which the final number of circles is "2" is executed, the possibility that the second change effect will be executed after that is about 45%. be. Therefore, when the ticket reversal effect illustrated in FIG. 33(E) is executed, there are times when the second change effect is executed after the premonition effect ends and times when it is not executed. When the second change effect is executed after the sign effect is finished, the following effect is executed.

That is, following the ticket reversal effect, the judge effect is executed (see FIG. 33(F)). FIG. 33(F) illustrates a success effect in which a happy character and the characters "STEP 2!" ing. Based on the judge effect (success effect here) exemplified in FIG. It is possible to easily recognize the change up to two steps.

In this way, when the second change effect is executed and the judge effect for notifying that the second change effect changes to the second stage is executed, the second change effect is started, and the first stage effect is started. A first stage effect including an effect of displaying an image (see FIG. 33(G)), a second stage effect including an effect of displaying a second stage effect image (see FIG. 33(H)), and a second stage end effect image is executed (see FIG. 33(I)).

As is clear from the descriptions of FIGS. 33(G) to (I), these effect images are displayed in the process of sequentially displaying the first stage effect image, the second stage effect image, and the second stage end effect image. The display area to be displayed changes, and the display area is expanded each time the display of the effect image is switched. The display contents of the first stage effect image, the second stage effect image, the second stage end effect image, and the like may be used. A)), the second-stage effect image (see FIG. 28C), and the second-stage related effect image (see FIG. 28D). be done.

It should be noted that the second stage end effect (see FIG. 33(I)) does not have the function of suggesting development to the ready-to-win effect like the second stage related effect described above based on FIG. 28(D). , Similar to the second stage related production, it may be provided with a function of suggesting development to a reach production (for example, SP reach).

<Specific example of the second change effect that ends in the omen effect and the third stage>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, specific examples of the precursor effect and the second change effect ending in the third stage will be described. Here, FIGS. 34 and 35 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the second change effect that ends in the third stage of the precursor effect and the upper limit.

FIGS. 34(A) and 34(B) exemplify how the chance ticket win effect is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state is started. FIG. 34(A) exemplifies how a predetermined character is delighted to have won three chance tickets, and FIG. A state in which they are displayed side by side in the upper right area is illustrated. The chance ticket acquisition effects exemplified in FIGS. 34A and 34B are effects common to the chance ticket acquisition effects described above based on FIGS. 33A and 33B. An effect similar to that described above can be expected.

Following the chance ticket acquisition effect, a ticket increase/decrease effect is executed (see FIGS. 34(C) to (D)). FIG. 34(C) illustrates how a predetermined character uses a ray gun to attack three tickets for the purpose of increasing the number of tickets. Further, FIG. 34(D) illustrates a state in which the number of tickets has been successfully increased, and the number of tickets has increased from three to four.

When such a ticket increase/decrease effect is executed, a ticket reversal effect is executed (see FIG. 34(E)). In FIGS. 34(D) to 34(E), the number of tickets increased to four by the ticket increase/decrease effect is moved to the central area of the display screen 70, and all four of these tickets are turned upside down to form three "O" ” and one “x” are exposed. Since this ticket reversal effect notifies that the final total number of 0 is "3", the player is informed that there is a possibility that the second change effect will be executed based on the ticket reversal effect. In addition, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a possibility of changing up to the upper limit stage, the third stage, when the second change effect is executed.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 31, when the premonition effect with the final number of circles being "3" is executed, the possibility of executing the second change effect after that is 100%. . Therefore, when the ticket reversal effect illustrated in FIG. 34(E) is executed, the second change effect is always executed after the precursor effect is finished.

Therefore, in the judgment effect (see FIG. 33(F)) following the ticket reversal effect, the failure effect is never executed, and the success effect is always executed. FIG. 34(F) illustrates a success effect in which a happy character and the characters "STEP 3 finalized!" It is Based on the judge effect (success effect here) exemplified in FIG. It can be easily recognized that it changes up to the third stage of .

Thus, when the second change effect is executed and the judge effect for informing that the second change effect changes up to the third stage is executed, the second change effect is started, and the first stage effect is started. A first stage effect including an effect of displaying an image (see FIG. 34(G)), a second stage effect including an effect of displaying a second stage effect image (see FIG. 34(H)), and a third stage effect image. A third stage effect including an effect to be displayed (see FIG. 34(I)) and a third stage end effect including an effect to display a third stage end effect image (see FIG. 35A) are executed.

34(G) to (I) and FIG. 35(A), the first stage effect image, the second stage effect image, the third stage effect image, and the third stage end effect image are displayed in order. In the process of displaying, the display area in which these effect images are displayed changes, and the display area is expanded each time the display of the effect image is switched. The display contents of the first stage effect image, the second stage effect image, the third stage effect image, the third stage end effect image, etc. may be used. ), the first stage effect image (see FIG. 28(A)), the second stage effect image (see FIG. 28(C)), the third stage effect image (see FIG. 28(E)), and the third stage related It is conceivable to display an effect image having display contents similar to the effect image (see FIG. 28(F)).

It should be noted that the third stage end effect (see FIG. 35(A)) does not have the function of suggesting the development of other effects such as the ready-to-win effect. As in the case of the third stage related production, it may be provided with a function of suggesting development to a ready-to-win production (for example, SPSP ready-to-win).

As described above with reference to FIG. 31(A), the reliability of the second change effect that changes up to the upper limit of the third stage is about 17%. For this reason, after the third stage end effect is executed, the effect may progress in the following flow. That is, when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses after the execution of the third stage end effect, for example, the scroll speed of the left and right symbol columns decreases, and the left 5 symbols and the right 5 symbols A ready-to-win effect is executed in which five symbols are stopped in a simulated manner and ready-to-win is established (see FIG. 35(B)).

When the reach is established in this way, first, the above-described normal reach is executed based on FIG. 8(F) and the like (see FIG. 35(C)). Then, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, when the effect pattern of the variable effect that develops directly from the normal reach to the SPSP reach is set, as described above based on FIG. 10(B), A development effect suggesting development to SPSP reach is performed (see FIG. 35(D)). In FIG. 35(D), in the process of moving to the upper left area of the display screen 70 while reducing the size of the left 5 patterns, it rotates once clockwise about the scroll direction as the axial direction, and then moves to the upper left area. At the same time, in the process of moving to the upper right area of the display screen 70 while the five right symbols are reduced, it rotates once clockwise about the scroll direction as an axis and then moves to the upper right area. exemplified.

When it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, an SPSP ready-to-win effect image, which is an effect image related to SPSP ready-to-win, is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 35(E)). As a result, for example, an effect display showing how the main character and the enemy character are battling is performed. After that, when the end of the SPSP ready-to-win is approached, a first effect button operation prompting effect for prompting the player to operate the first effect button 35 is performed (see FIG. 35(F)). Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period during which the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid are displayed. The effects after such a first effect button operation prompting effect is executed are as described above with reference to FIG. 10 and the like.

Thus, in the gaming machine 1 capable of executing the sign effect and the second change effect, the more the second change effect changes, the higher the possibility of executing the winning notification effect (see FIG. 31A). On the other hand, the ticket suggests the possibility that the second change effect will change to one stage of three stages or less due to the precursor effect that is a precursor to the second change effect. Therefore, the player can recognize in advance how likely it is that the second change effect will change to the first stage based on the precursor effect, and the second change effect is executed. It is possible to effectively suggest the possibility that the second change effect will change to the first stage while making the user expect that by means of the omen effect.

Processing executed by the sub CPU 91 for controlling the execution of such an indication effect and the second change effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 56 .

[Step change effect and expected effect]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39, the step-change effect and expected effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the step change effect and the expected effect. FIG. 37 is a screen diagram illustrating a series of effects in which the step-change effect ends at the first stage and develops into an expected effect. 38 and 39 are screen diagrams illustrating a series of effects in which the step-change effect ends at the upper limit of the third stage and develops into an expected effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the stage change effect and the expected effect during the variable display of the first special symbols in the normal game state. Here, the gradual change effect is a effect that can be changed in stages up to a predetermined step (the third step in this embodiment) as an upper limit and any step below the predetermined step. The expectation effect is a effect that makes the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed.

When a game ball wins in the first start hole 21 in the normal game state, the main CPU 81 executes the first special symbol determination based on the jackpot random number or the like acquired according to the win. Then, it transmits to the sub-control board 90 a variation start command including information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 performs execution control of the step change effect and the expected effect based on the received variation start command. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, the step-change effect and the expected effect are executed in the following flow.

When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the step change effect at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the variable display of the first special symbol is started ), the first stage effect (first stage effect) of the step change effect is started (see FIG. 36(A)). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses after the start of the first stage production, the first stage production develops into a second stage production, which is the next stage production after the first stage production ( The display screen 70 displays an advanced icon suggesting that the winning notification effect will be changed, and an expected effect icon (an example of a "corresponding image") corresponding to the expected effect that expects that the win notification effect will be executed. An icon change effect (for example, see FIG. 37(D)) for changing the icon on the display screen 70 is started (see FIG. 36(B)).

In this way, when the first-stage effect of the step-change effect is being executed, the expected effect icon is placed in a possibility suggesting state ( In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91 executes the first effect control for displaying the variable display on the display screen 70 .

Here, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, the sub CPU 91 ends the stage change performance with the first stage performance, and corresponds to the expected performance icon fixed and stopped during execution of the first stage performance. When the performance pattern of a series of performances for executing the expected performance is set, a predetermined second performance control is executed. In the second effect control here, the display state of one expected effect icon displayed during the first stage effect is changed from the above possibility suggesting state, and the expected effect corresponding to the expected effect icon is executed. The effect is changed to a fixed notification state in which the event is definitely notified, the stage change effect being executed is terminated at the first stage, and the expected effect corresponding to the expected effect icon in the fixed notification state is executed. Control.

Specifically, the sub CPU 91 selects one of the plurality of icons displayed during the first stage effect in order to change the display state of the expected effect icon from the possibility suggesting state to the confirmed notification state. All the icons other than the icon are erased from the display screen 70, and an expected effect icon confirmation stop effect (see, for example, FIG. 37(F)) for fixing and stopping one expected effect icon on the display screen 70 is executed (see FIG. 36). (C)). Then, the sub CPU 91 terminates the stage change effect being executed at the current stage (here, the first stage) (see FIG. 36(D)), and executes the expected effect corresponding to the confirmed and stopped expected effect icon. (See FIG. 36(E)). Here, the "determined notification state" is a state in which the execution of the expected effect is definitely notified. In this case, not only is the notification that the expected effect corresponding to the expected effect icon will be executed without fail, but when the display state of the expected effect icon changes to the confirmed notification state, the expected effect icon corresponds to the expected effect icon. It includes notification that the expected effect will be executed with a very high probability (for example, 99.8%). Therefore, when the display state of the expected effect icon changes to the confirmed notification state, the expected effect corresponding to the expected effect icon may not be executed, but another expected effect not corresponding to the expected effect icon may be executed. be. The probability that such other expected effect is executed is extremely low, and when another expected effect not corresponding to the expected effect icon that has changed to the confirmed notification state is executed, the hit notification effect is always executed within the same fluctuation. will be

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 sets the effect pattern for developing (changing) the stage change effect from the first stage to the second stage at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, the predetermined third Execute production control. The third effect control here changes the first stage effect being executed to the second stage effect (second stage effect) without changing the display state of the expected effect icon from the possibility suggesting state to the confirmed notification state. It is a production control for changing to

In order to realize the third effect control, the sub CPU 91 starts the icon variation effect as described above based on FIG. 38(D) for example) is executed (see FIG. 36F). Then, by changing the first stage effect image displayed by the first stage effect to the second stage effect image for the second stage effect, the second stage effect is started (FIGS. 36(G) and 38). (D) to (E)).

Next, the sub CPU 91 changes a plurality of icons including at least one expected effect icon and one development icon during the second stage effect as described above with reference to FIG. 36(B). The icon change effect to be displayed is started (see FIGS. 36(H) and 38(F)). Note that, in the icon variation effect executed during the second stage effect, a combination of icons different from the plurality of icons variably displayed in the icon change effect executed during the first stage effect is variably displayed. This will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 37-39.

The sub CPU 91 terminates the stage change performance with the second stage performance at the start of the current variable display of the first special symbol, and the expectation performance corresponding to the expected performance icon confirmed and stopped during execution of the second stage performance. is set, a predetermined second effect control is executed. The second effect control here changes the display state of one expected effect icon displayed during the second stage effect from the possibility suggesting state to the definite notification state, and changes the step change effect being executed to the second step change effect. It is an effect control that ends at the stage of the stage and executes the expected effect corresponding to the expected effect icon in the fixed notification state.

Specifically, the sub CPU 91 selects one of the plurality of icons displayed during the second stage effect in order to change the display state of one expected effect icon from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state. All icons other than the expected effect icon are erased from the display screen 70, and an expected effect icon confirmation stop effect (see, for example, FIG. 38(H)) is executed to confirm and stop one expected effect icon on the display screen 70 ( See FIG. 36(I)). Then, the sub CPU 91 terminates the stage change effect being executed at the current stage (here, the second stage) (see FIG. 36(J)), and executes the expected effect corresponding to the confirmed and stopped expected effect icon. (See FIG. 36(K)).

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 has set an effect pattern in which the stage change effect is developed (changed) in the order of the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, Predetermined third effect control is executed. In the third effect control here, the second stage effect being executed is changed to the second stage effect without changing the display state of the expected effect icon displayed during the second stage effect from the possibility suggesting state to the confirmed notification state. This is an effect control for changing to a three-stage effect (third-stage effect).

In order to realize the third effect control, the sub CPU 91 starts the icon variation effect (see FIG. 36(H)) as described above based on FIG. icon is erased from the display screen 70, and an advanced icon confirmation stop effect (see, for example, FIG. 38(H)) is executed to fix and stop the one advanced icon on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 36(L)). ). Then, by changing the second stage effect image displayed by the second stage effect to the third stage effect image for the third stage effect, the third stage effect is started (FIGS. 36(M) and 38). (H) to (I)).

Next, the sub CPU 91 starts the icon variation effect in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 36(B) even during the third stage effect (see FIG. ). It should be noted that the stage change effect in this embodiment is the upper limit stage, and the stage change effect does not change further from the third stage. Therefore, in the icon variation effect that is performed during the third stage effect, a plurality of expected effect icons that do not include the advanced icon are variably displayed.

The sub CPU 91 terminates the stage change performance with the upper limit third stage performance at the start of the current variable display of the first special symbol, and the expectation performance corresponding to the expected performance icon confirmed and stopped during the third stage performance. is set, a predetermined second effect control is executed. The second effect control here changes the display state of one expected effect icon displayed during the third stage effect from the possibility suggesting state to the confirmed notification state, and changes the stage change effect being executed to the third stage change effect. It is an effect control that ends at the stage of the stage and executes the expected effect corresponding to the expected effect icon in the fixed notification state.

Specifically, the sub CPU 91 selects one of the plurality of icons displayed during the third stage effect in order to change the display state of one expected effect icon from the possibility suggesting state to the confirmed notification state. All icons other than the expected effect icon are erased from the display screen 70, and an expected effect icon confirmation stop effect (see, for example, FIG. 39C) for fixing and stopping one expected effect icon on the display screen 70 is executed ( See FIG. 36(O)). Then, the sub CPU 91 terminates the stage change effect being executed at the current stage (here, the third stage) (see FIG. 36(P)), and executes the expected effect corresponding to the confirmed and stopped expected effect icon. (See FIG. 36(Q)).

<Specific example of stage change effect that ends in the first stage>
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a specific example of the stage change effect ending at the first stage will be described. Here, FIG. 37 is a screen diagram illustrating a series of effects in which the step-change effect ends at the first stage and develops into an expected effect. In this FIG. 37, the first stage effect described above based on FIG. The effect is executed (see FIG. 36(C)), the stage change effect is terminated at the first stage (see FIG. 36(D)), and the expected effect corresponding to the confirmed and stopped expected effect icon is executed (FIG. 36). (E)), a specific example of a series of effects is shown.

In FIG. 37A, in the display screen 70, one pending icon (for example, a white pending icon) is displayed in the pending icon display area 71, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is In order to notify that the determination result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is "losing", three productions showing the loose eyes of "615" along with the stopping display of the losing symbol as the first special symbol. A state in which the symbol is stopped and displayed is exemplified. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 is displayed. A first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon is executed.

Here, the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the first reserved icon is "losing", and as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, reach is established during the pseudo second consecutive variation effect. When the variation pattern for the production with reach is selected in which a predetermined reach production is executed, the following production may be executed.

That is, as the first special symbol determination corresponding to the first reserved icon is executed, the first special symbol displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 is displayed in the first is shifted to the icon display area 72, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 37A and 37B). When a predetermined period of time has passed since the scroll display of the three symbol rows started, the above-described first stage effect is started based on FIG. 36(A) (see FIG. 37(C)).

FIG. 37(C) illustrates a state in which an elliptical first stage effect image that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction is displayed. Although not shown in the figure, the first-stage effect image is a effect image representing characters "1st" in order to clearly notify that the effect is the first-stage effect of the step-change effect. Note that the display contents of the first stage effect image may be of any kind. One example is to use a performance image representing a character.

37(C) to (I), for convenience of explanation, the suspended icon, the icon, the suspended pedestal located directly below the suspended icon display area 71, and the pedestal located directly below the icon display area 72 Illustration is omitted.

When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses after the first stage effect of the step change effect is started, the above-described icon change effect is started based on FIG. 36(B) (FIG. 37(D) reference). As illustrated in FIG. 37(D), the icon variation effect in this embodiment includes one or more development icons suggesting that the first stage effect develops (changes) into the second stage effect, and the expected effect and one or a plurality of expected performance icons corresponding to are displayed, and these icons are constituted as performances that rotate clockwise around the step performance image (here, the first step performance image).

FIG. 37D shows two elliptical icons (UP icons) containing the characters "UP", two elliptical icons (NEXT icons) containing the characters "NEXT", and the characters "blue pending". One elliptical icon (blue pending change icon) containing , one elliptical icon (green pending change icon) containing the characters "green pending", and one elliptical icon containing the characters "character" (character Reach icon) and are exemplified as rotating.

Here, the UP icon is an icon classified as the above-mentioned "development icon" that suggests that the stage change effect will develop (change) from the current stage to the next stage. FIG. 37(D) illustrates how a plurality of icons including two UP icons are rotationally moved, but the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons is variable, and no UP icon is included. In some cases, only one UP icon is included, and in some cases, three or more UP icons are included.

Here, if the plurality of icons does not include the UP icon, the plurality of icons will be composed only of the "expected effect icon", and the step change effect will always end at the current stage. In this case, after the step-change effect is completed, the expected effect corresponding to any one of the confirmed and stopped expected effect icons is executed. On the other hand, a plurality of icons may be composed only of "UP icons". In this case, since the fixed stop icon is not fixed and stopped, the step-change effect always develops (changes) from the current step to the next step.

The NEXT icon, the blue pending change icon, the green pending change icon, and the character reach icon exemplified in FIG. The NEXT icon is an icon corresponding to a pseudo continuous effect (an example of an expected effect: see, for example, FIG. 9D). The blue pending change icon is an icon corresponding to an icon change effect (an example of an expected effect) for changing the display color of the icon to blue. The green pending change icon is an icon corresponding to an icon change effect (an example of an expected effect) that changes the display color of the icon to green. The character reach icon is an icon corresponding to character reach (see FIG. 8(I)).

When the icon variation effect of FIG. 37(D) is started, an effect display is performed in which these icons are rotationally moved so as to move clockwise around the first stage effect image. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the start of the icon change effect, the rotational movement of these icons ends, each icon is displayed in a pseudo-stop manner on the display screen 70, and each icon is attacked. An attack effect display showing the state of being attacked is performed (see FIG. 37(E)).

When such an attack effect display is performed, one of the plurality of icons pseudo-stopped around the first stage effect image is fixedly stopped on the display screen 70, and all of the remaining icons are stopped. An effect display for erasing is performed (see FIGS. 37(E) to (F)). FIG. 37(F) shows a state in which it is definitely notified that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed by the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect of fixing and stopping only the NEXT icon among the plurality of icons. there is

In this way, when the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect for fixing and stopping the NEXT icon is performed, the first step effect image and the NEXT icon illustrated in FIG. The effect ends with the first stage effect, and a pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the NEXT icon is executed (see FIG. 37(G)). FIG. 37(G) illustrates a pseudo-continuous effect in which 9 symbols on the left and 6 symbols on the right are quasi-stopped in order, and then the middle 7 symbols as quasi-continuous symbols are quasi-stopped.

In this way, after the left and right symbols, which are different from each other, are pseudo-stopped, and then seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row, the pseudo-second row variation performance following the pseudo-first row variation performance is started. (See FIGS. 37(G) to (H)). Specifically, after the characters “×2” suggesting the start of the pseudo second streak of variable effect are displayed in a large size in the central area of the display screen 70, the characters “×2” are displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. A smaller pattern is displayed in the one area, and along with this, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (restarted) in the performance symbol display area 73 .

Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the pseudo second streak of variable effect, the scrolling speed of the left symbol row decreases, and the left symbol (for example, 4 symbols) stops in a pseudo manner. , the scrolling speed of the right symbol row is lowered (same as the left symbol), and the right symbol (here, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped to establish a reach (see FIG. 37(I)). In this way, when the ready-to-win state is established by the effect symbol, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed after that, and the hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is executed.

So far, a series of effects has been described in the case where the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect for confirming and stopping the NEXT icon as the expected effect icon is executed. may be executed.

For example, when the expected performance icon fixation stop performance for fixing and stopping the blue pending change icon is executed, the first stage performance image and the blue pending change icon are erased, and the step change performance ends at the first stage. After that, an icon change effect is executed to change the display color of the icon (see FIG. 37B), which is omitted in FIG. 37C and later, to blue. Further, for example, when the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect for fixing and stopping the green pending change icon is executed, the first stage effect image and the green pending change icon are erased, and the step change effect ends at the first stage. . Then, after that, an icon change effect for changing the display color of the icon (see FIG. 37(B)) to green is executed. When these icon change effects are executed, a pseudo continuous effect, a ready-to-win effect, or a predetermined ready-to-win effect may be executed before or after the icon change effect is executed.

Further, for example, when expected performance icon fixation stop performance for fixing and stopping the character ready-to-win icon is executed, the first stage performance image and the character ready-to-win icon are erased, and the stage change performance ends at the first stage. After that, the character reach is executed after the normal reach is executed, or the character reach is executed without executing the normal reach.

So far, a series of effects after the execution of the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect for confirming and stopping various expected effect icons has been briefly described. A series of effects when executed will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

<Specific example of stage change effect ending in the third stage>
Next, a specific example of the stage change effect ending at the third stage will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 38 and 39 are screen diagrams illustrating a series of effects in which the step-change effect ends at the upper limit of the third stage and develops into an expected effect. In FIGS. 38 and 39, as described above with reference to FIG. 36, after the first stage effect is started, the icon change effect is started (see FIGS. (See FIG. 36(F)), start the second stage effect, then start the icon change effect (see FIGS. (L)), after the third stage effect is started, the icon change effect is started (see FIG. 36 (M) to (N)), and the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect is executed (see FIG. 36 (O) ), ending the stage change effect in the third step (see FIG. 36(P)), and executing the expected effect corresponding to the confirmed and stopped expected effect icon (see FIG. 36(Q)). Specific examples are given.

38 and 39, for convenience of explanation, the suspended icon, the icon, the suspended pedestal positioned directly below the suspended icon display area 71, and the pedestal positioned directly below the icon display area 72 are omitted. there is

FIG. 38(A) exemplifies the state immediately after the first step effect of the step change effect is started. During this first stage effect, a first stage effect image representing at least the characters "1st" is displayed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 37(C). When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses after the start of the first stage effect, the icon change effect in the first stage effect is executed (see FIGS. 38B to 38C).

When the icon fluctuation effect of FIG. 38(B) and the icon fluctuation effect of FIG. 37(D) are compared, in the latter icon change effect, multiple icon is displayed, whereas the former icon variation effect differs from each other in that a plurality of icons including two blue pending icons are displayed. Note that the icon variation effect illustrated in FIGS. 38B to 38C is based on FIGS. It is performed in the same manner as the icon variation effect described above.

Note that in the icon variation effect illustrated in FIG. 38B, two UP icons are included in the plurality of icons, but the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons is variable. may include no UP icon, or the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons may be one, or the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons may be three or more. A first case in which the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons is the first number, and a second case in which the number of UP icons included in the plurality of icons is a second number greater than the first number. , the second case is characterized in that the step-change effect progresses to the next step more easily than the first case. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the degree of possibility that the step change effect being executed will develop to the next step based on the number of UP icons displayed during the icon change effect. It is possible.

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the icon variation effect illustrated in FIG. 38(B) was started, the attack effect display is performed in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 37(E). (See FIG. 38(C)). Then, as a result of this attack effect display, an advanced icon confirmation stop effect may be executed in which one UP icon is fixed and stopped on the display screen 70 and all the remaining icons are erased (FIG. 38 ( D)). By this development icon determination stop effect, it is definitely notified that the stage change effect being executed will develop from the current first stage to the second stage.

Next, the second stage effect is started (see FIG. 38(E)). Specifically, the UP icon is erased from the display screen 70, and an effect display for changing the first stage effect image to the second stage effect image is performed (see FIGS. 38(D) to (E)). The second stage effect image here represents at least the character "2nd". Although the display content of the second stage effect image is not particularly limited, for example, the second stage effect image (see FIG. 28(C)) displayed in the second stage effect of the first change effect and the An example is displaying a second stage effect image having similar characteristics.

Also, in FIG. 38(E), a second stage effect image having the same shape and size as the first stage effect image (see FIGS. 38(A) to (D)) is shown in the central area of the display screen 70. , the second stage effect image may differ from the first stage effect image in at least one of its shape and size.

When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses after the second stage effect of the step change effect (see FIG. 38(E)) is started, the above-described icon change effect is started based on FIG. 36(H). (See FIG. 38(F)). As illustrated in FIG. 38(F), the icon change effect here includes one or more development icons suggesting that the second stage effect develops (changes) into the third stage effect, and the expected effect. One or a plurality of corresponding expected effect icons are displayed, and these icons are configured to rotate clockwise around the second stage effect image.

FIG. 38(F) shows one NEXT icon, two UP icons, one green pending change icon, one oval icon (red pending change icon) containing the characters "red pending", and one A state in which one character reach icon and one elliptical icon (SP reach icon) including the letters "SP" are rotated is illustrated.

Here, the NEXT icon, UP icon, green pending change icon, and character reach icon are as described above with reference to FIG. 37(D). Both the red pending change icon and the SP reach icon are icons classified as the "expected effect icons" described above. The red pending change icon is an icon corresponding to an icon change effect (an example of expected effect) for changing the display color of the icon to red. The SP reach icon is an icon corresponding to SP reach (see FIG. 8(J)).

When the icon variation effect of FIG. 38(F) is started, an effect display is performed in which these icons are rotationally moved so as to move clockwise around the second stage effect image. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the start of the icon change effect, the rotational movement of these icons ends, each icon is displayed in a pseudo-stop manner on the display screen 70, and each icon is attacked. An attack effect display showing the state of being attacked is performed (see FIG. 38(G)). This attack effect display is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 37(E).

When such an attack effect display is performed, any one of the plurality of icons pseudo-stopped around the second stage effect image is fixedly stopped on the display screen 70, and all the remaining icons are stopped. An effect display for erasing is performed (see FIGS. 38(G) to (H)). In FIG. 38(H), it is confirmed that the step change effect being executed develops from the second step to the upper limit third step by the development icon fix stop effect that fixes and stops the UP icon among the plurality of icons. This example shows how the

In addition, here, the case where the step change effect develops from the second step to the third step by fixing and stopping the UP icon will be described as an example. Any of the character reach icon, the red pending change icon, and the SP reach icon: see FIG. The expected effect corresponding to the confirmed and stopped expected effect icon may be executed.

Further, in the icon variation effect illustrated in FIG. 38(F), two UP icons are included in the plurality of icons, but there are cases where the UP icon is not included in the plurality of icons. At the time when the effect is started, it is definitely notified that the step-change effect ends at the current stage (here, the second stage). Conversely, all of the plurality of icons may be UP icons (that is, none of the plurality of icons include the expected effect icon). The development from the current stage (here, the second stage) to the next stage (here, the third stage) is definitely notified.

Following the development icon confirmation stop effect of FIG. 38(H), the third stage effect is started (see FIGS. 38(H) to (I)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 38(H) to 38(I), the UP icon is erased from the display screen 70, and an effect display is performed in which the second stage effect image is changed to the third stage effect image. will be The third stage effect image here represents at least the characters "3nd". Although the display contents of the third stage effect image are not particularly limited, for example, the third stage effect image (see FIG. 28(E)) displayed in the third stage effect of the first change effect and the An example is displaying a third stage effect image having similar features.

Also, in FIG. 38(I), first stage effect images (see FIGS. 38(A) to (D)) and second stage effect images (see FIGS. 38(E) to (H)), shapes and sizes. are displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, but the third stage effect image has at least one of the shape and the size of the first stage effect image. It may be different from the step effect image or the second step effect image.

When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses after the third stage effect of the step change effect (see FIG. 38(I)) is started, the above-described icon change effect is started based on FIG. 36(N). (See FIG. 39(A)). The icon variation effect here does not include a development icon (UP icon) that suggests that the stage change effect develops to the next stage, and is composed only of expected effect icons, as shown in FIG. A plurality of icons are displayed, and these icons are rotated clockwise around the third stage effect image. In this way, in the icon change effect executed during the third stage effect, the development icon is not included in the plurality of icons because the stage change effect being executed is further developed from the upper limit stage of the third stage. This is because there is no

FIG. 39(A) includes one NEXT icon, two red pending change icons, one oval icon (money pending change icon) containing the characters "money pending", and the characters "SPSP". One elliptical icon (SPSP reach icon), one elliptical icon (ZONE icon) containing the characters "ZONE", one elliptical icon (Geketsu icon) containing the characters "Geketsu", is exemplified as rotating.

Here, the NEXT icon and red pending change icon are as described above based on FIG. 37(D) and FIG. 38(F). The money reserve change icon, the SPSP ready-to-win icon, the ZONE icon, and the intense heat icon are all icons classified as the "expected effect icons" described above. The gold pending change icon is an icon corresponding to an icon change effect (an example of an expected effect) that changes the display color of the icon to gold. The SPSP ready-to-win icon is an icon corresponding to SPSP ready-to-win (an example of expected effect: see FIG. 8(K)). The ZONE icon is an icon corresponding to an effect (an example of an expected effect) in a highly reliable special effect mode called "ZONE". The intense heat icon is an icon corresponding to a high-reliability effect (an example of an expected effect) including character display of "extreme heat".

When the icon variation effect shown in FIG. 39A is started, an effect display is performed in which these icons are rotationally moved so as to move clockwise around the third stage effect image. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the start of the icon change effect, the rotational movement of these icons ends, each icon is displayed in a pseudo-stop manner on the display screen 70, and each icon is attacked. An attack effect display representing the state of being attacked is performed (see FIG. 39(B)). This attack effect display is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 37(E).

When such an attack effect display is performed, any one of the plurality of icons pseudo-stopped around the third stage effect image is fixed and stopped on the display screen 70, and all the remaining icons are stopped. An effect display for erasing is performed (see FIGS. 39B to 39C). In FIG. 39(C), after the stage change effect being executed is completed in the third stage by the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect that fixes and stops the intense heat icon among the plurality of icons, the character "rapid heat" is displayed. The manner in which execution of the above-described high-reliability effect including display is definitely notified is illustrated.

In addition, here, a case will be described as an example in which the high-reliability effect is executed by ending the step-change effect at the current third step by fixing and stopping the intense heat icon, but other expected effect icons (here , NEXT icon, red pending change icon, gold pending change icon, SPSP reach icon, or ZONE icon (see FIG. 39(A)). step change effect is finished in the third stage, and the expected effect corresponding to the confirmed and stopped expected effect icon may be executed.

Here, when the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect for fixing and stopping the gold reserve change icon is executed, after the step change effect being executed is completed in the third step, the icon changes the display color of the icon to gold. A change production is executed. In addition, when the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect for fixing and stopping the SPSP ready-to-win icon is executed, after the step change effect being executed is finished in the third step, the SPSP ready-to-win is directly developed or another ready-to-win. Through production, it will eventually develop into SPSP reach. Further, when the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect for fixing and stopping the ZONE icon is executed, the current effect mode shifts to a highly reliable special effect mode after the stage change effect being executed is finished in the third stage. will do.

When the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect that fixes and stops the NEX icon and the red pending change icon is executed, the expected effect that is executed after the stage change effect being executed ends in the third stage is as described above. be.

In the icon variation effect (see FIG. 38(F)) in the second stage effect described above, a total of 7 icons including 5 expected effect icons and 2 advanced icons (UP icons) are variably displayed. be. On the other hand, in the icon variation effect in the third stage effect (see FIG. 39A), 7 expected effect icons, which is the same number as the plurality of icons that are variably displayed in the icon variation effect in the second stage effect, are displayed. Is displayed. As described above, in the gradual change effect of the present embodiment, the number of icons variably displayed in the icon variation effect is fixed to seven. may be appropriately changed according to the stage in which is executed.

For example, in the icon variation effect in the second stage effect, there is a possibility that it will develop into the third stage effect later, so as illustrated in FIG. is variably displayed, but in the icon variation effect (see FIG. 39A) in the third stage effect, it is not necessary to display these two UP icons. Therefore, in the icon variation effect in the third stage effect, a total of five expected effect icons may be variably displayed by excluding two UP icons from the seven icons.

Returning to the description of FIG. 39, when the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect (see FIG. 39C) for fixing and stopping the intense heat icon is executed, the third stage effect image and the intense heat icon are erased from the display screen 70. Then, the stage change effect ends. After this stage change effect is completed, the following effects may be performed.

That is, when the step change effect ends in the third stage after the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect for fixing and stopping the intense heat icon is executed, for example, the scroll speed of the left and right symbol rows decreases, The 7 symbols on the left and the 7 symbols on the right are pseudo-stopped, and the ready-to-win effect is executed (see FIGS. 39(D) to (E)). At that time, as a high-reliability effect corresponding to the intense heat icon described above, as illustrated in FIG. 7 patterns are superimposed and displayed, and an effect of outputting the sound of "hot heat" from the speaker 38 is executed.

After such a ready-to-win establishment effect is executed, a development effect suggesting development to SPSP ready-to-win is performed (see FIG. 39(F)). In FIG. 35(F), in the process of moving to the upper left area of the display screen 70 while reducing the size of the left 7 patterns, the left 7 patterns are rotated once clockwise about the scroll direction as the axial direction, and then moved to the upper left area. At the same time, in the process of moving to the upper right area of the display screen 70 while the seven right symbols are reduced, it rotates once clockwise about the scroll direction as an axis and then moves to the upper right area. exemplified.

FIG. 39(G) exemplifies how the above-described group notice occurs based on FIG. 10(D) after the development effect is executed. During the SPSP ready-to-win after the group announcement occurs, the SPSP ready-to-win effect image is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 39(H)). As a result, for example, an effect display showing how the main character and the enemy character are battling is performed. After that, when the end of the SPSP reach is approached, a first effect button operation prompting effect for prompting the player to operate the first effect button 35 is performed (see FIG. 35(I)). Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period during which the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid are displayed. The effects after such a first effect button operation prompting effect is executed are as described above with reference to FIG. 10 and the like.

As described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display state of the expected effect icon (corresponding image) is changed from the possibility suggesting state to the final state during the first stage effect in the stage change effect. When the state changes to the notification state, the stage change effect is terminated at one stage, and the expected effect corresponding to the expected effect icon is executed. On the other hand, if the display state of the expected effect icon does not change from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state, the display state of the development icon changes from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmed notification state, and the stage change effect is performed. It will change from the production of one stage to the production of the next stage. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the flow of subsequent effects based on the display state of the expected effect icon, and the display state of the expected effect icon changes from the possibility suggesting state to the confirmed notification state. It is possible to enjoy the game while expecting a change (or not changing from the possibility suggestion state to the definite notification state).

It should be noted that, in the step change effect in the present embodiment, as in the first change effect (see FIG. 29) and the second change effect (see FIG. 31(A)), the more the stage progresses, the higher the reliability of the big win. Characteristic. Also, when comparing the icon change effect during the first stage effect (see, for example, FIG. 38B) and the icon change effect during the second stage effect (see, for example, FIG. 38F), the latter The icon variation effect is characterized in that the expected effect icon corresponding to the expected effect with higher reliability of the big win is more likely to be displayed than the former icon change effect. Then, when comparing the icon variation effect during the second stage effect (for example, see FIG. 38(F)) and the icon variation effect during the third stage effect (for example, see FIG. 39(A)), the latter The icon variation effect is characterized in that the expected effect icon corresponding to the expected effect with higher reliability of the big win is more likely to be displayed than the former icon change effect. Therefore, the player's expectations for the performance of the winning notification performance can be effectively improved by the synergistic effect of the performance that develops the stages of the stage change performance and the icon variation performance in each stage of performance. is possible.

The processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to realize the stage change effect and the expected effect described so far will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 66 .

(Modified example of stage change effect)
The following configuration may be adopted for the stage change effects described based on FIGS. That is, in the present embodiment, an example will be described in which both the expected effect icon and the advanced icon are included in the plurality of icons that are variably displayed in the icon variable effect performed during each stage effect. On the other hand, in another embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of icons including a plurality of expected effect icons and not including a development icon are variably displayed in the icon variation effect performed during each stage effect. good too. When such a configuration is adopted, since the development icon does not change from the possibility suggesting state to the confirmed notification state, one of the plurality of expected production icons changes from the possibility suggesting state to the confirmed notification state. , the step-change effect being executed is terminated at the current stage, and the expected effect corresponding to one expected effect icon is executed, while all of the plurality of expected effect icons are changed from the possibility suggesting state to It is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the step change effect being executed is changed from the current step to the next step when it does not change to the confirmed notification state.

Further, in this embodiment, the state in which the expected effect icon is variably displayed is the possibility suggesting state, and the state in which the expected effect icon is fixed and stopped is the confirmed notification state. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the state in which the expected effect icon is displayed outside the specific display area is regarded as the possibility suggesting state, and the state in which the expected effect icon is displayed within the specific display area is the confirmation notification. state. Further, for example, the state in which the expected effect icon is displayed semi-transparently may be the possibility suggesting state, and the state in which the expected effect icon is displayed opaquely may be the confirmed notification state. Further, for example, the state in which the expected effect icon is displayed in monochrome may be set as the possibility suggestion state, and the state in which the expected effect icon is displayed in color may be set as the confirmed notification state.

Further, in another embodiment, for example, in place of the icon change effect and the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect, a predetermined character executes a selection effect in which one expected effect icon is selected from a plurality of expected effect icons. , the state before the expected effect icon is selected may be the possibility suggesting state, and the state after the expected effect icon is selected may be the confirmed notification state.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the expected effect icon can be displayed during all stages of the stage change effect (here, the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect). However, in other embodiments, it is also possible to employ a configuration in which the expected effect icon is displayed only during the partial stage effect of the step change effect. As this configuration, for example, the expected effect icon is not displayed during the first stage effect or the second stage effect, and only when the third stage effect is developed, based on FIGS. An example is a configuration in which the above-described icon change effect and expected effect icon confirmation stop effect can be executed. When such a configuration is adopted, when the stage change performance ends in the first stage or the second stage, no advance notice is given regarding the expected performance to be executed after the stage change performance ends, and the stage change performance is the upper limit. Only when it develops to the third stage of , the advance notice regarding the expected performance to be executed after the end of the stage change performance is made.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the corresponding image corresponding to the expected effect is an expected effect icon representing characters by which the expected effect can be specified will be described as an example. If so, it is not limited to the expected effect icon, and may be, for example, an effect image that does not represent characters that can specify the expected effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the upper limit stage of the stage change effect is the third stage will be described as an example, but the upper limit stage is not limited to the third stage, and the second stage may be the upper limit stage, Alternatively, a stage of the fourth stage or higher may be set as the upper limit stage.

Hereinafter, the RAM configuration of each control board for realizing the game control and effect control described based on the drawings up to FIG. 39 and the processing performed by each control board will be described.

[Configuration example of main RAM 83]
FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining storage areas of the main RAM 83 and information stored in each storage area. As illustrated in FIG. 40(A), the main RAM 83 includes a determination storage area 830 as a storage area for storing acquisition information acquired when a game ball wins the first start hole 21, and a special FIG. 1-first reservation storage area 831, special figure 1-second reservation storage area 832, special figure 1-third reservation storage area 833, and special figure 1-fourth reservation storage area 834 are provided. In addition, in the main RAM 83, as a storage area for storing the acquisition information acquired when the game ball wins the second start port 22, the above-mentioned determination storage area 830, special figure 2 / first reservation storage area 835 , Special figure 2/second reserved storage area 836, Special figure 2/third reserved storage area 837, and Special figure 2/fourth reserved storage area 838 are provided.

The determination storage area 830 is a storage area for storing various information used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. Special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to special figure 1/fourth reservation storage area 834 is a storage area in which various information related to the first special design determination is stored, special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 ~ special figure 2/fourth reserved storage area 838 is a storage area in which various information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. When both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, in the determination storage area 830, when the second special symbol determination is suspended in the execution of the suspended special symbol determination, it is stored in the special figure 2 first suspension storage area 835 Various information is shifted, and when only the first special symbol determination is reserved, various information stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 is shifted.

As illustrated in FIG. 40(B), the reservation storage areas 831 to 838 are areas for storing information for withholding the right to determine the special symbol, and are obtained by the main CPU 81, respectively. , an area for storing pattern random numbers, an area for storing reach random numbers, an area for storing variation pattern random numbers, an area for storing pre-determination information that is information indicating the result of pre-determination, and the like.

Here, the jackpot random numbers, pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are as described above. Pre-determination information is information obtained by special 2 pre-determination processing (see FIG. 43) or special 1 pre-determination processing (see FIG. 44) based on the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number. be. The pre-determination information is as described above based on FIG. 19 (B) etc., and the pre-determination information is the same reservation storage as the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process Stored in the area.

In the gaming machine 1, each time a game ball wins the first start hole 21, the five pieces of information described with reference to FIG. · Stored in one of the first reserved storage area 831 to special figure 1/fourth reserved storage area 834. In addition, each time the game ball wins the second starting port 22, the above five information is, in order from special figure 2 first reservation storage area 835, special figure 2 first reservation storage area 835 to special figure 2 Stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 .

For example, information is stored in the determination storage area 830 and information is not stored in any of the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to special figure 1/fourth reservation storage area 834, the first When the game ball wins in the starting port 21, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired according to the win are stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831. Also, for example, in the first start port 21 in a state in which five pieces of information are stored in each of the judgment storage area 830, the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831, and the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 832 When the game ball wins, five pieces of information related to the newly acquired first special symbol determination are stored in the special figure 1/3rd reservation storage area 833 according to the win.

Also, when the information stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 is shifted to the determination storage area 830 when executing the first special symbol determination, the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 832 and later The information stored in the reserved storage area related to the first special symbol determination is shifted to the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 side. For example, the information stored in the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 with the information stored in each of the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 to special figure 1/third reserved storage area 833 When it is shifted to the judgment storage area 830, the information stored in the special figure 1/second reservation storage area 832 is shifted to the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831, Special figure 1/third reservation storage The information stored in the area 833 is shifted to the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 832 .

Such shift processing of information is performed in the same manner in the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special figure 2/fourth reservation storage area 838 in which the information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are reserved, that is, the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 and the special figure 2/first reservation If information is stored in both of the storage areas 835, prior to the shift process targeting the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 to special figure 1/fourth reserved storage area 834, the special figure 2/second 1 reserved storage area 835 to special figure 2 · 4th reserved storage area 838 for the shift processing is performed preferentially.

By the way, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 during the variable display of the special symbols or during the jackpot game and various random numbers are obtained, the special symbol determination and the variable display of the special symbols are not performed. cannot be done immediately. Therefore, when various random numbers are acquired under such circumstances, the main CPU 81 stores the acquired random numbers, etc. to 838. On the other hand, when the special symbols are not variably displayed, the determination of the special symbols is not suspended, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 81 receives various random numbers and the like as a result of winning the starting game. It stores directly in the judgment storage area 830 .

[Interrupt processing by main control board 80]
Next, interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80. FIG. The main control board 80 repeats the series of processes illustrated in FIG. 41 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. . It should be noted that the processing of the main control board 80, which will be described based on the flowcharts of FIG.

First, the main CPU 81 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers including jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and normal symbol random numbers (step S1). A jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a fluctuation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number are incremented by "1" each time the process of step S1 is performed. A loop counter is used as a counter for performing the processing of step S1, and each random number is reset to "0" and updated after reaching a preset maximum value.

Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers in response to input of detection signals from the first starter sensor 211, the second starter sensor 221, and the gate sensor 251. A sensor detection process including processing is executed (step S2). This sensor detection processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S2, the main CPU 81 executes special symbol determination, causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then determines the result of the special symbol determination. A special design process including a process of stopping and displaying a special design showing is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

Following the process of step S3, the main CPU 81 executes normal symbol determination, causes the normal symbol display 43 to variably display the normal symbol, and then stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. A normal design process is executed (step S4).

Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 81 controls the second starting port solenoid 222 for operating the opening/closing member 23 when it is determined to open the second starting port 22 as a result of the normal symbol determination. A second starting port opening/closing control process for opening and closing the second starting port 22 is executed (step S5).

Subsequent to the process of step S5, the main CPU 81 determines that it is a "jackpot" in the big win determination process executed in the special symbol process of step S3. A large winning opening opening/closing control process is executed to open and close the first large winning opening 26 (or the second large winning opening 28) by controlling the opening solenoid 282 (step S6). This special prize opening opening/closing control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG.

Following the processing of step S6, the main CPU 81 executes prize ball processing for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winning of game balls (step S7).

Following the processing of step S7, the main CPU 81 transmits to the sub-control board 90 various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 83 in the processing steps before step S7 and information necessary for determining the effect contents. Processing is executed (step S8).

[Sensor detection processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of sensor detection processing in step S2 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 42, following the random number update process in step S1, the main CPU 81 causes the gate sensor 251 to detect the passage of the game ball through the gate 25 based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate sensor 251. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step S201). Here, when it is determined that the gate sensor 251 has detected the passage of the game ball through the gate 25 (step S201: YES), the number F of pending normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is the preset normal It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum pending number Fmax ("4" in this embodiment) of symbol determination (step S202).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations F is less than "4" (step S202: YES), it updates the number of reservations F to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S203), and the random number update process of step S1 is performed. With respect to the normal symbol random number updated each time, the value of the timing when the passage of the game ball to the gate 25 is detected is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S204).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S204, when it determines that the gate sensor 251 has not detected passage of the game ball through the gate 25 (step S201: NO), the number of reservations F is less than "4". If it is determined that it is not (step S202: NO), the second starting hole sensor 221 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 22 based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 221. It is determined whether or not (step S206). Here, when it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 221 has detected the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 22 (step S206: YES), the second special symbol determination pending number T2 stored in the main RAM83 is less than the preset maximum number of reservations T2max ("4" in this embodiment) for second special symbol determination (step S207).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations T2 is less than "4" (step S207: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the number of reservations T2 by adding "1" (step S208), and the random number update process of step S1 is performed. With regard to the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number updated each time, the value of the timing at which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 is detected is obtained (step S209).

In this way, according to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the winning of the game ball to the second start port 22 is detected in a state where the number of reservations T2 is less than the maximum number of reservations T2max, various random numbers related to the second special symbol determination are generated. is obtained. In addition, when various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the judgment storage area 830 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are obtained in the situation, these random numbers are stored in any area of special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special figure 2/4th reservation storage area 838.

Following the process of step S209, the main CPU 81 executes a preliminary determination process (special 2 preliminary determination process) relating to suspension of the second special symbol determination (step S210). It should be noted that when the game ball wins the second starting port 22 in a state where the number of reservations T2 for the second special symbol determination is "0", neither during the jackpot game nor during the variable display of the special symbols, The acquired random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the second special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the second special symbol determination is not suspended, the special 2 preliminary determination process relating to the second special symbol determination is not performed. Such special 2 preliminary determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S210, the main CPU 81 sets a hold command relating to the second special symbol determination to the main RAM 83 (step S212). This pending command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination has been suspended, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmitting process of step S8. If the process of step S212 is performed without performing the special 2 preliminary determination process of step S210, a hold command that does not include the preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. FIG. On the other hand, when the process of step S212 is performed after the special 2 preliminary determination process of step S210 is performed, the pending command including the preliminary determination information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 by the process of step S210 is issued. It will be sent to the sub-control board 90 .

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S212 and determines that the second starting hole sensor 221 has not detected the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 22 (step S206: NO), the second starting hole sensor 221 When it is determined that the number of reservations T2 for special symbol determination is not less than "4" (step S207: NO), the first starting opening sensor 211 detects whether or not a detection signal is input from the first starting opening sensor 211. It is determined whether or not winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21 is detected (step S214). Here, when it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 211 has detected the winning of the game ball for the first starting opening 21 (step S214: YES), the number T1 of pending first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM83 is less than the preset maximum number of reservations T1max ("4" in this embodiment) for the first special symbol determination (step S215).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations T1 is less than "4" (step S215: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the number of reservations T1 by adding "1" (step S216), and the random number update process of step S1 is performed. With regard to the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number updated each time, the value of the timing at which the winning of the game ball to the first start port 21 is detected is obtained (step S217).

In this way, according to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the winning of the game ball to the first start port 21 is detected in a state where the number of reservations T1 is less than the maximum number of reservations T1max, various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination are generated. is obtained. In addition, when various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the judgment storage area 830 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are obtained in the situation, these random numbers are stored in any one of special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to special figure 1/4th reservation storage area 834.

Following the process of step S217, the main CPU 81 executes a special 1 preliminary determination process relating to suspension of the first special symbol determination (step S218). It should be noted that when the game ball wins the first start port 21 in a state where the holding number T1 of the first special symbol determination is "0", neither during the jackpot game nor during the variable display of the special symbol, The acquired random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the first special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the first special symbol determination is not suspended, the special 1 prior determination process relating to the first special symbol determination is not performed. Such special 1 preliminary determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S218, it sets a hold command related to the first special symbol determination to the main RAM 83 (step S220). This pending command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmitting process of step S8. If the process of step S220 is performed without performing the special 1 preliminary determination process of step S218, a pending command that does not include the preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. FIG. On the other hand, when the process of step S220 is performed after the special 1 preliminary determination process of step S218 is performed, the pending command including the preliminary determination information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 by the process of step S218 is issued. It is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 .

[Special 2 pre-determination process by main control board 80]
The Special 2 preliminary determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described below with reference to FIG. 43 . Here, FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the Special 2 prior determination process in step S210 of FIG.

Following the processing of step S209 in FIG. 42, the main CPU 81 stores the prize starting opening information (here, information indicating the second starting opening 22) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2100). Subsequently, based on the information indicating the game state stored in the main RAM 83, it is determined whether or not the current state is the high probability state (step S2101). Here, if it is determined that the current state is a high probability state (step S2101: YES), that is, if the current gaming state is "probability variable gaming state", the high probability special 2 prior determination jackpot random number The table is read out from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2102). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state (step S2101: NO), that is, if the current game state is "normal game state" or "time-saving game state", when the low probability, special 2 The big hit random number table for prior determination is read out from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2103).

In the high probability / special 2 prior determination jackpot random number table, as described above based on the column of "high probability state" in FIG. Random numbers of "4" to "13" are stored as "provisional winning random numbers", and random numbers of "14" to "839" are stored as "determined losing random numbers". On the other hand, in the low-probability/special 2 prior determination jackpot random number table, as described above based on the "low-probability state" column in FIG. are stored, random numbers of "4" to "13" are stored as "provisional failure random numbers", and random numbers of "14" to "839" are stored as "determined failure random numbers".

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S2102 or the process of step S2103, the main CPU 81 executes a jackpot random number type identification process (step S2104). This jackpot random number type specifying process is a process of specifying the type of the jackpot random number acquired by the process of step S209 in FIG.

When the main CPU 81 sets the high-probability/special 2 pre-determination jackpot random number table by the process of step S2102, the acquired jackpot random number is defined by the high-probability/special 2 pre-determination jackpot random number table. The type of the acquired jackpot random number is specified based on which random value matches with which one of the "definite winning random number", "temporary winning random number", and "determined losing random number". As is clear from the notation of FIG. 19 (A), in the high-probability / special 2 pre-judgment jackpot random number table, as described above, random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "hit confirmed random numbers". , "4" to "13" are stored as "tentative random numbers", and "14" to "839" are stored as "determined losing random numbers". The main CPU 81 compares the obtained jackpot random number with the random number value in the jackpot random number table for high probability/special 2 pre-determination, and provides the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matching random number as high probability/special 2 pre-determination. The type of jackpot is specified by reading from the jackpot random number table. For example, if the obtained jackpot random number is "3", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as "hit confirmed random number". Further, for example, if the obtained jackpot random number is "215", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as "determined loss random number".

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 sets the low-probability/Special 2 preliminary determination jackpot random number table by the process of step S2103, the acquired jackpot random number is defined by the low-probability/Special 2 preliminary determination jackpot random number table. The type of the acquired jackpot random number is specified based on which random value of the "determined winning random number", "temporary losing random number", and "determined losing random number" matches. As is clear from the notation of FIG. 19 (A), in the low-probability / special 2 pre-determination jackpot random number table, random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "hit confirmed random numbers", and "4" The random numbers from "13" to "13" are stored as "provisional failure random numbers", and the random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "determined failure random numbers". The main CPU 81 compares the obtained jackpot random number with the random number value in the jackpot random number table for low-probability/Special 2 pre-determination, and provides the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matched random number as low-probability/Special 2 pre-determination. The type of jackpot is specified by reading from the jackpot random number table. For example, if the obtained jackpot random number is "5", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as "temporary losing random number". Further, for example, if the obtained jackpot random number is "835", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as "determined loss random number".

Following the process of step S2104, the main CPU 81 stores the jackpot prior determination information in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2105). As is clear from the notation of FIG. 19A, when the jackpot random number type specified by the process of step S2104 is "hit confirmed random number", both the low probability state and the high probability state are "jackpot". "Hit decision information" indicating that the winning will be stored as the jackpot prior determination information. In addition, when the jackpot random number type specified by the processing in step S2104 is "loss confirmed random number", "loss confirmation information" indicating that "loss" occurs in both the low-probability state and high-probability state Store as pre-determination information. In addition, if the jackpot random number type specified by the processing in step S2104 is "temporary losing random number", it will be "losing" if it is held and digested in a low probability state, but after moving to a high probability state, it will be held and digested. Then, "provisional loss information" indicating that a "jackpot" will be achieved is stored as jackpot prior determination information. In addition, if the jackpot random number type specified by the process of step S2104 is "temporary hit random number", it will be "jackpot" if it is held and digested in a high probability state, but after moving to a low probability state, it will be held and digested. Then, "provisional win information" indicating "losing" is stored as big win prior determination information.

Subsequently, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the big-hit advance determination information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 by the process of step S2105 is "losing confirmation information" (step S2106). Here, if it is determined that the stored jackpot advance determination information is not "loss confirmation information" (step S2106: NO), that is, the stored jackpot advance determination information is "hit confirmation information", "temporary loss information", or In the case of "provisional win information", it is determined that a big win will occur, or there is a possibility that a big win will occur.

That is, when the main CPU 81 determines that the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is not the "losing confirmation information" (step S2106: NO), the main CPU 81 uses the second starting opening winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6C) as the main CPU 81. It is read from the ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2107), and the jackpot type identification process is executed (step S2108).

In the second starting entrance winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6 (C)), 80 random numbers are associated with "10R probability variation", and 10 random numbers correspond to "3R probability variation". 10 random numbers are associated with "3R normal". On the other hand, in step S2108, the main CPU 81 selects the jackpot type (jackpot type) corresponding to the random number that matches the symbol random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot random number type identification process in step S2104. By reading from the symbol determination table for the 2-start winning prize, the type of jackpot to be selected when it is determined to be a jackpot is specified. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 6(C), the jackpot type specified by the process of step S2108 is "10R probability variation", "3R probability variation", or "3R normal".

Next, the main CPU 81 stores information indicating the jackpot type specified by the process of step S2108 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 as jackpot type prior determination information (step S2109).

Subsequently, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the big-hit preliminary determination information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 by the process of step S2105 is "provisional losing information" (step S2110). Here, if it is determined that the stored jackpot advance determination information is not "temporary losing information" (step S2110: NO), that is, the stored jackpot advance determination information is "hit confirmation information" or "tentative hit information" In this case, for example, based on the information indicating the game state stored in the main RAM 83, it is determined whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S2111).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S2111: YES), that is, when the probability variable gaming state or the time saving gaming state, the special 2 jackpot variation pattern selection table in the high base state The data is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2112). Conversely, if it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S2111: NO), that is, if it is a normal game state, the variation pattern selection table for special 2 jackpots in the low base state is read from the main ROM 82 It is set in the main RAM 83 (step S2113).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot advance judgment information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 by the process of step S2105 is "losing confirmation information" (step S2106: YES), or the stored jackpot advance judgment information is "provisional loss information" (step S2110: YES), it is determined whether the current state is the high base state (step S2114), similarly to the processing of step S2111.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S2114: YES), the main CPU 81 reads the special 2 losing variation pattern selection table in the high base state from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2115). ). Conversely, if it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S2114: NO), the special 2 losing variation pattern selection table in the low base state is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2116). .

When the variation pattern selection table is set by the processing of step S2112, the processing of step S2113, the processing of step S2115, or the processing of step S2116, the main CPU 81 executes special 2 variation pattern specifying processing (step S2117). Specifically, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is specified by reading from the variation pattern selection table in which the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the processing of step S2104 is set. Then, the special 2 variation pattern information indicating the specified variation pattern of the second special symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2118), and the game state information indicating the current game state is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83. (Step S2119).

By executing the series of processes shown in FIG. 43, the various types of pre-determination information described above based on FIG. It is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 included in the reserved command relating to the reserved right of the second special symbol determination.

[Special 1 pre-determination process by main control board 80]
The special 1 pre-determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the special 1 prior determination process in step S218 of FIG.

Following the processing of step S217 in FIG. 42, the main CPU 81 stores the prize starting opening information (here, information indicating the first starting opening 21) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2180). Subsequently, similarly to the processing of step S2101 in FIG. 43, it is determined whether or not the current state is the high-probability state (step S2181). Here, if it is determined that the current state is a high probability state (step S2181: YES), that is, if the current gaming state is "probability variable gaming state", the high probability time special 1 prior determination jackpot random number The table is read out from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2182). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state (step S2181: NO), that is, if the current game state is "normal game state" or "time-saving game state", low probability time special 1 The big hit random number table for prior determination is read out from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2183).

In the high probability / special 1 prior determination jackpot random number table, as described above based on the column of "high probability state" in FIG. Random numbers of "4" to "13" are stored as "provisional winning random numbers", and random numbers of "14" to "839" are stored as "determined losing random numbers". On the other hand, in the low-probability / special 1 prior determination jackpot random number table, as described above based on the "low-probability state" column in FIG. are stored, random numbers of "4" to "13" are stored as "provisional failure random numbers", and random numbers of "14" to "839" are stored as "determined failure random numbers".

When the process of step S2182 is executed, or when the process of step S2183 is executed, the main CPU 81 executes a jackpot random number type specifying process (step S2184). This jackpot random number type specifying process is a process of specifying the type of the jackpot random number acquired by the process of step S217 in FIG.

When the main CPU 81 sets the high-probability/Special 1 preliminary determination jackpot random number table by the process of step S2182, the acquired jackpot random number is specified by the high-probability/Special 1 preliminary determination jackpot random number table. The type of the acquired jackpot random number is specified based on which random value matches with which one of the "definite winning random number", "temporary winning random number", and "determined losing random number". As is clear from the notation of FIG. 19 (A), in the high-probability / special 1 prior determination jackpot random number table, as described above, random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "hit confirmed random numbers". , "4" to "13" are stored as "tentative random numbers", and "14" to "839" are stored as "determined losing random numbers". The main CPU 81 compares the obtained jackpot random number with the random number value in the jackpot random number table for high probability/Special 1 pre-determination, and provides the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matching random number as high probability/Special 1 pre-determination. The type of jackpot is specified by reading from the jackpot random number table. For example, if the obtained jackpot random number is "1", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as "hit confirmed random number". Further, for example, if the obtained jackpot random number is "11", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as "tentative random number".

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 sets the jackpot random number table for low probability/special 1 preliminary determination by the process of step S2183, the acquired jackpot random number is defined by the low probability/special 1 preliminary determination jackpot random number table. The type of the acquired jackpot random number is specified based on which random value of the "determined winning random number", "temporary losing random number", and "determined losing random number" matches. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19 (A), in the low-probability / special 1 prior determination jackpot random number table, random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "hit confirmed random numbers", and "4" The random numbers from "13" to "13" are stored as "provisional failure random numbers", and the random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "determined failure random numbers". The main CPU 81 compares the obtained jackpot random number with the random number value in the jackpot random number table for low-probability/special 1 pre-determination, and provides the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matching random value as low-probability/special 1 pre-determination. The type of jackpot is specified by reading from the jackpot random number table. For example, if the obtained jackpot random number is "12", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as "temporary losing random number". Further, for example, if the obtained jackpot random number is "96", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as "determined loss random number".

Following the process of step S2184, the main CPU 81 stores the jackpot prior determination information in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2185). As is clear from the notation of FIG. 19(A), when the jackpot random number type specified by the process of step S2184 is "hit confirmed random number", both the low-probability state and the high-probability state are "jackpot". "Hit decision information" indicating that the winning will be stored as the jackpot prior determination information. In addition, when the type of the jackpot random number specified by the processing in step S2184 is the "determined loss random number", the "determined loss information" indicating that it is "losing" in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state Store as pre-determination information. In addition, if the jackpot random number type specified by the process of step S2184 is "temporary losing random number", it will be "losing" if it is held and digested in a low probability state, but after moving to a high probability state, it will be held and digested. Then, "provisional loss information" indicating that a "jackpot" will be achieved is stored as jackpot prior determination information. In addition, if the jackpot random number type specified by the process of step S2184 is "temporary hit random number", it will be "jackpot" if it is held and digested in a high probability state, but after shifting to a low probability state, it will be held and digested. Then, "provisional win information" indicating "losing" is stored as big win prior determination information.

Subsequently, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the big-hit advance determination information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 by the process of step S2185 is "losing confirmation information" (step S2186). Here, if it is determined that the stored jackpot advance determination information is not "loss confirmation information" (step S2186: NO), that is, the stored jackpot advance determination information is "hit confirmation information", "temporary loss information", or In the case of "provisional win information", it is determined that a big win will occur, or there is a possibility that a big win will occur.

That is, when the main CPU 81 determines that the stored jackpot advance determination information is not the "losing confirmation information" (step S2186: NO), the main CPU 81 uses the first starting opening winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6B) as the main CPU 81. It is read from the ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2187), and the jackpot type identification process is executed (step S2188).

In the first starting entrance winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6 (B)), 50 random numbers are associated with "5R probability variation", and 50 random numbers are associated with "5R normal". attached. On the other hand, in step S2188, the main CPU 81 selects the jackpot type (jackpot type) corresponding to the random number matching the symbol random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot random number type identification process in step S2184. By reading from the symbol determination table for 1-start winning, the type of jackpot to be selected when it is determined to be a jackpot is specified. As is clear from the description in FIG. 6(B), the jackpot type specified by the process of step S2188 is "5R probability variation" or "5R normal".

Next, the main CPU 81 stores information indicating the jackpot type specified by the process of step S2188 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 as jackpot type prior determination information (step S2189).

Subsequently, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the big-hit advance determination information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 by the process of step S2185 is "provisional losing information" (step S2190). Here, if it is determined that the stored jackpot advance determination information is not "temporary losing information" (step S2190: NO), that is, the stored jackpot advance determination information is "hit confirmation information" or "tentative hit information" If so, it is determined whether the current state is the high base state (step S2191).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S2191: YES), that is, when the probability variable gaming state or the time saving gaming state, the variation pattern selection table for special 1 jackpot in the high base state The data is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2192). Conversely, if it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S2191: NO), that is, if it is a normal game state, read out from the main ROM 82 the variation pattern selection table for special 1 jackpot in the low base state. It is set in the main RAM 83 (step S2193).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot advance judgment information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 by the process of step S2185 is "losing confirmation information" (step S2186: YES), or the stored jackpot advance judgment information is "provisional loss information" (step S2190: YES), it is determined whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S2194).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S2194: YES), the main CPU 81 reads the special 1 losing variation pattern selection table in the high base state from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2195). ). Conversely, if it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S2194: NO), the special 1 losing variation pattern selection table in the low base state is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2196). .

When the variation pattern selection table is set by the processing of step S2192, the processing of step S2193, the processing of step S2195, or the processing of step S2196, the main CPU 81 executes special 1 variation pattern specifying processing (step S2197). Specifically, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is specified by reading from the variation pattern selection table in which the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the processing of step S2184 is set. Then, special 1 variation pattern information indicating the specified variation pattern of the first special symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2198), and game state information indicating the current game state is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83. (Step S2199).

By executing the series of processes shown in FIG. 44, the various types of pre-determination information described above based on FIG. , is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 included in the pending command relating to the right of the reserved first special symbol determination.

[Special symbol processing by main control board 80]
Next, details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 45 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG.

As illustrated in FIG. 45, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" ( step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game, and set to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not being performed (step S301: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed (step S302). Here, if it is determined that the special symbols are not displayed in a variable display (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number T2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or more. (step S303). Here, when it is determined that the number of reservations T2 is equal to or greater than "1" (step S303: YES), the number of reservations T2 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S304).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations T2 is not "1" or more (step S303: NO), whether or not the number of reservations T1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or more. (step S305). Here, when it is determined that the number of reservations T1 is equal to or greater than "1" (step S305: YES), the number of reservations T1 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S306).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 81 executes the shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 83 (step S307). Specifically, when the process of step S307 is executed following the process of step S304, the information stored in the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 is shifted to the determination storage area 830. Execute the shift process do. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage area after the special figure 2 second reserved storage area 836, shift processing to shift these information to the special figure 2 first reserved storage area 835 side are also executed. On the other hand, when executing the shift processing following the processing of step S306, the shift processing for shifting the information stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the determination storage area 830 is executed. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage area after the special figure 1 second reserved storage area 832, shift processing to shift these information to the special figure 1 first reserved storage area 831 side are also executed.

When the main CPU 81 stores information necessary for second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination), such as jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers, in the determination storage area 830 by the shift processing in step S307, based on these information, , the big hit determination process of step S308 and the variation pattern selection process of step S309 are executed.

It should be noted that the first start of the game ball is not during the jackpot game nor during the variable display of the special symbols, and both the number of reservations T1 for the first special symbol determination and the number of reservations T2 for the second special symbol determination are "0". When winning the opening 21 (or the second starting opening 22 ), information such as the jackpot random number and the symbol random number obtained in accordance with the winning is directly stored in the determination storage area 830 . In such a case, the big hit determination process and the variation pattern selection process are executed without executing the shift process of step S307.

The main CPU 81 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S308). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred, and when it is determined that a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern) is determined. Then, setting information of special symbols indicating the results of these processes is set in the main RAM 83 . This jackpot determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the jackpot determination process of step S308, the main CPU 81 executes a variation pattern selection process of selecting a variation pattern of special symbols (step S309). This variation pattern selection process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S309, the main CPU 81 determines whether the special symbol setting information set in the process of step S308, whether this special symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or to the second special symbol determination. A change start command including information indicating whether the change is relevant, setting information of the change pattern selected in the process of step S309, information regarding the game state of the gaming machine 1, etc. is set in the main RAM 83 (step S310). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the effect associated with the variation display of the special symbols, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8. As a result, the variable effect including the variable display of the effect symbols on the display screen 70 is started.

Following the processing of step S310, the main CPU 81 starts variable display of special symbols based on the setting information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command set in the processing of step S310 (step S311). At that time, when the processing of steps S308 to S310 is performed in a state in which the information related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 830, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 41 start to change display. On the other hand, when the processing of steps S308 to S310 is performed in a state in which the information relating to the second special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 830, the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 42 Start variable display.

Next, the main CPU 81 starts measuring the elapsed time after starting the variable display of the special symbols in step S311 (step S312). When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S312, or determines that the special symbols are being changed and displayed (step S302: YES), the elapsed time when measurement is started in the process of step S312 is changed to that of step S309. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the pattern selection process has been reached (step S313). Here, when it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached the fluctuation time (step S313: NO), the process proceeds to the normal design process of step S4.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the elapsed time has reached the fluctuation time (step S313: YES), it sets a fluctuation end command for notifying the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbols in the main RAM 83 (step S314). This fluctuation end command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing in step S8. As a result, a process of stopping and displaying the performance symbols that have been variably displayed on the display screen 70 in a manner indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is performed.

Following the process of step S314, the main CPU 81 terminates the variable display of the special symbols started in the process of step S311 (step S315). Specifically, the special symbol (big win symbol or losing symbol) set in the process of step S308 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device which has been variably displaying the special symbol. It should be noted that the stop display of this special symbol is continued until at least a predetermined symbol determination time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses.

In this way, the main CPU 81 variably displays the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42, and then displays the special symbols (big winning symbols or losing symbols) indicating the judgment result of the big winning judging process. The first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed.

Following the process of step S315, the main CPU 81 resets the elapsed time that started to be measured in the process of step S312 (step S316), and when the special figure is stopped, including the process of starting the jackpot game in the case of a jackpot, etc. Processing is executed (step S317). This special figure stop processing will be described later in detail based on FIG.

[Big Win Determination Processing by Main Control Board 80]
FIG. 46 is a detailed flowchart of the big hit determination process in step S308 of FIG. The main CPU 81 first executes a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S3081). Specifically, whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 830 matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6A) is used to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. judge. The winning value here is the winning value of the jackpot defined in the high-probability jackpot random number table or the low-probability jackpot random number table. When the jackpot determination is executed in a high probability state (corresponding to "probability variable gaming state" in this embodiment), the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table for high probability is used. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination is executed in the low probability state ("normal game state" and "time saving game state" correspond to this in this embodiment), it is stored in the jackpot random number table for low probability. winning value is used.

In this way, the main CPU 81 stores in the determination storage area 830 the acquired information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

Following the processing of step S3081, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the determination result of the big win determination is "big win" (step S3082). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the big win determination is not "big win" (step S3082: NO), that is, when the determination result of the big win determination is "losing", setting information of the losing pattern is set in the main RAM 83. (Step S3083). As a result, during the process of step S315, the lost symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display . In this case, the jackpot game is not performed.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (step S3082: YES), the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42 are displayed. is executed (step S3084). Specifically, when the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 830 together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3081 relates to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is , one of the jackpot symbols is selected based on which jackpot symbol random value specified in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 6B) for the first start opening prize matches. In this case, one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 exemplified in FIG. 6B is selected. Further, when the symbol random number relates to the second special symbol determination, it is determined which jackpot symbol random value specified in the symbol determination table for the second starting opening prize matches the symbol random number. Based on that, select one of the jackpot symbols. In this case, one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 exemplified in FIG. 6(C) is selected.

Then, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected jackpot symbol in the main RAM 83 (step S3085). As a result, at the time of the processing of step S315, the jackpot pattern set here is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device 41 or the second special pattern display device 42, and then the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot pattern is played. will take place.

[Variation pattern selection processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. After executing the big win determination process in step S308 of FIG. 45, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the determination result in step S3081 is a big win (step S3091). Here, when it is determined to be a big hit (step S3091: YES), the big hit variation pattern selection table is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3092).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3091: NO), the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM . corresponding random number), it is determined whether or not to perform a ready-to-win effect that makes the player expect a big win (step S3093). Here, if it is determined that the ready-to-win effect is to be performed (step S3093: YES), the change pattern selection table for reach-losing is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3094). Conversely, if it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S3093: NO), the change pattern selection table for no reach loss is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3095).

The main CPU 81 refers to the variation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 by the processing of step S3092, the processing of step S3094, or the processing of step S3095, and executes variation pattern random number determination processing (step S3096). Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern selection table or the reach loss variation pattern selection table is set in the main RAM 83, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the judgment storage area 830 is set. Select one variation pattern by reading from the variation pattern selection table. Also, when the reach-less loss variation pattern selection table is set in the main RAM 83, based on the number of reservations T1 for the first special symbol determination (or the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination T2) stored in the main RAM 83 One variation pattern is selected by specifying the number of reservations and reading the variation pattern corresponding to the specified number of reservations from the fluctuation pattern selection table for reach-less loss. By selecting the special symbol variation pattern in this manner, the special symbol variation time is inevitably determined.

When the variation pattern is selected, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 83 (step S3097). The variation pattern setting information is included in the variation start command and sent to the sub-control board 90 together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 83 by the big win determination process of step S308.

[Special figure stop processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 48 is a detailed flowchart of the special figure stop processing in step S317 of FIG. After resetting the elapsed time by the process of step S316, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (step S3171). Here, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S3171: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S3172).

Next, the main CPU 81 sets the variable probability game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3173), and similarly sets the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3174). ). Here, the probability variation game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination is a relatively high high probability state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by setting the variable probability gaming flag and the time saving gaming flag. That is, when controlling the gaming state to the "variable probability gaming state", both the variable probability gaming flag and the time saving gaming flag are set to "ON". Moreover, when controlling the game state to the "normal game state", both the probability variation game flag and the time saving game flag are set to "OFF". Further, when the game state is controlled to the "time saving game state", the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" and the time saving game flag is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S3174, the main CPU 81 sets an opening command for notifying that the jackpot game will start in the main RAM 83 (step S3175). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the first jackpot 26 (or the second jackpot 28 or the V jackpot 287) during the jackpot game. is sent to the sub-control board 90 by.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3171: NO), it determines whether or not the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176). Here, when it is determined that the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), that is, when the special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state, the high probability stored in the main RAM 83 The remaining number of games K is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3177). This high-probability game remaining number K indicates the remaining number of times special symbol determination is executed in a high-probability state.

Following the process of step S3177, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the remaining number of high-probability games K is "0" (step S3178). Here, when it is determined that the high probability game remaining number K is "0" (step S3178: YES), the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3179). As a result, special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state.

If the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S3179, if it determines that the variable probability game flag is not set to "ON" (step S3176: NO), or if the high probability game remaining number K is not "0" When determined (step S3178: NO), it is determined whether or not the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180). Here, if it is determined that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180: YES), the remaining time saving game count J stored in the main RAM 83 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3181). This time-saving game remaining number J indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the time-saving state (high base state).

Following the process of step S3181, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the remaining time saving game count J is "0" (step S3182). Here, if it is determined that the remaining number of time saving games J is "0" (step S3182: YES), the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3183). As a result, the support function for facilitating the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 22 is no longer provided.

[Grand Prize Opening/Closing Control Processing by Main Control Board 80]
49 to 51 are detailed flowcharts of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 49, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S601), as illustrated in FIG. ). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game flag is not set to "ON" (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the winning ball process of step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S601: YES), for example, after setting the opening command related to the jackpot game by the process of step S3175 (see FIG. 48), Based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not it is during the opening period of the jackpot game (step S602).

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is during the opening period of the jackpot game (step S602: YES), it determines whether or not the opening time has passed (step S603). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not passed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the winning ball process of step S7. On the other hand, when determining that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax of the jackpot game, the operation pattern, etc., and stores the setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S604). . Specifically, the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax based on the opening patterns of the big winning holes in each jackpot illustrated in FIGS. Operation patterns of the opening/closing member 27, the opening/closing member 29, and the sliding member 285 are set so that the 2nd prize winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened in accordance with the opening pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot.

By executing the process of step S604, various times related to the jackpot game such as the interval time which is the time from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game, the ending time after the end of the final round game, etc. are set together.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S604, the main CPU 81 updates the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 by adding "1" (step S605). This round number R is set to "0" before the jackpot game is started, and is updated to a value incremented by "1" each time the process of step S605 is performed.

Following the process of step S605, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of rounds R updated in the process of step S605 is "1" (step S606). In this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 6(B) and (C), for all jackpots, the second big winning port 28 is used for the round game of the first round, and the The first big prize winning port 26 is used for the round game. Therefore, when the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R is "1" (step S606: YES), the second big winning opening solenoid 282 (and the V winning opening solenoid 286) 28 (and the V winning opening 287) is started to open and close (step S607). Then, a second big winning hole opening/closing round game start command for notifying that a round game for opening and closing the second big winning hole 28 is started is set in the main RAM 83 (step S808).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R updated in the process of step S605 is not "1" (step S606: NO), that is, when the number of rounds R is "2" or more, the main CPU 81 First big winning opening opening/closing control for controlling opening/closing of first big winning opening 26 via winning opening solenoid 262 is started (step S609).

Following the process of step S609, the main CPU 81 sets in the main RAM 83 a first big winning opening opening/closing round game start command for notifying that a round game for opening and closing the first big winning opening 26 will start (step S610). ).

It should be noted that the second large winning opening opening/closing round game start command set in the processing of step S608 and the first large winning opening opening/closing round game start command set in the processing of step S610 are transmitted by the transmission processing of step S8 in FIG. , is sent to the sub-control board 90 .

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines in the process of step S602 that it is not during the opening period of the jackpot game (step S602: NO), it determines whether it is during the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613). Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is during the ending period based on whether or not the elapsed time from the end of the round game of the final round in the jackpot game has reached a predetermined ending time. Here, if it is determined that it is in the ending period (step S613: YES), the process proceeds to step S626 (see FIG. 51) to be described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is not during the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613: NO), for example, based on whether a predetermined interval time has passed since the previous round game ended, during the interval period (step S614). Here, if it is determined that it is not during the interval period (step S614: NO), the process proceeds to step S617 (see FIG. 50), which will be described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is in the interval period (step S614: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the interval time set in the process of step S604 has elapsed since the previous round game ended. (Step S615). Here, when it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S615: NO), the processing proceeds to the winning ball processing of step S7. Conversely, if it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S615: YES), the above-described processing from step S605 onwards is executed.

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is not during the interval period (step S614: NO), that is, when the round game is being played, as illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S617). Specifically, after executing the process of step S607, the first end condition regarding the opening and closing control of the second large winning opening 28 that a predetermined number of game balls win from the start of opening of the second large winning opening 28, Based on whether neither of the second termination conditions relating to the opening/closing control of the second big prize winning port 28, that is, a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the start of opening the second big prize winning port 28 is satisfied. , determines whether or not the second big winning port 28 is open. If neither the first end condition nor the second end condition is satisfied, it can be determined that the second big winning hole 28 is being opened. Here, if it is determined that the second big winning hole 28 is not being opened (step S617: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the second big winning hole 28 is being opened (step S616: YES), the game ball moves to the V winning hole 287 based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the V winning hole sensor 283. is passed (step S618). Here, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening 287 (step S618: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 287 (step S618: YES), it sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "ON" (step S619). This V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 287 (that is, whether or not the game ball has won a V prize). When the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283, it is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S619, the main CPU 81 sets a V winning command for notifying that the game ball has won a V prize in the main RAM 83 (step S620).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S620, determines that the second big winning opening 28 is not open (step S617: NO), or determines that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening 287. If so (step S618: NO), it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing control started in the process of step S607 (or the first big winning opening opening/closing control started in the process of step S609) has ended ( step S621). Here, when it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing control has not ended (step S621: NO), the processing proceeds to the prize ball processing of step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the opening/closing control of the big winning opening has ended (step S621: YES), does the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 match the number of rounds Rmax set in the process of step S604? It is determined whether or not (step S622). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: NO), the process proceeds to the winning ball process of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: YES), the main CPU 81 starts measuring the ending time, which is the elapsed time from the start of the ending period (step S623). An ending command for notifying the start is set in the main RAM 83 (step S624). This ending command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process of step S8.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines in the process of step S613 in FIG. 49 that it is in the ending period (step S613: YES), it determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed, as illustrated in FIG. (Step S626). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the ending time started to be measured in the process of step S623 has reached the ending time set in the process of step S604. Here, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S626: NO), the process proceeds to the winning ball process of step S7.

When determining that the ending time has elapsed (step S626: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S627). Here, when it is determined that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S627: YES), the variable probability game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S628), and the main RAM 83 51 is set to "100" (step S629), and the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "OFF" (not shown in FIG. 51). .

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S629 or determines that the V winning flag is not set to "ON" (step S627: NO), the main CPU 81 sets the time saving game flag to "ON" (step S630). Then, the time-saving game remaining number J is set to "100" (step S631), the jackpot game flag is set to "OFF", and a series of processes is terminated (step S632).

[Interrupt processing by sub-control board 90]
When the game machine 1 is powered on, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90 sets an interrupt period, which is a period for performing interrupt processing, which will be described later. Then, the sub CPU 91 repeats a random number update process for updating the effect random number or the like used for determining the contents of the effect at a predetermined cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle. That is, while the gaming machine 1 is running, the sub CPU 91 repeats the random number update process at predetermined intervals and repeats the interrupt process at the interrupt period.

The interrupt processing executed in the sub-control board 90 will be described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the sub-control board 90. FIG. The sub CPU 91 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 52 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the same manner as the interrupt process performed by the main control board 80 (see FIG. 41). The processing performed by the sub-control board 90, which will be described based on the flowcharts of FIG.

When the sub CPU 91 receives a command from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 first executes command reception processing for performing processing according to the command (step S10). This command reception processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S10, the sub CPU 91 executes an operation reception process for performing a process according to the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1 (step S30). This operation reception processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. FIG.

The sub CPU 91 executes command transmission processing following the processing of step S30 (step S40). Specifically, the command set in the sub-RAM 93 by the command reception process in step S10 or the operation reception process in step S30 is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120). By executing this command transmission process, the image sound control board 100 is instructed to execute effects such as image display and output of effects sounds, and lighting of various lamps and execution of effects by movable accessories and the like are executed by the lamps. Instructions are given to the control board 120 .

Following the processing of step S40, the sub CPU 91 executes data transfer processing (step S50). Specifically, since data relating to image sound control is transmitted from the image sound control board 100 , the data is transferred to the lamp control board 120 . As a result, the lamp control board 120 controls the rendering by the rendering means such as the frame lamp 37 , the board lamp 5 , the movable decorative member 14 and the like so as to synchronize with the rendering performed by the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 .

[Command Reception Processing by Sub Control Board 90]
FIG. 53 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S11). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30 described above.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that it has received a command from the main control board 80 (step S11: YES), the command is sent from the main control board 80 in accordance with the processing of step S212 or step S220 of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a reserved command (step S12). Here, if it is determined that the command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S15, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes hold command reception processing (step S13). This pending command reception process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the pending command (step S12: NO), is the command the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the process of step S310 of FIG. 45? It is determined whether or not (step S15). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not the variation start command (step S15: NO), the process proceeds to step S17, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is the variation start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes variation start command reception processing (step S16). This fluctuation start command reception processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the variation start command (step S15: NO), the command is the variation end command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the process of step S314 of FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S17). When the sub CPU 91 determines that it is a variation end command (step S17: YES), it ends the variable display of the performance symbols and stops the performance symbols in a manner indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation. A change effect end command instructing execution of the process to be displayed is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S18).

A special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process of step S40. is stopped on the first special symbol display device 41 (or the second special symbol display device 42), the production symbol showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed on the display screen. 70 will be stopped and displayed.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the fluctuation end command (step S17: NO), whether the command is the opening command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the process of step S3175 in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S19). Here, when it is determined that the received command is an opening command (step S19: YES), an image is displayed to start an opening effect in which the type of jackpot is notified and the player is urged to hit right during the opening period of the jackpot game. An opening effect start command for instructing the sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S20).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the opening command (step S19: NO), it determines whether or not the command is the round game start command (step S21). That is, the second big winning opening opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S608 in FIG. 49, or the command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S610 in FIG. It is determined whether or not a command for starting the first big winning opening opening/closing round game has been received.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is the round game start command (step S21: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes round game start command reception processing for performing processing according to the received round game start command (step S22). .

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the round game start command (step S21: NO), the command is the V winning command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the process of step S620 in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S23). Here, when it is determined that the received command is a V winning command (step S23: YES), a V winning command receiving process is executed for processing according to the V winning command (step S24). Specifically, a V winning notification command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the image sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to execute the V winning notification effect illustrated in FIG.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the V winning command (step S23: NO), it instructs the image sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to execute a predetermined ending effect. An ending command reception process including a process of setting an ending effect start command in the sub-RAM 93 is executed (step S25). By transmitting the ending effect start command set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S25 to the image sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120), the mode selection promotion effect described above is executed.

[Hold command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step S13 of FIG. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a pending command (step S12: YES), as illustrated in FIG. updated to the new value (step S130). Specifically, when the pending command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the number of pending of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1", and the pending command related to the second special symbol determination is When it is received, it is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" to the pending number of the second special symbol determination.

Following the process of step S131, the sub CPU 91 stores the advance determination information included in the received hold command in the sub RAM 93 (step S131). Next, the sub CPU 91 acquires an icon change effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S132). This icon change effect random number is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the pending command as the icon change effect random number. Then, an icon change effect lottery is executed based on the acquired change effect random number (step S133). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the obtained random number for change effect matches any of the random numbers related to the random number for icon change effect stored in advance in the sub ROM 92 .

Although not shown in the figure, in the sub ROM 92, the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the random number value related to the icon change effect random number are associated. table is stored. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table, and the acquired icon change effect random number is the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the first special symbol determination specified from the advance determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S134. Whether or not to execute the icon change effect is determined based on whether or not it matches with any of the random numbers associated with the variation pattern. In addition, in this table, more random number values are associated with "big win" than with "losing" with respect to the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination. Also, the longer the variation time of the first special symbol is, the more random numbers are associated with the variation pattern. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the higher the reliability of the big win, the easier it is to execute the icon change effect. Conversely, the lower the reliability of the big win, the more difficult it is to execute the icon change effect.

The sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on the lottery result of step S133 (step S134). Here, when it is determined not to execute the icon change effect (step S134: NO), a pending icon display command is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S135). In this way, when the process proceeds to step S135 following step S134, a hold command that does not include icon change effect pattern information is set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S135, and the image sound control board 100 (and the lamp is sent to the control board 120). In this case, although the pending icon is displayed based on the pending command, the icon change effect using this pending icon is not performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the icon change effect (step S134: YES), the jackpot prior determination information among the prior determination information included in the pending icon received this time is "provisional losing information". It is determined whether or not (step S137). Here, when it is determined that the big-hit prior determination information is not "provisional loss information" (step S137: NO), it is determined whether or not the big-hit prior determination information is "loss confirmation information" (step S138).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the big win advance determination information is "loss confirmation information" (step S138: YES), the sub CPU 91 reads the icon change effect pattern selection table for loss from the sub ROM 92 and sets it in the sub RAM 93 (step S139). . On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot prior determination information is not "loss confirmation information" (step S138: NO), that is, if the jackpot prior determination information is "hit confirmation information" or "temporary winning information", the jackpot icon The change effect pattern selection table is read out from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S139). Then, when it is determined that the big hit prior determination information is "provisional loss information" (step S137: YES), the icon change effect pattern selection table for provisional loss is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S141).

When any icon change effect pattern selection table is set by the process of step S139, the process of step S140, or the process of step S141, the sub CPU 91 executes icon change effect pattern selection process (step S142). In the icon change effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93, a random number value is associated with each of a plurality of icon change effect patterns. In the process of step S142, the sub CPU 91 reads out the icon change effect pattern corresponding to the random number value that matches the icon change effect random number acquired in the process of step S132 from the icon change effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93. By doing so, one effect pattern of the icon change effect is selected. Then, the icon change effect pattern information indicating the effect pattern of the selected icon change effect is stored in the sub-RAM 93 (step S143), and the process of step S135 is executed.

In this way, when the process of step S135 is executed following the process of step S143, the sub CPU 91 stores the pending icon display command including the icon change effect pattern information stored in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S143 as a predetermined value in the sub RAM 93. Set to area.

The pending icon display command set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S135 is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process of step S40. On the other hand, if the received pending icon display command contains icon change effect pattern information, the image sound control CPU 101 of the image sound control board 100 uses the icon change effect pattern information as setting information for the icon change effect. The setting information is stored in the control RAM 103, and based on this setting information, the VDP 104 and the audio DSP 107 are instructed to execute the processing necessary for realizing the icon change effect.

When the icon change effect pattern selection table for losing and the icon change effect pattern selection table for big wins are compared, it is better to select an icon change effect pattern based on the latter table than to select an icon change effect pattern based on the former table. Compared with the case of selecting a change effect pattern, there is a feature that the final display mode of the icon is easily changed to a higher-level display mode. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect may be executed in which the display color of the icon changes in order from white, which is the default display color, to blue, green, and red. When the icon change effect pattern is selected, the icon display color tends to change to green or red in the end, whereas when the icon change effect pattern is selected based on the latter table, the icon display color seldom changes to red in the end, and the icon display color tends to change only to blue or green in many cases.

On the other hand, the icon change effect pattern selection table for temporary losing stores icon change effect patterns for realizing the icon change effect related to the special figure 1 third reserve explained based on FIG. In addition, receiving a hold command containing "provisional loss information" means that a jackpot random number etc. is acquired in a low probability state, and if special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state, it is determined as "loss". However, when the special symbol determination is executed after shifting from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, it means that it is determined as a "jackpot". For this reason, in the temporary losing icon change effect pattern selection table, for example, under the situation shown in FIG. An icon change effect pattern for executing the icon change effect after the game state is set to "probability variable game state" at the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special figure 1 first reservation without executing the target icon change effect. is stored.

In the present embodiment, when a hold command including "win confirmation information" or "provisional win information" is received, an icon change effect pattern is selected by referring to the big win icon change effect pattern selection table. On the other hand, when receiving a hold command containing "provisional failure information", an example will be described in which an icon change effect pattern is selected by referring to another table, the icon change effect pattern selection table for temporary loss.

On the other hand, in other embodiments, not only when a hold command containing "hit confirmation information" or "provisional hit information" is received, but also when a hold command containing "provisional loss information" is received, An icon change effect pattern may be selected by referring to a big win icon change effect pattern selection table.

[Special Figure 2 Reservation Jackpot Suggestion Effect Processing by Sub Control Board 90]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart exemplifying the special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect process. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, on the condition that the reserved second special symbol determination right includes the one to be determined as "big win", the third round in the big win game It is configured to be able to execute the special figure 2 holding big hit suggestion effect (see FIG. 22) during the round game. The processing executed by the sub CPU 91 in order to execute this special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect is as follows.

That is, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the third round game is started based on whether or not the third round game start command is received from the main control board 80 after the jackpot game is started. (step S2301). Here, when it is determined that the round game of the third round is not started (step S2301: NO), the special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect process is terminated, and the process is returned to step S2301.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the third round game is started (step S2301: YES), it determines whether the sub RAM 93 stores special 2 preliminary determination information (step S2302). Here, the special 2 pre-determination information is not stored, that is, when it is determined that the right of the second special symbol determination is not reserved (step S2302: NO), the special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect processing Upon completion, the process returns to step S2301.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the sub RAM 93 stores the special 2 preliminary determination information (step S2302: YES), the V prize transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S620 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (step S2303). Specifically, for example, when a V winning command has been received, V winning command reception information indicating this is stored in the sub-RAM 93, and whether or not this V winning command reception information is stored in the sub RAM 93 is determined. Based on, it is determined whether or not the V winning command has been received.

Here, if the V winning command has been received, the process of steps S628 and 629 in FIG. Symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is executed. Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the V winning command has been received (step S2303: YES), it sets the provisional high accuracy flag stored in the sub RAM 93 to ON (step S2304). This provisional high probability flag is for performing subsequent processing assuming that the high probability state is reached in the case where the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. flag.

The special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect process illustrated in FIG. 55 is performed at the start of the third round round game in the jackpot game. That is, the special figure 2 pending big hit suggestion effect process is a process performed when the state related to the special symbol determination is the "low probability state". Then, when the game ball wins V during the first round game in the jackpot game, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the probability variable game state at the end of the jackpot game, that is, from the low probability state to the high probability state. In order to shift to the state, if the state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high probability state, at the start of the third round round game, it is assumed that it has become a high probability state (temporary high certainty flag is set to ON) and the subsequent processing is performed.

As described above, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the V winning command has been received (step S2303: YES), the sub CPU 91 sets the provisional high accuracy flag to ON by the process of step S2304. In addition, even if this jackpot game is triggered by a "normal jackpot" or during a jackpot game related to a variable jackpot, the game ball must win V during the first round game. , and V winning commands are not transmitted from the main control board 80. Therefore, when it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (step S2303: NO), the process proceeds to step S2305, which will be described later, without executing the process of step S2304.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S2304, or when it determines that the V winning command has not been received (step S2303: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines that it is stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S2302. 2 It is determined whether or not the "hit confirmation information" as the jackpot prior determination information is included in the prior determination information (step S2305). Here, if it is determined that the "hit confirmation information" is included (step S2305: YES), even if the state after the end of this big hit game is either a low probability state or a high probability state, A jackpot will always occur in the hold. Therefore, when it is determined that "hit confirmation information" is included (step S2305: YES), in order to execute the above-described special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect based on FIG. 22, step S2308 described later is processed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the "hit confirmation information" is not included (step S2305: NO), it is included in the special 2 pre-determination information determined to be stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S2302. It is determined whether or not all of the big hit prior determination information is "loss confirmation information" (step S2306). Here, when all of the jackpot prior determination information is "losing confirmation information", even if the state after the jackpot game is either a low probability state or a high probability state, the pending second special symbol determination All the judgment results are "losing". In this case, since the execution condition of the jackpot suggestion production in the special figure 2 reservation is not satisfied, when it is determined that all the jackpot prior determination information is "loss confirmation information" (step S2306: YES), a series of special figure 2 reservations The inner jackpot suggestion effect process is terminated, and the process is returned to step S2301.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that all of the jackpot prior determination information is not "loss confirmation information" (step S2306: NO), that is, it determines that it is stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S2302. If "provisional loss information" or "provisional hit information" is included in the jackpot advance judgment information included in the special 2 advance judgment information, it is determined whether the temporary high accuracy flag is set to ON Determine (step S2307).

As shown in FIG. 19 (A), "temporary loss information" is determined to be "loss" if the state at the start of the fluctuation (during pending digestion) is a low probability state, and at the start of the fluctuation (hold digestion This is information indicating that if the state of time) is a high-probability state, it is determined to be a "jackpot". In addition, "temporary hit information" is determined to be a "jackpot" if the state at the start of the fluctuation (during hold digestion) is in a high probability state, and the state at the start of the fluctuation (during hold digestion) is in a low probability state. This is information indicating that if there is, it is determined to be “losing”.

In this way, the "provisional loss information" and the "provisional hit information" result in "loss" when the special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state, and the special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state. Both are common in that the determination result is "big win" in some cases. When ``provisional loss information'' or ``provisional winning information'' is stored in the sub-RAM 93, if the state after the end of the jackpot game is a high probability state, the condition for execution of the special figure 2 reserve jackpot suggestion performance is satisfied. Conversely, if the state after the end of the jackpot game is a low-probability state, the conditions for execution of the special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect are not satisfied.

Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the provisional high-accuracy flag is set to ON after specifying that the "provisional loss information" or the "provisional winning information" is stored (step S2307: YES). That is, when the second special symbol determination corresponding to "temporary losing information" or "temporary winning information" is executed in a high probability state, it will satisfy the execution conditions of the special figure 2 reserved jackpot suggestion effect, Execute the following process.

That is, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the provisional high-accuracy flag is set to ON (step S2307: YES), or determines that "hit confirmation information" is included (step S2305: YES). , It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot that occurs in the hold is a “probability variable jackpot” (step S2308).

By the way, when the right of the second special symbol determination is reserved, from the main control board 80, the big hit advance determination information (here, "hit confirmation information", "temporary losing information", or "temporary winning information") and Together, "jackpot type advance determination information" is included in the pending command and transmitted together. This is as described above based on the column of jackpot type prior determination information in FIG. 19(B). Based on this jackpot type advance judgment information, it is specified whether the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the jackpot advance judgment information sent together is a ``probable variable jackpot'' or a ``normal jackpot''. It is possible.

Therefore, in step S2308, the sub CPU 91 is stored in the sub RAM 93 together with the "jackpot prior determination information" that is the target of the special figure 2 pending jackpot suggestion effect, based on the "jackpot type prior determination information". , It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot that occurs in the hold is a “probability variable jackpot”.

Here, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the jackpot that occurs in the hold is the "probability variable jackpot" (step S2308: YES), the special figure 2 hold probability variable jackpot suggestion production described above based on FIG. In order to execute the above, a pending probability variable jackpot suggestion background display command is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S2309). Conversely, if it is determined that the jackpot that occurs in the hold is not a "probability variable jackpot" (step S2308: NO), the above-described special figure 2 on hold normal jackpot suggestion effect is executed based on FIG. 22 (B) Then, a pending normal jackpot suggestion background display command is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S2310).

The jackpot suggestive background display command set by the process of step S2309 or step S2310 is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 by the command transmission process of step S40 in FIG. On the other hand, by executing the processing based on the command received by the image sound control CPU 101 of the image sound control board 100, the special figure 2 hold probability variable jackpot suggestion effect or the special figure 2 hold normal jackpot suggestion effect is realized. will be

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S2309 or the process of step S2310, it sets the provisional high accuracy flag stored in the sub RAM 93 to OFF (step S2311), suggesting a series of special figure 2 pending jackpot Terminate the production process.

[Variation start command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 56 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is the variation start command (step S15: YES), it executes a series of variation start command reception processing illustrated in FIG.

That is, the sub CPU 91 acquires the value at the time when the variation start command is received from the main control board 80 and stores it in the sub RAM 93 with respect to the effect random number appropriately updated by the random number update processing in the sub control board 90 (step S161). . Then, the received variation start command is analyzed (step S162).

In this variation start command, as described above, the symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the big hit determination process, and whether the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination Winning start opening information indicating whether or not it is a thing, setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol, information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like are included. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, it is possible to specify the type and result of the special symbol determination. In other words, it is possible to specify whether it is a big win or a loss, and if it is a big win, what kind of big win it is. Further, by specifying whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern for losing based on the setting information of the variation pattern, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. . Also, based on the setting information of the variation pattern, it is possible to specify the variation time of the special symbol. Also, the current game state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the game state.

After analyzing the fluctuation start command, the sub CPU 91 executes a fluctuation production pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation production pattern of the fluctuation production accompanying the fluctuation display of the special symbols based on the analysis result (step S163). By executing this variable effect pattern setting process, the variation mode of the effect pattern, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous effect, the type of the effect pattern constituting the ready-to-win pattern, the type and content of the ready-to-win effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect , the type of effect symbols to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S163, the sub CPU 91 executes a notice effect pattern setting process for setting various notice effects to be executed when the effect symbols are variably displayed according to the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S163. (step S164). This advance notice effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 91 sub-submits a variable effect start command for instructing the start of the variable effect in the variable effect pattern set in the processing of step S163 and the execution of the notice effect in the notice effect pattern set in the process of step S164. It is set in the RAM 93 (step S173).

This variable effect start command includes information indicating the variable effect pattern set by the process of step S163 and information indicating the notice effect pattern set by the process of step S164. It is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by command transmission processing. As a result, the variable effect and the advance notice effect whose effect patterns are determined in the sub-control board 90 are realized by the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 .

Following the process of step S173, the sub CPU 91 updates the number of reservations stored in the sub RAM 93 by subtracting "1" (step S174). Specifically, when the variation start command received from the main control board 80 notifies the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination update to On the other hand, when the received variation start command notifies the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the number of suspensions of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1".

[Variation production pattern setting processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 57 is a detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. Following the processing of step S162, the sub CPU 91 sets a final effect to set the effect symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed (mainly stopped) on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol). A pattern setting process is executed (step S1631).

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is controlled in the probability variable gaming state (or the time-saving gaming state), "hit notification effect" is included in the reserved right of the second special symbol determination. When the execution is included, specifically, a hold command including "hit confirmation information" is received from the main control board 80 in response to the holding of the right of the second special symbol determination. 25 to 27 by using the symbol variation before the symbol variation executed in response to the second special symbol determination being performed. We are going to do one of the following.

Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives a hold command related to the second special symbol determination right including "hit confirmation information" when the game is controlled in the probability variable gaming state (or the time saving gaming state), a sense of incongruity It is determined whether or not to execute a failure notification effect. In addition, in the sense of incongruity loss notification effect, the variation pattern of the second special symbol for the reachless loss effect is selected for the symbol variation performed before the symbol variation in which the winning notification effect is executed. be executed on the condition that Therefore, based on the variation pattern information included in the hold command received before the hold command, it was possible to identify that the change pattern of the second special symbol is the change pattern for reach-less loss production. Only in this case, the incongruity loss notification effect is executed.

When the sub CPU 91 decides to execute the wrong feeling incompatibility notification performance, for example, it executes a lottery using a random number to determine which of the wrong feeling discomfort notice performances A to C is to be executed. Then, by the process of step S1631, the process of setting the three effect symbols to be actually stopped after pseudo-stopping on the display screen 70 is performed with respect to the symbol variation for executing the decided odd feeling loss notification effect.

Here, in the case of executing the strangeness/loss notification effect A (see FIG. 25), three effect patterns, which are composed of two number patterns and one character pattern, are used as the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern. set a combination of Also, when executing the odd feeling loss notification performance B (see FIG. 26), a combination of three performance symbols including the middle 7 symbols is set as the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol. In addition, when executing the odd feeling loss notification performance C (see FIG. 27), a combination of three performance symbols whose display positions are displaced from the normal symbols is set as the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol.

Based on such a process, by executing the variable effect and the stop effect in the variable probability game state (or the time-saving game state), the discomfort loss notification effects A to C are realized.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not it is necessary to perform a ready-to-win effect accompanying the variable display of the special symbol this time, based on the setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the received variation start command. is determined (step S1632). Here, when it is determined that there is no need to perform the production with reach (step S1632: NO), a variable production pattern of production without reach is set (step S1633). For example, one of the production random numbers corresponding to the production random numbers obtained in the process of step S161 from the no-reach variable production pattern selection table in which a plurality of types of variable production patterns of the non-reach production are associated with each variation pattern of the special symbol. A variable performance pattern is read, and information indicating the variable performance pattern is set in a sub-RAM 93. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that it is necessary to perform a ready-to-win effect (step S1632: YES), it sets a variable effect pattern for a ready-to-win effect (step S1634). For example, from the variable performance pattern selection table for with reach, in which a plurality of types of variable performance patterns of production with reach are associated with each combination of the determination result of the special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the special symbol, step S161 Any one variation performance pattern corresponding to the performance random number acquired in the process is read, and information indicating the variation performance pattern is set in the sub-RAM 93. - 特許庁

By performing the process of step S1633 or the process of step S1634, it is possible to determine in what kind of variation pattern the production pattern is variably displayed, which reach production is to be performed in the case of performing the ready-to-win production, and to develop the ready-to-win production. is determined in what kind of flow the reach production is to be developed.

Regarding the subjugation reach described above with reference to FIG. 17, the sub ROM 92 stores information indicating the variation pattern of the second special symbol (subjugation reach exclusive variation pattern) dedicated to the subjugation reach. When the sub CPU 91 receives a variation start command related to the second special symbol determination including information indicating the same variation pattern as the subjugation reach dedicated variation pattern when the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state, the step By executing the process of S1634, a variable effect pattern of subjugation reach is set.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable effect start command for instructing the start of the variable effect in the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S1633 (or the process of step S1634) is sent from the sub control board 90 to the image sound control board. 100 (and the lamp control board 120), a variable effect including a variable display of the effect symbols is realized.

[Notice effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 58 is a detailed flowchart of the advance notice effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. The sub CPU 91 executes a series of advance notice effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG. 58 following the variable effect pattern setting process of step S163.

The sub CPU 91 first executes a special cut-in effect pattern setting process (step S165). This special cut-in effect pattern setting process determines whether or not to execute the above-described special cut-in based on FIGS. in) is a process for determining whether to execute. This special cut-in effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S165, the sub CPU 91 executes character standby effect pattern setting process (step S166). This character standby effect pattern setting process determines whether or not to execute the character standby effect described above based on FIG. This is processing for determination. This character standby effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S166, the sub CPU 91 executes subjugation effect pattern setting process (step S167). This subjugation effect pattern setting process is a process that is performed when the variable effect pattern of the subjugation reach pattern is set by the process of step S1634 in FIG. This is a process for determining in what kind of flow each constituent effect is to proceed. This subjugation effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S167, the sub CPU 91 executes a chance effect pattern setting process (step S168). This chance effect pattern setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the above-described chance effect based on FIGS. be. This chance effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S168, the sub CPU 91 executes suggestive effect pattern setting process (step S169). This suggestive effect pattern setting process determines whether or not to execute the above-described suggestive effect (low suggestive effect or high suggestive effect) based on FIGS. This is a process for determining This suggestive effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S169, the sub CPU 91 executes an effect pattern setting process for the first change effect/related effect (step S173). In the effect pattern setting process for the first change effect/related effect, it is determined whether or not to execute the above-described first change effect and related effect based on FIGS. It is a process for determining whether to execute with such a production pattern. The effect pattern setting process for the first change effect/related effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S173, the sub CPU 91 executes an effect pattern setting process for the second change effect/predictive effect (step S174). In the effect pattern setting process for the second change effect/predictive effect, it is determined whether or not to execute the above-described predictive effect and the second change effect based on FIGS. This is a process for determining what production pattern is to be executed. The effect pattern setting process for the second change effect/predictive effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S174, the sub CPU 91 executes another notice effect pattern setting process (step S171). The other notice effect pattern setting processing includes each notice effect in which the effect pattern is set by the processing of steps S165 to S174 illustrated in FIG. This is a process for setting an effect pattern for another notice effect different from the above. The other notice effect pattern setting process is performed in the same way as the process conventionally performed for setting the effect pattern of the existing notice effect, so detailed description here is omitted.

Following the process of step S171, the sub CPU 91 executes the effect pattern setting process of the stage change effect/expectation effect (step S176). In this step-change effect/expected effect effect pattern setting process, it is determined whether or not to execute the above-described step-change effect and expected effect based on FIGS. It is a process for determining whether to execute with a different effect pattern. The effect pattern setting processing for the step-change effect/expected effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S176, the sub CPU 91 executes related effect pattern setting process (step S172). This related effect pattern setting process determines whether or not to execute each of the above-described related effects based on FIGS. This is a process for This related effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Special cut-in effect pattern setting processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 59 is a detailed flowchart of the special cut-in effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. The sub CPU 91 executes a series of special cut-in effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG. 59 following the variable effect pattern setting process of step S163 in FIG.

The sub CPU 91 first acquires a special cut-in effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1650). This special cut-in effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-described special cut-in based on FIGS. be. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state as a special cut-in effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 .

Next, the sub CPU 91 executes a special cut-in lottery (step S1651). The sub ROM 92 stores a random number (winning value) to be compared with the special cut-in effect random number, and the sub CPU 91 stores the special cut-in effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1650 in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not to execute a special cut-in based on whether or not it matches with any of the random numbers (winning values).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub-ROM 92 stores random numbers (winning values) for big wins and random numbers (winning values) for losing as the random numbers (winning values). there is Based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, when the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", the acquired and stored special cut-in effect random number is set as above. Compare with the random number for the jackpot (winning value). On the other hand, based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, when it is specified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss", the obtained and stored special cut-in effect random number is used for the above loss. Random value (winning value).

The sub ROM 92 stores more random numbers (winning values) than the random numbers (winning values) for losing as the random numbers (winning values) for the big win. Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal game state is "jackpot", it is easy to decide to execute the special cut-in, and conversely, " If it is "losing", it is difficult to decide to execute a special cut-in.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a special cut-in based on the lottery result of step S1651 (step S1652). Here, if it is determined not to execute the special cut-in (step S1652: NO), the series of special cut-in effect pattern setting processing ends, and the processing proceeds to the character standby effect pattern setting processing of step S166, which will be described later. be done.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute a special cut-in (step S1652: YES), it executes a special cut-in effect pattern selection process (step S1653). The special cut-in in the present embodiment has one type of effect mode, but is an advance notice effect whose execution timing is variable. Therefore, in step S1653, the sub CPU 91 executes the process of selecting the execution timing of the special cut-in.

For example, when a variable effect pattern that directly develops from normal reach to SPSP reach is set by the processing of step S1634 in FIG. Select as the execution timing of the in. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12(H), (L), and (M), it is possible to generate a special cut-in at a predetermined timing immediately after normal reach ends and before SPSP reach develops. becomes.

Also, in this embodiment, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 13A, the special cut-in is not limited to the timing immediately after the end of the normal reach, but also during character reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach. A configuration is adopted that is executable. For this reason, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute a special cut-in when a variable effect pattern different from a variable effect pattern that directly develops from normal reach to SP reach is selected, the sub CPU 91 determines that the special cut-in is performed at a predetermined timing during character reach, SP reach. Any one of the predetermined timing during the SPSP reach and the predetermined timing during the SPSP reach is selected as the execution timing of the special cut-in.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the special cut-in effect pattern selection process in this manner, the sub-RAM 93 stores information indicating the result of the selection process (execution timing of the selected special cut-in) as special cut-in effect pattern setting information. Store in a predetermined area (step S1654). This special cut-in effect pattern setting information is included in the variable effect start command and transmitted to the image sound control board 100, whereby the special cut-in is executed at the execution timing selected by the sub CPU 91. - 特許庁

[Character standby effect pattern setting processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 60 is a detailed flowchart of the character standby effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. Following the special cut-in effect pattern setting process in step S165 in FIG. 58, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of character standby effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG.

The sub CPU 91 first acquires a character standby effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1660). This character standby effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the character standby effect described above based on FIGS. . On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state as a character standby effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 .

Next, the sub CPU 91 executes a character standby effect lottery (step S1661). The sub ROM 92 stores a random number (winning value) to be compared with the character standby effect random number. It is determined whether or not to execute the character waiting effect based on whether or not it matches with any random number value (winning value).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub-ROM 92 stores random numbers (winning values) for big wins and random numbers (winning values) for losing as the random numbers (winning values) related to the character standby effect lottery. and are stored. Based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, when the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", the sub CPU 91 converts the obtained and stored character standby effect random number to the jackpot. It compares with the random value for (the winning value). On the other hand, when it is specified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss" based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the obtained and stored character standby effect random number is used for the above-mentioned failure. Compare with random value (winning value).

The sub-ROM 92 stores more random numbers (winning values) than the losing random numbers (winning values) related to the character waiting effect lottery as big win random values (winning values) related to the character waiting effect lottery. . Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal game state is "jackpot", it is easy to decide to execute the character standby effect, and conversely, " In the case of "losing", it is difficult to decide to execute the character standby effect.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the character standby effect based on the lottery result of step S1661 (step S1662). Here, if it is determined not to execute the character standby effect (step S1662: NO), the series of character standby effect pattern setting processing is terminated, and the processing proceeds to subjugation effect pattern setting processing in step S167, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the character standby effect (step S1662: YES), the special cut-in effect pattern information is set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1654 in FIG. It is determined whether or not to execute cut-in (step S1663). Here, if it is determined to execute a special cut-in (step S1663: YES), the character standby effect pattern selection table for special cut-in is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1664). Conversely, if it is determined not to execute the special cut-in (step S1663: NO), the character standby effect pattern selection table for no special cut-in is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1665).

Then, the sub CPU 91 reads the effect pattern from the character standby effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1664 or the process of step S1665, thereby selecting a character standby effect pattern. Effect pattern selection processing is executed (step S1666). Then, information indicating the selection result of step S1666 is stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as effect pattern setting information for the character standby effect (step S1667). This character standby performance pattern setting information is included in the variable performance start command and transmitted to the image sound control board 100, whereby the character standby performance is executed in the performance pattern selected by the sub CPU 91.例文帳に追加

[Subjugation effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 61 is a detailed flowchart of the subjugation effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. The sub CPU 91 executes a series of subjugation effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG. 61 following the character standby effect pattern setting process of step S166 in FIG. This subjugation effect pattern setting process is a process for determining in what flow each of the effects shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the subjugation reach based on whether or not the variable effect pattern of the effect symbol related to the subjugation reach is set by the process of step S1634 in FIG. 57 (step S1670). . Here, if it is determined not to execute the subjugation reach (step S1670: NO), the subjugation effect pattern setting process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the chance effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 58) of step S168 which will be described later. .

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute subjugation reach (step S1670: YES), the sub CPU 91, based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command related to the second special symbol determination received from the main control board 80, , It is determined whether or not the determination result of the second special symbol determination of this time is "10R probability variation" (step S1671). Here, if it is determined that the determination result of the second special symbol determination of this time is "10R probability variation" (step S1671: YES), the production pattern selection process of 10R probability variation subjugation / follow-up continuous hit production is executed (step S1672 ).

In this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 17, "variable effect pattern A" and "variable effect pattern B" are prepared for the flow of each effect that constitutes subjugation reach. Here, the "variable effect pattern A" is a variable effect pattern in which the effect progresses from the subjugation button repeated pressing promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)) to the subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)). On the other hand, the "fluctuation effect pattern B" changes from the subjugation button repeated pressing promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)) to the subjugation failure effect (see FIG. 17(G)) and the follow-up button repeated pressing promotion effect (see FIG. 17(K)). It is a variable production pattern in which the production progresses to the second follow-up successful production (see FIG. 17(O)).

Here, when comparing "fluctuation production pattern A" and "variation production pattern B", "variation production pattern B" has a larger number of productions constituting subjugation reach, so "variation production pattern A" It is clear that the time required for the entire production is longer than the subjugation reach is executed in .

In this embodiment, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol for the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "10R probability variation", the variation pattern A whose variation time is the first time, and the variation time is the first time A longer variation pattern B is prepared. The sub CPU 91 identifies the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80 in the process of step S1672. Then, when the specified variation pattern is variation pattern A, "variation performance pattern A" is selected, and when the specified variation pattern is variation pattern B, "variation performance pattern B" is selected.

It should be noted that, when the subjugation reach progresses in the "fluctuation effect pattern A", as described above based on FIG. The probability that the subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)) and the 10R probability variable jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 17(F)) will be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 36 is 100%. On the other hand, if the subjugation reach progresses in the "variable production pattern B", after the subjugation button repeated pressing promotion production (see FIG. 17(C)), instead of the subjugation success production (see FIG. 17(E)), It is necessary to execute the subjugation failure effect (see FIG. 17(G)). Therefore, when subjugation reach progresses in "variable production pattern B", the second production button 36 is operated during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion production (see FIG. 17(C)). The subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)) and the 10R probability variable jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 17(F)) are never executed.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the second special symbol determination this time is not "10R probability variation" (step S1671: NO), whether the determination result of this second special symbol determination is "3R probability variation" It is determined whether or not (step S1673). Here, if it is determined that the determination result of the second special symbol determination this time is "3R probability variation" (step S1673: YES), the production pattern selection process of 3R probability variation subjugation / follow-up continuous hit production is executed (step S1674 ). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the subjugation reach is executed in response to winning the "3R probability variable", the subjugation failure production (see FIG. 17 (C)) to the subjugation failure production (see FIG. 17 ( G)) and the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect (see FIG. 17 (K)) to the first follow-up success effect (see FIG. 17 (M)) and the 3R probability variable jackpot notification effect. Only C is available. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 executes the process of selecting this variation effect pattern C in step S1674.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the second special symbol determination this time is not "3R probability change" (step S1673: NO), that is, when it is "losing", the sub-CPU 91 performs the subjugation/follow-up continuous hit effect for losing. Effect pattern selection processing is executed (step S1675).

Regarding the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination at the start of the variation is "losing" and the subjugation reach is executed, "variation performance pattern D" and "variation performance pattern E" are prepared. "Variable production pattern D" is from the subjugation button continuous hitting promotion production (see FIG. 17 (C)) to the failure notification production (see FIG. 17 (I)) via the subjugation failure production (see FIG. 17 (G)). It is a variable performance pattern in which the performance progresses. "Variation production pattern E" is, from the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion production (see FIG. 17 (C)) through the subjugation failure production (see FIG. 17 (G)) and pursuit button repeated hitting promotion production (see FIG. 17 (K)) 17(Q)) and a loss notification effect (see FIG. 17(R)).

In this way, since the "fluctuation effect pattern D" and the "fluctuation effect pattern E" are prepared for the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "losing" and the subjugation reach is executed, the sub CPU 91 , In the processing of step S1675, "fluctuation effect pattern D" or "fluctuation effect pattern E" is selected.

After the sub CPU 91 selects the effect pattern of the subjugation/pursuit continuous hit effect by the process of step S1672, the process of step S1674, or the process of step S1675, the sub CPU 91 transmits the information indicating the selected effect pattern to the effect of the subjugation/follow-up attack effect. It is set in the sub-RAM 93 as pattern setting information (step S1676). The effect pattern setting information for the subjugation/follow-up continuous hit effect is included in the variable effect start command together with the information indicating the variable effect pattern of the effect pattern related to the subjugation reach set by the processing of step S1634 in FIG. It is transmitted to the substrate 100, and thereby each effect that constitutes the subjugation reach progresses in the effect pattern set by the sub CPU 91. - 特許庁

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 17, in subjugation ready-to-win, the subjugation button repeated pressing promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)) is always executed. Therefore, in the process of step S1676, the effect pattern setting information including the information indicating the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect is set. Also, the effect progresses from the subjugation button repeated pressing promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)) to the pursuit button repeated pressing promotion effect (see FIG. 17(K)) via the subjugation failure effect (see FIG. 17(G)). When the fluctuating effect pattern is selected, the effect pattern setting information is set which further includes information indicating the effective period of the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the determination result of the second special symbol determination may be "3R normal" (see FIG. 6(C)), but when the determination result is "3R normal" subjugation reach will not be executed. Therefore, in the subjugation effect pattern setting process shown in FIG. 61, the effect pattern selection process for the 3R normal subjugation/follow-up continuous hit effect is not executed.

[Chance production pattern setting processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 62 is a detailed flowchart of the chance effect pattern setting process in step S168 of FIG. The sub CPU 91 executes a series of chance effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG. 62 following the subjugation effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. This chance effect pattern setting process is a process of setting the effect pattern of the chance effect described above based on FIG.

The sub CPU 91 first acquires a chance effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1680). This chance effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-described chance effect based on FIGS. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state as a chance effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 .

Next, the sub CPU 91 executes a chance effect lottery (step S1681). The sub ROM 92 stores a random value (winning value) to be compared with the chance effect random number. Whether or not to execute the chance presentation is determined based on whether or not the random number value (winning value) matches.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub-ROM 92 stores random numbers (winning values) for big wins and random numbers (winning values) for losing as the random numbers (winning values). there is Based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, when the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", the obtained and stored chance effect random number is used for the jackpot. Random value (winning value). On the other hand, based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, when it is specified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss", the acquired and stored chance effect random number is changed to the above-mentioned random number for failure. Compare with a numerical value (winning value).

The sub ROM 92 stores more random numbers (winning values) than the random numbers (winning values) for losing as the random numbers (winning values) for the big win related to the chance effect. For this reason, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal game state is "big hit", it is easy to decide to execute the chance production, and conversely, "losing" , it is difficult to decide to execute the chance presentation.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the chance effect based on the lottery result of step S1681 (step S1682). Here, when it is determined not to execute the chance effect (step S1682: NO), a series of chance effect pattern setting processing is terminated, and the processing proceeds to the suggestive effect pattern setting processing of step S169 which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the chance production (step S1682: YES), it executes the production pattern selection process for the chance production (step S1683). The chance effect in the present embodiment has one type of effect mode, and is an advance notice effect with a fixed execution timing. Therefore, in step S1683, the sub CPU 91 executes a process of selecting one effect pattern prepared for the chance effect.

When the sub CPU 91 thus executes the effect pattern selection process for the chance effect, it sets the information indicating the selection result as the effect pattern setting information for the chance effect in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 (step S1684). The performance pattern setting information of the chance performance is included in the variable performance start command and transmitted to the image sound control board 100, whereby the chance performance in which the performance pattern is set by the sub CPU 91 is executed.

[Suggestion effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 63 is a detailed flow chart of the suggestive effect pattern setting process in step S169 of FIG. Following the chance effect pattern setting process in step S168 of FIG. 58, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of suggestive effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG.

The sub CPU 91 first acquires a suggestive effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1690). This suggestive effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-described suggestive effect based on FIGS. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state as a suggestive effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 .

Next, the sub CPU 91 performs the process of step S1684 in FIG. 62, based on whether or not the chance effect effect pattern setting information is set in the sub RAM 93, during the variable display of the first special symbol. is executed (step S1691).

As described above with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the low suggestive effect can be combined within the same variation as the chance effect, while the high suggestive effect can be combined within the same variation as the chance effect. A configuration is adopted in which there is no compositing. Therefore, when it is determined that the chance production will be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol this time (step S1691: YES), in order not to perform the processing for executing the highly suggestive production, The process proceeds to step S1699, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 91 determines not to execute the chance production during the variable display of the first special symbol this time (step S1691: NO), the sub CPU 91 conducts a highly suggestive production lottery for determining whether or not to execute the highly suggestive production. It does (step S1692). The sub ROM 92 stores a random number (winning value) to be compared with the suggestive effect random number for the highly suggestive effect, and the sub CPU 91 stores the suggestive effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1690 in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not to execute a highly suggestive effect based on whether or not it matches with any of the stored random numbers (winning values).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores random numbers (winning values) for big wins (winning values) and random numbers (winning values) for losing as the random numbers (winning values) related to the high-suggestion effect lottery. and are stored. Based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, when the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", the sub CPU 91 uses the acquired and stored suggestive effect random number for the jackpot. Random value (winning value). On the other hand, based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, when it is specified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss", the acquired and stored suggestive effect random number is changed to the above-mentioned random number for failure. Compare with a numerical value (winning value).

The sub-ROM 92 stores more random numbers (winning values) than the random numbers (winning values) for losing in the highly suggestive effect lottery as big win random values (winning values) related to the highly suggestive effect lottery. . Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation of the first special symbol in the normal game state is "jackpot", it is easy to decide to execute the highly suggestive effect, and conversely, " If it is "losing", it is difficult to decide to execute the highly suggestive effect.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the highly suggestive effect based on the lottery result of step S1692 (step S1693). Here, when it is determined not to execute the highly suggestive effect (step S1693: NO), the process proceeds to step S1699 in the same manner as when it is determined to execute the chance effect in step S1691.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the highly suggestive effect (step S1693: YES), based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the current first special symbol It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is "big win" (step S1694). Here, when it is determined that it is a "big hit" (step S1694: YES), the effect pattern selection table of the high-suggestion effect for big win is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1695). Conversely, if it is determined that it is not a "jackpot" (step S1694: NO), the effect pattern selection table of highly suggestive effect for losing is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1696).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, executes a highly suggestive effect pattern selection process for selecting a highly suggestive effect pattern (step S1697), and converts the information indicating the selection result to a highly suggestive effect pattern. It is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as suggested effect pattern setting information (step S1698). This highly suggestive effect pattern setting information is included in the variable effect start command and transmitted to the image sound control board 100, whereby the highly suggestive effect is executed in the effect pattern selected by the sub CPU 91. - 特許庁

Although not shown in the figure, in the production pattern selection table for the jackpot high suggestive production, the high suggestive production of the first high suggestive production, the second high suggestive production, and the third high suggestive production, respectively. , are associated with different numbers of random numbers, and when arranging in order from the smallest number of associated random numbers to the largest number, the first high suggestive effect, the second high suggestive effect, and the third high suggestive effect. It will be in order of high suggestive production.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, in the effect pattern selection table for the high suggestive effect for losing, the first high suggestive effect, the second high suggestive effect, and the third high suggestive effect are respectively high suggestive effects. , are associated with different numbers of random numbers, and when arranging in order from the smallest number of associated random numbers to the largest number, the third high suggestive effect, the second high suggestive effect, the first It will be in order of high suggestive production.

In the process of step S1697, the sub CPU 91 determines the type of highly suggestive effect (first highly suggestive effect, second highly suggestive effect, or 3rd highly suggestive effect) is read out from the effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93 to select one highly suggestive effect.

In the present embodiment, regarding the distribution of random numbers, the effect pattern selection table for the high-impact effect suggestive for a big win and the effect pattern selection table for the high-impact effect suggestive for the loss have the above characteristics, so there are three types. When the highly suggestive performances are arranged in order from the lowest to the highest reliability of the big win, the order is the first highly suggestive performance, the second highly suggestive performance, and the third highly suggestive performance (see FIG. 24).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the chance effect will be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol this time (step S1691: YES), or if it determines not to execute the highly suggestive effect (step S1693: NO). , the following processing related to the low-suggestion effect is executed.

That is, the sub CPU 91 performs a low-suggestion effect lottery (step S1699). The sub ROM 92 stores a random value (winning value) to be compared with the suggestive effect random number for the low suggestive effect, and the sub CPU 91 stores the suggestive effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1690 in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not to execute a low-suggestion effect based on whether or not it matches with any of the stored random numbers (winning values).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores random numbers (winning values) for big wins (winning values) and random numbers (winning values) for losing as the random numbers (winning values) related to the low-suggestion effect lottery. and are stored. Based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, when the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", the sub CPU 91 uses the acquired and stored suggestive effect random number for the jackpot. Random value (winning value). On the other hand, based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, when it is specified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss", the acquired and stored suggestive effect random number is changed to the above-mentioned random number for failure. Compare with a numerical value (winning value).

The sub-ROM 92 stores more random numbers (winning values) than the random numbers (winning values) for losing in the low-suggestion attraction lottery as the big-win random numbers (winning values) associated with the low-impact attraction lottery. . Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal game state is "big hit", it is difficult to decide to execute the low suggestive effect, and conversely, " If it is "losing", it is likely to be determined to execute the low-suggestion effect.

In this way, the low-suggestion effect is likely to be executed in the case of "losing", and is difficult to be executed in the case of "big hit". Therefore, as shown in FIG. It is a notice production that is quite low and difficult to connect to the jackpot.

Returning to the description of FIG. 63, when executing the low-suggestion effect lottery in step S1699, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the low-suggestion effect based on the lottery result (step S1700). Here, when it is determined not to execute the low suggestive effect (step S1700: NO), the series of suggestive effect pattern setting processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S173 in FIG.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the low-suggestion effect (step S1700: YES), based on the setting information of the symbol included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the first special symbol of this time is determined. It is determined whether or not the determination result of the determination is "big win" (step S1701). Here, if it is determined to be a "big hit" (step S1701: YES), the effect pattern selection table of the low suggestive effect for big win is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1702). Conversely, when it is determined that it is not a "big hit" (step S1701: NO), the effect pattern selection table of the low suggestive effect for losing is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1703).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, executes a low suggestive effect pattern selection process for selecting a low suggestive effect effect pattern (step S1704), and lowers the information indicating the selection result. It is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as suggested effect pattern setting information (step S1705). This low-suggestion effect pattern setting information is included in the variable effect start command and transmitted to the image sound control board 100, whereby the low-suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern selected by the sub CPU 91. - 特許庁

Although not shown in the figure, in the effect pattern selection table for the low suggestive effect for the big win, the first low suggestive effect, the second low suggestive effect, and the third low suggestive effect are respectively low suggestive effects. , are associated with different numbers of random numbers, and when arranging in order of the number of associated random numbers from the smallest to the largest, the first low suggestive effect, the second low suggestive effect, the third It will be in order of low suggestive production.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, in the production pattern selection table for the low-suggestion production for losing, the first low-suggestion production, the second low-suggestion production, and the third low-suggestion production are respectively low-suggestion productions. , are associated with different numbers of random numbers, and when arranging in order from the smallest number of associated random numbers to the largest, the third low suggestive effect, the second low suggestive effect, the first It will be in order of low suggestive production.

In the process of step S1704, the sub CPU 91 determines the type of low-suggestive effect (first low-suggestive effect, second low-suggestive effect, or 3rd low suggestive effect) is read out from the effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93 to select one low suggestive effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, regarding the distribution of random numbers, the effect pattern selection table for the low suggestive effect for the big win and the effect pattern selection table for the low suggestive effect for the losing have the above characteristics, so there are three types. When the low-suggestive performances are arranged in order from the lowest to the highest reliability of the jackpot, the order is the first low-suggestive performance, the second low-suggestive performance, and the third low-suggestive performance (see FIG. 24).

[Effect pattern setting processing for first change effect/related effect by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 64 is a detailed flowchart of the effect pattern setting process for the first change effect/related effect in step S173 of FIG. In order to execute and control the first change effect and the related effect described above based on FIGS. An effect pattern setting process for the first change effect/related effect is executed.

The sub CPU 91 first acquires the first variation effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1730). This first change effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-described first change effect based on FIGS. be done. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state as the first change effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 .

Next, the sub CPU 91, for example, determines whether the first change effect random number obtained by the process of step S1730 matches any of the predetermined random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92. is executed (step S1731). Here, when it is determined not to execute the first change effect (step S1731: NO), the effect pattern setting process for the first change effect/related effect is completed, and the process proceeds to step S174 (see FIG. 58). be done.

When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the first change effect (step S1731: YES), it determines whether or not the game progresses straight beyond the SP reach (step S1732). Specifically, based on the information indicating the variable effect pattern set by the processing of step S163 in FIG. (Refer to FIG. 8 (J)) or SP SP reach (Refer to FIG. 8 (K)) Based on whether or not a variable performance pattern that develops directly to SP reach (see FIG. 8 (K)) is set, it is determined whether or not it develops directly to SP reach or more .

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the straight development does not exceed the SP reach (step S1732: NO), the sub CPU 91 shows the effect pattern of the first change effect (see FIGS. 28A and 28B) ending with the first stage effect. information is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the first change effect (step S1733).

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the SP reach or more will develop directly (step S1732: YES), it determines whether or not the SP reach will develop directly based on the information indicating the variable effect pattern (step S1734). ). Here, when it is determined that it will develop directly into SP reach (step S1734: YES), the effect pattern selection process of the second stage related effect is executed (step S1735). That is, based on FIG. 28(D) and FIG. A second-stage related effect (big hit reliability: about 18%) in which the characters "Zoo!"

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores a table for selecting the effect pattern of the second stage related effect. As this table, a second stage related effect pattern selection table for big wins and a second stage related effect pattern selection table for losing are prepared. In the process of step S1735, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot" based on the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80. to identify Here, when it is specified that it is a "big win", the second stage related effect pattern selection table for the big win is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 to confirm that it is not a "big win", that is, "losing". If it is specified, the second-stage related effect pattern selection table for losing is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 .

In the second-stage related effect pattern selection table for big wins and the second-stage related effect pattern selection table for losing, the type of second-stage related effect (second-stage related effect displaying blue characters, or A second stage related effect of displaying red characters), a variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a random value to be compared with the first change effect random number are associated with each other. After setting one of the second stage related effect pattern selection tables, the sub CPU 91 sets the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the variation start command and the number obtained by the processing of step S1730. A second stage related effect displaying blue characters by reading the type of the second stage related effect corresponding to the 1 change effect random number from the second step related effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93; Either one of the second stage related effect of displaying red characters is selected.

Although the detailed configuration of the second-stage related effect pattern selection table for big win and the second-stage related effect pattern selection table for losing will be omitted, refer to the second-stage related effect pattern selection table for big win. In this case, the second-stage related effect in which red characters are displayed is more likely to be selected than the second-stage related effect in which blue characters are displayed. In this case, the second-stage related effect of displaying blue characters is more likely to be selected than the second-stage related effect of displaying red characters. Further, the longer the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the more likely it is that the second stage related effect of displaying red characters is selected rather than the second stage related effect of displaying blue characters. The shorter the variation time of the variation pattern of one special symbol is, the more likely the second stage related performance of displaying blue characters is to be selected than the second stage related performance of displaying red characters.

The sub CPU 91 ends with a second stage effect in which the first change effect develops from the first stage effect, as shown in FIGS. Then, the information indicating the effect pattern of the first changing effect and the related effect to execute the second stage related effect selected in the process of step S1735 is stored in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the first changing effect and the related effect. It is set in the area (step S1736).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that it does not lead directly to the SP reach (step S1734: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes an effect pattern selection process for the third stage related effect (step S1737). That is, based on FIG. 28 (F) and FIG. !!” is displayed in gold (jackpot reliability: approximately 41%), or a process of selecting either one is executed.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores a table for selecting the effect pattern of the third stage related effect. As this table, a third stage related effect pattern selection table for big wins and a third stage related effect pattern selection table for losing are prepared. In the process of step S1737, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot" based on the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80. to identify Here, when it is specified that it is a "big win", the third stage related effect pattern selection table for the big win is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 to confirm that it is not a "big win", that is, "losing". If it is specified, the third-stage related effect pattern selection table for failure is read out from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 .

In the third-stage related effect pattern selection table for big hits and the third-stage related effect pattern selection table for losing, the type of the third-stage related effect (the third-stage related effect displaying red characters, or A third stage related effect of displaying gold characters), a variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a random value to be compared with the first change effect random number are associated with each other. After setting one of the third stage related effect pattern selection tables, the sub CPU 91 sets the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the variation start command and the number obtained by the processing of step S1730. A third stage related effect displaying red characters by reading the type of the third stage related effect corresponding to the 1 change effect random number from the third step related effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93; Select either one of the third stage related effect of displaying gold characters.

A description of the detailed configurations of the third-stage related effect pattern selection table for big wins and the third-stage related effect pattern selection table for losing will be omitted, but refer to the third-stage related effect pattern selection table for big wins. In this case, the third-stage related effect of displaying gold characters is more likely to be selected than the third-stage related effect of displaying red characters. In this case, the third-stage related effect in which red characters are displayed is more likely to be selected than the third-stage related effect in which gold characters are displayed. Further, the longer the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the more likely the third-stage related effect of displaying gold characters is selected than the third-stage related effect of displaying red characters. As the variation time of the variation pattern of one special symbol becomes shorter, the third stage related performance of displaying red characters is more likely to be selected than the third stage related performance of displaying gold characters.

Based on the selection result of step S1737, the sub CPU 91 changes the first change effect from the first stage effect to the second stage effect as shown in FIGS. Information indicating the effect pattern of the first change effect and the effect pattern of the related effect of ending with the third stage effect developed through the process of step S1737 and executing the third step related effect selected in the process of step S1737 And it is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for related effects (step S1738).

The setting information of the first change effect (and related effect) set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S1733, the process of step S1736, or the process of step S1738 is included in the variable effect start command, and the step of FIG. By the command transmission processing in S40, the command is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, and processing based on the setting information is executed in these control boards. As a result, the first change effect (and the related effect) described above with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29 is realized.

[Effect pattern setting process for second change effect/prediction effect by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 65 is a detailed flowchart of the effect pattern setting process for the second change effect/predictive effect in step S174 of FIG. In order to execute and control the precursor effect and the second change effect described above based on FIGS. A production pattern setting process for production/prediction production is executed.

The sub CPU 91 first acquires the second variation effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1740). This second change effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-described second change effect based on FIGS. is added. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state as the second change effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 .

Next, the sub CPU 91 performs the second change effect based on whether or not the second change effect random number obtained by the process of step S1740 matches any of the predetermined random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92, for example. is executed (step S1741). Here, when it is determined not to execute the second change effect (step S1741: NO), it is determined whether or not to execute a false precursor effect (step S1742). Here, the false predictive effect is a predictive effect configured with a judge effect (see FIG. 32(H)) that notifies that the second change effect will not be executed, as described above with reference to FIG. That is.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "losing" and the variation pattern for the false portent effect is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the false portent effect is performed. is to be executed. Therefore, based on the information included in the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 determines the result of the current first special symbol determination and the first special symbol. Identify the variation pattern of . The sub-ROM 92 pre-stores information indicating the variation pattern for the false omen effect, and the sub-CPU 91 similarly determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is "losing". Based on whether or not the specified variation pattern of the first special symbol matches the variation pattern for the false portent performance indicated by the information stored in the sub ROM 92, it is determined whether or not to execute the false portent performance. .

When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the false portent effect (step S1742: YES), the sub CPU 91 sets information indicating the effect pattern of the false portent effect in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the portent effect (step S1743). In this way, the setting information of the false omen effect set in the sub-RAM 93 is included in the variable effect start command, and is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission processing in step S40 of FIG. and processing based on the setting information is executed in these control boards. As a result, the false portent effect described above with reference to FIG. 32 is realized.

When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the second change effect (step S1741: YES), based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the current first special symbol It is determined whether or not the determination result of the determination is "big win" (step S1744). Here, when it is determined to be a big hit (step S1744: YES), the effect pattern selection table of the second change effect for big win is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1745). Conversely, if it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S1744: NO), the effect pattern selection table of the second change effect for losing is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1746).

When the sub CPU 91 sets the effect pattern selection table of the second change effect for the big win or the loss in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1745 or the process of step S1746, the sub CPU 91 executes the second change effect pattern selection process ( step S1747).

In the effect pattern selection table for the second change effect for the big win and the effect pattern selection table for the second change effect for the loss, the effect pattern for the second change effect, the change pattern for the first special symbol, and the second change effect A random number value to be compared with the 2-change effect random number is associated. After setting the effect pattern selection table for one of the second change effects, the sub CPU 91 sets the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the variation start command and the variation pattern acquired by the process of step S1740. By reading the effect pattern of the second change effect corresponding to the second change effect random number from the effect pattern selection table of the second change effect set in the sub-RAM 93, one effect pattern of the second change effect is obtained. select.

As production patterns of the second change production in this embodiment, there are three production patterns: a first production pattern, a second production pattern, and a third production pattern. Here, the first production pattern is a production pattern for executing the first stage production (see FIG. 30(F)) and the first stage end production (see FIG. 30(G)). The second production pattern is a production that executes a first stage production (see FIG. 30 (F)), a second stage production (see FIG. 30 (H)), and a second stage end production (see FIG. 30 (I)). It's a pattern. The third production pattern is the first stage production (see FIG. 30(F)), the second stage production (see FIG. 30(H)), the third stage production (see FIG. 30(J)), and the end of the third stage. This is an effect pattern for executing an effect (see FIG. 30(K)).

Although the detailed configuration of the effect pattern selection table for the second change effect for the big win and the effect pattern selection table for the second change effect for the loss will be omitted, the effect pattern selection for the second change effect for the big win will be omitted. When referring to the table, if the above-mentioned three performance patterns are arranged in the order of difficulty to be selected to ease of selection, the order is the first performance pattern, the second performance pattern, and the third performance pattern. In addition, when referring to the effect pattern selection table of the second change effect for losing, when the above three effect patterns are arranged in order from those that are difficult to be selected to those that are easy to be selected, the third effect pattern, the second effect pattern, It becomes the order of the first production pattern.

In addition, regarding the first performance pattern in which the second change performance ends in the first stage, the shorter the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the easier it is to be selected. There is a tendency that the longer the fluctuation time is, the more difficult it is to be selected. Further, regarding the third performance pattern in which the second change performance ends at the upper limit of the third stage, the shorter the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the more difficult it is to be selected, and conversely, the variation of the first special symbol. There is a tendency that the longer the pattern fluctuation time is, the easier it is to be selected.

Based on the result of the second change effect pattern selection process in step S1747, the sub CPU 91 sets information indicating the effect pattern of the second change effect in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the second change effect (step S1748). The setting information of the second change effect set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of this step S1748 is included in the variable effect start command, and the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board are transmitted by the command transmission process in step S40 of FIG. 120, and processing based on the configuration information is executed in these control boards. As a result, the second change effect described above based on FIGS. 30 to 35 is realized.

Following the process of step S1748, the sub CPU 91 acquires the portent effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1750). This predictive effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the predictive effect described above based on FIGS. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state as a precursor effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 .

Next, the sub CPU 91 decides whether to execute the predictive effect, for example, based on whether or not the random number obtained by the process of step S1750 matches any of the predetermined random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not (step S1751). The sub-ROM 92 stores, as predetermined random numbers, a big win random number referred to in the case of a big win and a losing random number referred to in the case of a loss. The sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the current determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80 . Then, when it is specified as "big win", it is determined whether or not to execute the predictive effect based on whether or not the acquired predictive effect random number matches any of the random number values for the big win. When it is specified that it is not a "jackpot", it is determined whether or not to execute the predictive effect based on whether or not the acquired predictive effect random number matches any of the random numbers for losing.

In this embodiment, the sub ROM 92 stores more random numbers than the random numbers for losing as the random numbers for the big win. Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is "jackpot", it is easier to determine that the precursor effect is to be executed than when it is "losing". When it is determined in step S1751 that the sign effect is not to be executed (step S1751: NO), the series of effect pattern setting processing for the second change effect/prediction effect ends, and the process proceeds to step S171 in FIG. .

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the precursor effect is to be executed (step S1751: YES), based on the setting information of the second change effect set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1748, the current first special symbol is displayed. It is determined whether or not the second change effect executed during the variable display ends in the first stage (step S1752). Here, if it is determined that the second change effect ends in the first stage (step S1752: YES), the effect pattern selection table of the precursor effect for ending the first stage is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1752: YES). S1753).

Further, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the second change effect does not end in the first stage (step S1752: NO), the second change effect is terminated in the second stage (step S1754). Here, if it is determined that the second change effect ends in the second stage (step S1754: YES), the effect pattern selection table of the precursor effect for ending the second stage is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1755). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the second change effect does not end in the second stage (step S1754: NO), that is, when the second change effect ends in the third stage, the sign for ending the third stage is displayed. The effect pattern selection table of the effect is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1756).

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S1753, executes the process of step S1755, or executes the process of step S1756, the sub CPU 91 executes a portent effect pattern selection process for selecting the effect pattern of the portent effect ( step S1757).

The performance pattern selection table of the precursor performance for the end of the first stage, the performance pattern selection table of the precursor performance for the end of the second stage, and the performance pattern selection table of the precursor performance for the end of the third stage are all: Random numbers different from each other are associated with each of the plurality of effect patterns of the portent effect. In the process of step S1757, the sub CPU 91 selects an effect pattern associated with a random number that matches the random number obtained in the process of step S1750, and selects the effect pattern selection table of the predictive effect set in the sub RAM 93. By reading from, one effect pattern of the portent effect is selected.

The sub CPU 91 sets information indicating the effect pattern of the portent effect as setting information of the portent effect in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 based on the result of the portent effect pattern selection process of step S1757 (step S1758). The setting information of the precursor effect set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of this step S1758 is included in the variable effect start command, and is sent to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S40 of FIG. The processing based on the transmitted setting information is executed in these control boards. As a result, the portent effect described above based on FIGS. 30 to 35 is realized.

(Production pattern of precursor production for second change production that ends in the first stage)
It should be noted that, in the process of step S1753, referring to the effect pattern selection table of the predictive effect for the end of the first stage set in the sub-RAM 93, when the predictive effect pattern selection process of step S1757 is executed, the final 〇 A ticket reversal effect (see FIG. 30(D)) that informs that the total number is 1, and a judge effect (see FIG. 30(E)) that informs that the second change effect ends in the first stage. , is selected.

FIG. 33(E) shows an example of how two "O" are exposed by the ticket reversal effect, but the ticket notifying that the final total number of "O" is one In the reversal effect, an effect display is performed showing that one "O" is exposed by the ticket reversal effect. Further, FIG. 33(F) exemplifies a state in which a success effect of displaying a happy character and the characters "STEP 2!" is being executed as a judge effect. In the judge performance for notifying that the change performance ends at the first stage, performance display is performed to show how the success performance is being executed by displaying a happy character and the characters "STEP 1!".

Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 30 and the like, the precursor effects include a chance ticket acquisition effect (see FIG. 30B), a ticket increase/decrease effect (see FIG. 30C), and a ticket reversal effect (see FIG. 30 (D)) and a judgment effect (see FIG. 30(E)). When the effect pattern of the precursor effect is selected with reference to the effect pattern selection table of the precursor effect for the end of the first stage, a series of effects illustrated below are executed as a chance ticket acquisition effect, a ticket increase/decrease effect, and a ticket reversal effect. be done.

For example, after one ticket is obtained, an effect is executed in which the number of tickets does not increase or decrease, the ticket is turned upside down, and one circle is exposed. Also, for example, after obtaining one ticket, the number of tickets is increased to two, and an effect is executed in which these tickets are turned upside down to reveal one o and one x. Also, for example, an effect is executed in which after three tickets are obtained, the number of tickets is reduced to one, and the ticket is turned upside down to reveal one ◯.

The effect pattern of the precursor effect illustrated here, which is executed when the second change effect ends in the first stage, is only a part, and when referring to the effect pattern selection table of the precursor effect for the end of the first stage. In order to notify that the second change effect will end in the first stage, the precursor effect is executed in various effect patterns.

(Production pattern of premonition production for second change production that ends in the second stage)
With reference to the effect pattern selection table of the portent effect for ending the second stage set in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S1755, when the portent effect pattern selection process of step S1757 is executed, the final total number of ◯ A ticket reversal effect (for example, see FIG. 33(E)) that informs that there are two tickets, and a judge effect (for example, see FIG. 33(F)) that informs that the second change effect ends in the second stage ), and the effect pattern of the portent effect is selected.

The foreshadowing effect in such an effect pattern is as described with reference to FIG. 33, and FIG. Also, FIG. 33(F) exemplifies a state in which a judging effect in which a happy character and the characters "STEP 2!" are displayed is executed.

When the effect pattern of the precursor effect is selected by referring to the effect pattern selection table of the predictive effect for the end of the second stage, a series of effects illustrated below are executed as a chance ticket acquisition effect, a ticket increase/decrease effect, and a ticket reversal effect. be done.

For example, an effect is executed in which the number of tickets does not increase or decrease after acquiring two tickets, and the two tickets are turned upside down to reveal two circles. Also, for example, after obtaining one ticket, the number of tickets is increased to two, and an effect is executed in which the two tickets are turned upside down to reveal two circles. Also, as exemplified in FIGS. 33A to 33E, after acquiring three tickets, the number of tickets is reduced to two, and these two tickets are turned upside down to reveal two circles. A wacky production is executed. Also, for example, after obtaining one ticket, the number of tickets is increased to three, and an effect is executed in which these three tickets are reversed to reveal two ◯ and one x.

The effect pattern of the portent effect illustrated here, which is executed when the second change effect ends in the second stage, is only a part, and when referring to the effect pattern selection table of the portent effect for the end of the second stage. In order to notify that the second change effect will end in the second stage, the precursor effect is executed in various effect patterns.

(Production pattern of precursor production for second change production that ends in the third stage)
With reference to the effect pattern selection table of the portent effect for ending the third stage set in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S1756, when the portent effect pattern selection process of step S1757 is executed, the final total number of ◯ a ticket reversal effect (see, for example, FIG. 34(E)) that informs that there are three tickets, and a judge effect (see FIG. 34(F)) that informs that the second change effect ends in the third stage. , is selected.

The foreshadowing effect in such a effect pattern is as described with reference to FIG. 34, and FIG. FIG. 34(F) exemplifies a state in which a judging effect in which a happy character and the characters "STEP 3 confirmed!" are displayed is executed. .

When the effect pattern of the predictive effect is selected with reference to the effect pattern selection table of the predictive effect for the end of the third stage, a series of effects illustrated below are executed as a chance ticket acquisition effect, a ticket increase/decrease effect, and a ticket reversal effect. be done.

For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 34(A) to (E), after acquiring 3 tickets, the number of tickets increases to 4, and these 4 tickets are turned inside out to form 3 〇 and 1 An effect is executed in which a number of x's are exposed. Also, for example, after obtaining one ticket, the number of tickets is increased to three, and an effect is executed in which these three tickets are turned upside down to expose three ◯. Also, for example, after obtaining two tickets, the number of tickets increases to four, and an effect is executed in which these four tickets are reversed to expose three ◯ and one x.

The effect pattern of the precursor effect illustrated here, which is executed when the second change effect ends in the third stage, is only a part, and the effect pattern selection table of the precursor effect for the end of the third stage is referred to. In order to inform that the second change effect will end in the third stage, the precursor effect is executed in various effect patterns.

[Production pattern setting processing for step-change production/expectation production by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 66 is a detailed flow chart of the effect pattern setting process of step change effect/expectation effect in step S176 of FIG. In order to execute and control the step change effect and the expected effect described above based on FIGS. 36 to 39, the sub CPU 91 performs a series of step change effect/ A production pattern setting process for an expected production is executed.

The sub CPU 91 first acquires a step change effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1760). This step change effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the step change effect described above based on FIGS. be. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state as a step change effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 .

Next, the sub CPU 91 executes a step change effect based on whether or not the step change effect random number obtained by the process of step S1760 matches any of the predetermined random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92, for example. It is determined whether or not to do so (step S1761). Here, when it is determined not to execute the step change effect (step S1761: NO), the series of step change effect/expected effect effect pattern setting processing is completed, and the process proceeds to step S172 in FIG.

When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the stage change effect (step S1761: YES), it executes expected effect selection processing (step S1762). In this embodiment, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 36, when executing the stage change effect, the first stage is the final stage, the second stage is the final stage, and the third stage is In some cases, it is the final stage. The expected effect selection process described above is an expectation indicated by the expected effect icon confirmation stop effect (see, for example, FIG. This is a process for determining the production.

In this embodiment, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 58, various advance notice effects such as special cut-in, character standby effects, subjugation effects, chance effects, suggestion effects, and other advance notice effects are executed. The sub CPU 91 selects one expected effect to be executed after the end of the step-change effect from the advance notice effects for which the effect patterns are set, among these advance notice effects. For example, if there is only one advance notice effect that satisfies this condition, that advance notice effect is selected as the expected effect. Further, for example, when there are a plurality of advance notice effects corresponding to this upper limit, lottery using the effect random numbers is performed, and one advance notice effect is selected as the expected effect based on the result of the lottery. It should be noted that, in this way, when one of the plurality of notice effects is selected as the expected effect, the jackpot reliability of these notice effects is compared, and the notice effect with the highest jackpot reliability is expected. You may make it select as production|presentation.

Following the process of step S1762, the sub CPU 91, based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80, determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot". It is determined whether or not there is (step S1763). Here, when it is determined to be a big hit (step S1763: YES), the effect pattern selection table of the step change effect for the big win is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1764). Conversely, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S1763: NO), the effect pattern selection table of the step change effect for losing is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1765).

When the sub CPU 91 sets the stage change effect pattern selection table for big wins or losses in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1764 or the process of step S1765, the sub CPU 91 executes the step change effect pattern selection process (step S1766). ).

In the effect pattern selection table for the second change effect for the big win and the effect pattern selection table for the second change effect for the loss, the type of expected effect to be notified, the effect pattern of the step change effect, and the first special A symbol variation pattern is associated with a random number value to be compared with a step change effect random number. After setting the effect pattern selection table for one of the stage change effects, the sub CPU 91 sets the type of expected effect selected in the process of step S1762 in step S1766, and the number specified based on the above-described variation start command. The effect pattern of step change effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of 1 special symbol and the random number of step change effect obtained by the process of step S1760 is read out from the effect pattern selection table of step change effect set in the sub-RAM 93. By doing so, one production pattern of the stage change production is selected.

The effect patterns of the step-change effect in this embodiment are roughly classified into three types: effect pattern A, effect pattern B, and effect pattern C. FIG. Here, the production pattern A is a production pattern including a first stage production (see FIG. 36A) and an expected production icon confirmation stop production in the first stage (see FIG. 36C). Production pattern B includes a first stage production (see FIG. 36A), a development icon confirmation stop production (see FIG. 36F), a second stage production (see FIG. 36G), and a second stage production (see FIG. 36G). Expected effect icon finalization stop effect (see FIG. 36(I)) in the stage. Production pattern C includes a first stage production (see FIG. 36A), a development icon fix stop production (see FIG. 36F), a second stage production (see FIG. 36G), and a development icon Effect including fixed stop effect (see FIG. 36(L)), third stage effect (see FIG. 36(M)), and third stage expected effect icon fixed stop effect (see FIG. 36(O)) It's a pattern.

Although the detailed configuration of the production pattern selection table for step-change production for big wins and the production pattern selection table for step-change production for losing will be omitted, refer to the production pattern selection table for step-change production for big wins. In this case, if the above-mentioned three production patterns are arranged in the order from the one that is difficult to be selected to the one that is easy to be selected, the order of production pattern A, production pattern B, and production pattern C is obtained. In addition, when referring to the performance pattern selection table of the step-change performance for losing, when the above three performance patterns are arranged in order from those that are difficult to select to those that are easy to select, the order of performance pattern C, performance pattern B, and performance pattern A is obtained. becomes.

In addition, regarding the production pattern A in which the stage change production ends at the first stage, the shorter the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the easier it is to be selected, and conversely, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol The longer it is, the less likely it is to be selected. In addition, regarding the performance pattern C in which the stage change performance ends at the upper limit of the third stage, the shorter the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the more difficult it is to be selected, and conversely, the variation of the variation pattern of the first special symbol. There is a tendency that the longer the time, the easier it is to be selected.

The sub CPU 91 sets information indicating the effect pattern of the step change effect in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the step change effect based on the result of the step change effect pattern selection process of step S1766 (step S1767). The step change effect setting information set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S1767 is included in the variable effect start command, and by the command transmission process in step S40 of FIG. , and processing based on the setting information is executed in these control boards. As a result, the above-described step-change effect is realized based on FIGS. 36-39.

It should be noted that the number of performance patterns classified into the performance pattern A in which the step-change performance ends at the first stage is not one, but a large number of performance patterns classified into the performance pattern A are prepared. FIG. 37(D) exemplifies an icon change effect that is executed during the first stage effect when the step change effect ends in the first stage. Further, FIG. 38(B) exemplifies an icon change effect that is executed during the first stage effect when the step change effect ends in the third stage. As is clear from the comparison between FIG. 37(D) and FIG. 38(B), even if the icon variation effect is executed during the same first stage effect, the plurality of icons that are variably displayed during the icon variation effect It can be understood that many types, combinations, and arrangements are prepared.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, production pattern B in which the stage change production ends in the second stage,
A large number of performance patterns are also prepared for each of the performance pattern C in which the step-change performance ends at the third stage.

[Related effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 67 is a detailed flowchart of the related effect pattern setting process in step S171 of FIG. The sub CPU 91 executes a series of related effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG. 67 following the process of step S171 in FIG. In this related effect pattern setting process, the player can operate the operation lever 98 to visually recognize the desired related effect with respect to the past related effect, the present related effect, and the future related effect described above based on FIGS. It is a process to make it so.

The sub CPU 91 first acquires a related effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1720). This related effect random number determines whether or not to execute the related effect, in other words, whether to make the related effect executable in the related effect window 75 (see FIG. 14) according to the operation of the operation lever 98 by the player. It is a random number for determining whether or not, and is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state as a related effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 .

Next, the sub CPU 91 performs a related effect lottery (step S1721). The sub ROM 92 stores a random value (winning value) to be compared with the related effect random number. It is determined whether or not to execute the related effect based on whether or not it matches with the random number value (winning value).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub-ROM 92 stores random numbers (winning values) for big wins and random numbers (winning values) for losing as the random numbers (winning values) related to the related effect lottery. , are stored. Based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, when the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", the acquired and stored related effect random number is used for the jackpot. Random value (winning value). On the other hand, based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, when it is specified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss", the acquired and stored related effect random number is changed to the above-mentioned random number for failure. Compare with a numerical value (winning value).

The sub-ROM 92 stores more random numbers (winning values) than those for losing (winning values) related to the related attraction lottery as big win random numbers (winning values). Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal game state is "jackpot", it is easy to decide to execute the related effect, and conversely, "losing" , it is difficult to decide to execute the related effect.

When the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol this time is "big hit", the processing of steps S165 to S171 in FIG. 58 makes the reliability of the big hit relatively high. An effect pattern of the notice effect is set, and during the variable display of the first special symbol, the notice effect with relatively high reliability of the big win is executed.

On the other hand, as described above, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is "jackpot", the related effect is likely to be executed, and the player can operate the operation lever. By operating 98, an opportunity to display information related to various advance notice effects with relatively high jackpot reliability on the related effect window 95 is likely to be given. For this reason, the player's expectation for the execution of the winning notification effect can be effectively increased by the synergistic effect of various advance notice effects with relatively high jackpot reliability and related effects related to these notice effects. can be improved. Also, regarding the case of "losing", when a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the related effect is likely to be executable. Therefore, even in the case of "losing", it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for execution of the winning notification effect.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the related effect based on the lottery result of step S1721 (step S1722). Here, when it is determined not to execute the related effect (step S1722: NO), the related effect pattern setting process is terminated, and the process is returned to step S165 in FIG.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the related effect (step S1722: YES), it executes the past effect selection process (step S1723), executes the current effect selection process (step S1724), and executes the future effect selection process. (step S1725).

As the past effect selection process in step S1723, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. 57, each effect (for example, ready-to-reach establishment effect, ready-to-win effect, etc.) that constitutes a variable effect in which the effect pattern is set by the processing of FIG. One example is a process of selecting effects A to C in FIG.

Further, as the current effect selection process in step S1724, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. In the case where the currently related effect C related to the effect C is made executable, each effect (for example, ready-to-win effect, ready-to-win effect, etc.) that constitutes a variable effect in which the effect pattern is set by the processing of FIG. One example is the process of selecting effects A to C in FIG.

Further, as the future effect selection processing in step S1725, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. can be executed, each effect that constitutes the variable effect in which the effect pattern is set by the processing of FIG. One example is a process of selecting effects B and C as referred to in FIG.

Following the process of step S1725, the sub CPU 91 executes related effect pattern selection process (step S1726). For example, when the three effects of effect A, effect B, and effect C shown in FIG. , and past-related effects C, and the process of setting the executable period of each past-related effect is performed.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 91 selects the three effects of the effect A, the effect B, and the effect C shown in FIG. A, a currently related effect B, and a currently related effect C are selected, and a process of setting an executable period of each currently related effect is performed.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 91 selects the two effects of the effect B and the effect C shown in FIG. A process of selecting the performance contents of each future-related performance C and setting the executable period of each future-related performance is performed.

In this way, when the sub CPU 91 executes the related effect pattern selection process for each effect of the past effect, the current effect, and the future effect in step S1726, the sub RAM 93 stores the information indicating the selection result as the related effect pattern setting information. Store in a predetermined area (step S1727).

In the present embodiment, during a period in which the execution period of the past-related effects, the execution period of the current-related effects, and the execution period of the future-related effects overlap, the player can perform any of the related effects. A case in which all the processes of steps S1723 to S1725 are executed in order to enable arbitrary selection by operating the operation lever 98 will be described as an example. On the other hand, in other embodiments, only one or two of steps S1723 to S1725 may be performed.

58 to 67, the processing for setting the effect pattern of various advance notice effects executed in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described. There is a production with overlapping timings, and if production patterns are set for both of these advance notice productions, there is a possibility that the production cannot be controlled appropriately. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a priority is set for each of the advance notice effects whose execution timings may overlap. When a pattern is set, the effect pattern setting process for the notice effect with lower priority is not executed, and even if the effect pattern is set, if the priority of the notice effect is low, the effect pattern setting information is set. Effect control such as discarding and executing the notice effect with the higher priority is performed.

[Operation reception processing by sub-control board 90]
68 to 70 are detailed flowcharts of the operation acceptance process in step S30 of FIG. The sub CPU 91 executes the following process following the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. That is, the sub CPU 91, for example, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub RAM 93 by the processing of step S1727 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the related effect is valid (step S401).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the past-related effect is valid (step S401: YES), the operation signal notifies that the lever button has been pressed while the operation lever 98 is tilted backward (toward the front). is input, it is determined whether or not the rear selection lever of the operation lever 98 has been operated (step S402). Here, when it is determined that the selection lever operation after the operation lever 98 has been performed (step S402: YES), a past-related effect start command is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S403). Specifically, based on the related performance pattern setting information set in the sub-RAM 93, the performance content of the past-related performance to be executed in response to the operation of the rear selection lever during the current valid period is specified, and the specified past-related performance is specified. A past-related effect start command instructing the execution of is set in the sub-RAM 93.

This past-related effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S40 of FIG. By executing the process based on, the past-related effect instructed by the sub CPU 91 is started.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S403, when it determines that the past-related effect is not valid (step S401: NO), when it determines that the rear selection lever operation of the operation lever 98 is not performed. (Step S402: NO), for example, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S1727 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the relevant effect is currently valid (step S404).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the relevant effect is currently valid (step S404: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether an operation signal notifying that the lever button has been pressed without tilting the operation lever 98 has been input. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the operation lever 98 has been operated without direction selection (step S405). Here, when it is determined that the lever operation without direction selection of the operation lever 98 is performed (step S405: YES), the current related effect start command is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S406). Specifically, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub-RAM 93, the effect content of the currently related effect to be executed in response to the lever operation without direction selection during the current valid period is specified, and the specified current related effect is specified. A current related effect start command instructing the execution of the effect is set in the sub-RAM93.

This current-related effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S40 of FIG. By executing the process based on, the current related effect instructed by the sub CPU 91 is started.

When the sub CPU 91 has executed the process of step S406, when it determines that the relevant effect is not currently valid (step S404: NO), it determines that the lever operation without direction selection of the operation lever 98 has not been performed. In the case (step S405: NO), for example, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub RAM 93 by the processing of step S1727 in FIG. , it is determined whether or not the future-related effect is valid (step S407).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the future-related effect is valid (step S407: YES), an operation signal notifying that the lever button has been pressed while the operation lever 98 is tilted forward (forward) is generated. Based on whether or not an input has been made, it is determined whether or not the front selection lever of the operation lever 98 has been operated (step S408). Here, when it is determined that the front selection lever operation of the operation lever 98 has been performed (step S408: YES), a future-related effect start command is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S409). Specifically, based on the related performance pattern setting information set in the sub-RAM 93, the performance content of the future-related performance to be executed in response to the operation of the previous selection lever during the current effective period is specified, and the specified future-related performance is specified. A future-related effect start command instructing the execution of is set in the sub-RAM 93.

This future-related effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S40 of FIG. By executing the processing based on, the future-related effect instructed by the sub CPU 91 is started.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S409, when it determines that the future-related effect is not valid (step S407: NO), when it determines that the front selection lever operation of the operation lever 98 is not performed. (Step S408: NO), as illustrated in FIG. 69, setting information indicating that the subjugation reach variable effect pattern is "variable effect pattern A" is stored in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S1676 described above. (step S411). Here, if it is determined that the sub-RAM 93 does not store the setting information indicating that the subjugation reach variable effect pattern is "variable effect pattern A" (step S411: NO), the process proceeds to step S429 in FIG. 70 described later. Processing proceeds.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the sub RAM 93 stores the setting information indicating that the subjugation reach variable performance pattern is the “variation performance pattern A” (step S411: YES), the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion performance (Fig. 17(C)) is valid (step S412). Specifically, in this embodiment, information indicating the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect is generated by the processing of step S1676 in FIG. The included effect pattern setting information is set in the sub RAM 93 . Therefore, the sub CPU 91, based on the information indicating the effective period and the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the subjugation reach is executed, determines the effectiveness of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect. Determine whether or not it is in the period.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that it is during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect (step S412: YES), it determines whether or not the first effect button 35 has been operated (step S413). Here, when it is determined that the first effect button 35 has not been operated (step S413: NO), the process proceeds to step S421, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the first effect button 35 has been operated (step S412: YES), the current operation of the first effect button 35 is the first operation during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect. It is determined whether or not (step S414). Here, if it is determined that it is the first operation (step S414: YES), as described above with reference to FIG. ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current operation of the first effect button 35 is not the first operation during the effective period of the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect (step S414: NO), the operation described above based on FIG. As shown, a subjugation success effect lottery that wins with a probability of 10% is executed (step S416).

Then, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the subjugation success effect lottery in step S415 or step S416 is won (step S417). Here, if it is determined that one of the subjugation success effect lotteries has been won (step S417: YES), the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect is terminated (step S418), and the above-mentioned based on FIG. 17 (E) Then, the subjugation success effect is executed (step S419). Specifically, a command for instructing the execution of the subjugation success effect is set in the sub-RAM 93 .

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the first effect button 35 has not been operated (step S413: NO), it determines whether or not the second effect button 36 has been operated (step S421). Here, if it is determined that the second effect button 36 has been operated (step S421: YES), whether or not the operation is the first operation of the second effect button 36 during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect is determined (step S422).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the operation of the second effect button 36 is the first operation of the second effect button 36 during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion effect (step S422: YES), FIG. ), as described above, the subjugation success effect lottery is executed with a probability of 100% (step S423). In this way, since you will win the subjugation success effect lottery here with a probability of 100%, the valid period is terminated (step S424) as in the process of step S418, and the subjugation success effect is displayed in the same manner as in the process of step S419. Execute (step S425).

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the subjugation reach of the variable production pattern A is executed, in response to the first operation of the second production button 36 during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated hitting promotion production, A configuration of executing subjugation success production is adopted. For this reason, unlike what was described above based on FIG. You may perform the process after step S424, without performing.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the sub RAM 93 does not store setting information indicating that the subjugation reach variable effect pattern is "variable effect pattern A" (step S411: NO), , it is determined whether or not it is in the effective period of the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect (step S429). Specifically, in this embodiment, the processing of step S1676 in FIG. In addition, the sub-RAM 93 is set with effect pattern setting information including information indicating the effective period of the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect. For this reason, the sub CPU 91, based on the information indicating the validity period of the latter, and the elapsed time after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the subjugation reach is executed, is related to the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect. It is determined whether or not it is within the valid period.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that it is during the effective period of the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect (step S429: YES), it determines whether or not the first effect button 35 has been operated (step S430). When the sub CPU 91 determines that the first effect button 35 has been operated (step S430: YES), the second special symbol of this time based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80. It is determined whether or not the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation is "10R probability variation" (step S431). Here, when it is determined that it is not "10R probability variation" (step S431: NO), the process proceeds to step S439 which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that it is "10R probability variation" (step S431: YES), whether or not the current operation of the first effect button 35 is the first operation during the valid period related to the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect. is determined (step S432). Here, if it is determined that it is the first operation (step S432: YES), as described above with reference to FIG. step S433). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current operation of the first effect button 35 is not the first operation during the effective period of the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect (step S432: NO), the operation described above with reference to FIG. As shown, the second follow-up success effect lottery is executed with a probability of 15% (step S434).

Then, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the second follow-up success effect lottery in step S433 or step S434 is won (step S435). Here, if it is determined that any of the second follow-up success effect lottery has been won (step S435: YES), the valid period related to the follow-up attack button repeated hitting promotion effect is terminated (step S436), and based on FIG. 17 (O) Then, the above-described second follow-up success effect is executed (step S437). Specifically, a command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the execution of the second follow-up success effect.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that it is not "10R probability variation" (step S431: NO), it determines whether it is "3R probability variation" (step S439). Here, if it is determined to be "3R probability variation" (step S439: YES), whether or not the current operation of the first effect button 35 is the first operation during the effective period related to the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect is determined (step S440). Here, if it is determined that it is the first operation (step S440: YES), as described above with reference to FIG. step S441). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current operation of the first effect button 35 is not the first operation during the effective period of the follow-up button repeated hitting promotion effect (step S440: NO), that is, if it is the second or subsequent operation. , as described above with reference to FIG. 18(C), the first follow-up success effect lottery is executed with a probability of 20% (step S442).

Then, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the first follow-up success effect lottery in step S441 or step S442 is won (step S443). Here, if it is determined that one of the first follow-up success effect lotteries has been won (step S443: YES), the effective period related to the follow-up attack button repeated hitting promotion effect is terminated (step S444), and based on FIG. 17 (M) Then, the above-described first follow-up success effect is executed (step S445). Specifically, a command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the execution of the first follow-up success effect.

[Interrupt processing by image sound control board 100]
Next, interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 100. FIG. The image sound control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 71 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as power-on and power-off. .

First, the image sound control CPU 101 executes image display control processing for controlling image display on the display screen 70 based on the command received from the sub-control board 90 (step S71). This image display control processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the processing of step S71, the image sound control CPU 101 executes sound effect output control processing for outputting various sound effects from the speaker 38 in synchronization with or asynchronously with the screen display performed on the display screen 70. (step S72).

Following the processing of step S72, the image sound control CPU 101 executes data transmission control processing (step S73). Specifically, data relating to image sound control performed in the image sound control board 100 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 . In response, the sub control board 90 transfers the data received from the image sound control board 100 to the lamp control board 120 . As a result, the frame lamp 37, the board surface lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are controlled so as to synchronize with the presentation performed by the display screen 70 and the speaker .

[Image display control processing by image sound control board 100]
FIG. 72 is a detailed flowchart of image display control processing in step S71 of FIG. The image sound control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S711). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

On the other hand, when the image sound control CPU 101 determines that it has received a command from the sub-control board 90 (step S711: YES), it sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 103 (step S712). Then, based on the setting information set in the control RAM 103, it determines how the effect image should be displayed on the display screen 70, creates a display list for controlling the drawing processing of the VDP 104, and displays it in a predetermined area of the control RAM 103. (step S713), and the display list is set in the display list storage area of VRAM 106 (step S714). The VDP 104 executes drawing processing based on the display list set in the display list storage area, thereby realizing the effect display instructed by the sub-control board 90 .

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
A win notification effect for notifying that the determination means has determined that the special game is executed, a first expectation effect for expecting execution of the win notification effect, and execution of the win notification effect. It is possible to execute a second expectation effect that makes you expect,
During the execution of the first expected performance, when the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content, and when the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content. There are times when you don't,
A first probability that the second expected performance is started in a state where the performance content of the first expected performance has not changed from the first performance content to the second performance content, and the performance content of the first expected performance. A second probability that the second expected effect is started after the change from the first effect content to the second effect content is different from each other.

According to this gaming machine, the first probability that the second expected performance is started before the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content, and the performance content of the first expected performance is the same. A second probability of starting a second expected effect after changing from the first effect content to the second effect content is different from each other. Therefore, it is possible for the player who expects the execution of the second expected performance to pay attention to whether or not the performance contents of the first expected performance will change. It is possible to obtain a high performance effect due to the synergistic effect of

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
The second probability is higher than the first probability.

According to this gaming machine, after the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content, the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content. Compared to before the change, the second expectation effect is started more easily. Therefore, the player who expects the execution of the second expected performance can expect that the performance content of the first expected performance will change from the first performance content to the second performance content. By changing the performance contents of the first expected performance, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the second expected performance.

(Reference Invention 2)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The effects based on the determination result include a first effect executed at a first timing and a second effect executed at a second timing different from the first timing,
The production control means is
A first related effect related to the first effect is executed according to a first operation by the player, and a second related effect related to the second effect is executed according to a second operation by the player. It is characterized by

According to this gaming machine, if the operation by the player is the first operation, the first related effect related to the first effect is executed, and if the operation by the player is the second operation, the second effect is executed. A second related effect related to is executed. Therefore, by changing the operation, the player can arbitrarily acquire information about one of the first effect and the second effect, and the operation corresponding effect is fixed regardless of the operation. It is possible to execute an operation corresponding production with a high production effect compared to the case.

(Reference invention 3)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
Based on the result of the determination, a first operation prompting effect prompting the player to perform the first operation during the first period, and the player performing the second operation during the second period after the first period. and a second operation promotion effect prompting to
executing either a first success effect or a first failure effect in response to the fact that the first operation is performed during the first period;
executing either a second success effect or a second failure effect in response to the fact that the second operation is performed during the second period;
When the first success performance is executed, neither the second success performance nor the second failure performance is executed, and when the first failure performance is executed, the second success performance and the second failure performance are executed. It is characterized by being able to execute either one of

According to this gaming machine, when the first failure effect is executed, the second operation promoting effect is executed after that, and the second operation during the second period during which the second operation promoting effect is executed. Accordingly, the second success effect may be executed. In this way, even if the first failure effect is executed, the second success effect may be executed after that. It is possible to easily and effectively suppress the occurrence of the problem that the expectation of the performance is remarkably lowered.

(Reference Invention 4)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
A game machine comprising a game control unit for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control unit for controlling effect,
The game control unit is
Acquisition means for acquiring a plurality of information including acquisition information and type information;
determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired information acquired by the acquisition means;
Determination means for determining the type of the special game based on the type information acquired together with the acquisition information used for the determination when the determination means determines that the special game is executed;
special game executing means for executing the special game determined by the determining means;
a game control means for controlling a game in one of a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state;
a holding means capable of holding the judgment right;
Prior determination means for performing a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made for the right reserved by the reserve means;
A transmission means for transmitting information to the production control unit,
The production control unit is
receiving means for receiving information transmitted by the transmitting means;
a production executing means for executing production based on the information received by the receiving means;
Acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means includes at least first acquisition information and second acquisition information,
The determination means is
In the first game state, when the first acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means, it is determined that the special game is to be executed, and when the second acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means, the Determining not to execute a special game,
In the second game state, it is determined to execute the special game in both the case where the acquisition means acquires the first acquired information and the case where the second acquired information is acquired. ,
The game control unit is
When the second acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means, special game information capable of specifying the type of special game based on the type information acquired by the acquisition means together with the second acquisition information further comprising obtainable special game information obtaining means,
The transmission means is
When the second acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means, the pre-determination information indicating the result of the preliminary determination by the pre-determination means and the special game information acquired by the special game information acquisition means are described above. It can be sent to the production control unit,
The production executing means is
A predetermined effect can be executed based on the advance determination information and the special game information received by the receiving means.

According to this gaming machine, when it is determined that the special game is not executed in the first gaming state, while the second acquisition information is determined that the special game is to be executed in the second gaming state, the preliminary determination is performed. In addition to the preliminary determination information indicating the result, special game information capable of specifying the type of special game is transmitted to the effect control section. Therefore, when the determination by the determining means is suspended, it is pre-determined that the special game will not be executed because it is in the first game state, but when the determination by the determining means is actually performed, it is in the second game state. Since the special game information is transmitted even when it is determined to execute the special game, it is possible to execute an effective predetermined effect based on the pre-determination information and the special game information.

(Reference Invention 5)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, a symbol display control means for causing a predetermined special symbol display means to variably display the special symbol and then stop displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination;
special game executing means for executing the special game when a special symbol indicating that the special game is determined by the determining means to be executed is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
Executing a variable effect of variably displaying the effect symbols along with the variable display of the special symbols, executing a stop effect of stopping and displaying the effect symbols indicating the result of the determination along with the stop display of the special symbols,
The stop effects include a first stop effect for informing that the special game will be executed and a second stop effect for informing that the special game will not be executed,
The production control means is
It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the second stop effect that foretells that the first stop effect will be executed.

By the way, if the period in which the second stop effect (informing that the special game is not executed) is repeatedly executed without executing the first stop effect (informing that the special game is to be executed) continues for a long time. , the player's expectation for the execution of the special game will decrease, and as a result, there is a concern that the player will feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described above, the second stop effect that announces the execution of the first stop effect (informing that the special game will be executed) may be executed. Therefore, by executing the second stop effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the special game will be executed, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player.

(Reference invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
a pattern display control means for causing a predetermined pattern display means to variably display a pattern when the determination is made, and then stop-displaying a pattern indicating the result of the determination;
a special game executing means for executing the special game when a symbol indicating that the special game has been determined by the determining means is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
Based on the result of the determination, a win notification effect for notifying that the special game will be executed, an expectation effect for expecting that the win notification effect will be executed, and a possibility that the win notification effect will be executed. Suggesting that there is a rendition that suggests that there is a viable
The suggestive effects include a low suggestive effect suggesting that the possibility is relatively low and a highly suggestive effect suggesting that the possibility is relatively high,
The production control means is
When executing the expected performance and the suggestive performance during the variable display of the symbols, it is possible to execute suggestive performance control to execute the low suggestive performance without executing the high suggestive performance during the variable display of the symbols. can be,
It is characterized in that the possibility that the expectation performance and the low suggestive performance are executed is higher than that the low suggestive performance is executed without the expectation performance being executed.

The high suggestive production is a production that suggests that the possibility of executing the hit notification production is relatively high, while the low suggestive production has a relatively low possibility of executing the hit notification production. It is a production that suggests that. Therefore, the player expects that the highly suggestive effect is executed more than the low suggestive effect. There is a concern that the player's sense of expectation for the execution of is remarkably lowered. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine, when the expected performance is executed during the variable display of the symbols, the low suggestive performance is executed without executing the high suggestive performance during the variable display of the symbols. . Further, the execution of the expectation effect and the low-suggestion effect is more likely (execution of the hit notification effect) than the execution of the low-suggestion effect without the execution of the expectation effect. For this reason, the low-suggestion performance is a performance that cannot be expected to be executed in response to the execution of the low-suggestion performance along with the expectation performance. In addition to improving the player's impression, the low-suggestion performance can give the player a good impression that the execution of the winning notification performance can be expected if combined with the expectation performance, and the low-suggestion performance is frequent. It is possible to easily and effectively suppress the above-described problem that the player's sense of expectation for the performance of the winning notification effect is remarkably lowered.

(Reference Invention 7)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a change production that can be changed in stages to any one of a plurality of stages,
characterized in that, when the changing effect in which a stage among the plurality of stages is the final stage is executed, a related effect specific to the final stage related to the final stage effect is executed. be.

According to this gaming machine, when a change effect in which one of the plurality of stages is the final stage is executed, a related effect unique to the final stage related to the final stage effect is executed. Therefore, based on the related performance, the player can easily recognize that the changing performance has ended at a certain stage, and the synergistic effect between the final stage performance and the related performance increases the interest. It is possible to perform high performance.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The final stage effect is a effect of displaying a first effect image representing a predetermined display object,
The related effect is characterized by displaying a second effect image different from the first effect image, which represents a display object common to the display object.

According to this gaming machine, in the related effect, a different effect image from the final stage effect is displayed, but the same display object as the final stage display object is displayed. Therefore, the continuity between the final stage effect and the related effect is improved, and it is possible to execute the final stage effect and the related effect without discomfort.

(Reference Invention 8)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to execute a winning notification effect for notifying that the special game will be executed,
It is possible to execute a change performance that can be changed stepwise to any stage below a predetermined stage, and a sign performance that is a sign of the change performance,
The change effect is a effect in which the more the change effect changes, the higher the possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed,
The premonitory effect is characterized in that the change effect is an effect capable of suggesting the possibility that the change effect will change to one step below the predetermined step.

According to this game machine, the more the changing performance changes, the higher the possibility that the winning notification performance will be executed. It is suggested that there is a possibility that the Therefore, the player can recognize in advance the degree of possibility that the changing effect will change to the first stage based on the predictive effect, and the predictive effect that the changing effect will be executed. It is possible to effectively suggest the possibility that the change production will change to the first stage while making the expectation by.

(Reference Invention 9)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
Based on the result of the determination, a stage change effect that can be changed in stages to any stage below the predetermined stage with a predetermined stage as the upper limit, and a hit notification effect that notifies that the special game will be executed; an expectation effect that makes the user expect that the hit notification effect will be executed, and
When performing one stage of the step change performance, a corresponding image corresponding to the expected performance is displayed in a possibility suggesting state suggesting that the expected performance may be executed. a first production control;
The display state of the corresponding image is changed from the possibility suggesting state to a definite notification state for definitely notifying that the expected performance corresponding to the corresponding image is to be executed, and the step change performance during execution. is terminated at the one stage, and a second effect control for executing the expected effect corresponding to the corresponding image in the confirmed notification state;
The stage change performance being executed is changed from the one stage performance to the next stage performance without changing the display state of the corresponding image from the possibility suggestion state to the confirmation notification state. 3 production control, and a game machine characterized by being able to execute.

According to this gaming machine, when the display state of the corresponding image changes from the possibility suggesting state to the definite notification state, the stage change effect is terminated at the first stage and the expected effect is executed, while the corresponding image does not change from the possibility suggestion state to the definite notification state, the step change effect changes from one step effect to the next step effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the flow of subsequent effects based on the display state of the corresponding image, and the display state of the corresponding image changes from the possibility suggesting state to the definite notification state. It is possible to enjoy the game while expecting that (or that the display state of the corresponding image does not change from the possibility suggesting state to the confirmed notification state).

Incidentally, the inventions of Reference Inventions 1 to 9 may be combined.

[Modification]
In the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a type 1 pachinko machine called a so-called V-ST machine, but the present invention can be applied to a type 1 type pachinko machine called a variable loop type. , a single-type pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, and a so-called one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko game machine.

Further, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is needless to say that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. In addition, the order of processing, set values, random values, threshold values used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and other orders and values may be used without departing from the scope of the present invention. It goes without saying that The drawings and the like exemplified in the above embodiments are also merely examples, and may be in other aspects.

1 Game Machine (Pachinko Game Machine) 7 Image Display Device 21 First Starting Port 22 Second Starting Port 23 Opening/Closing Member 26 First Large Winning Port 28 Second Large Winning Port 41 First Special Symbol Display device, 42 second special symbol display device, 70 display screen, 75 related effect window, 76 past window, 77 present window, 78 future window, 80 main control board, 81 main CPU, 90 sub-control board, 91 sub-CPU, 98 Operation lever 100 Image sound control board 101 Image sound control CPU 211 First starting opening sensor 221 Second starting opening sensor 261 First big winning opening sensor 262 First big winning opening solenoid 281 Second big winning opening Opening sensor, 282 2nd grand winning opening solenoid, 283 V winning opening sensor, 284 discharge opening sensor, 285 slide member, 286 V winning opening solenoid, 287 V winning opening.

Claims (1)

determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to execute a winning notification effect for notifying that the special game will be executed,
It is possible to execute a change performance that can be changed stepwise to any stage below a predetermined stage, and a sign performance that is a sign of the change performance,
The change effect is a effect in which the more the change effect changes, the higher the possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed,
A gaming machine, wherein the predictive effect is an effect capable of suggesting the possibility that the changing effect will change to one stage below the predetermined stage.

Images